E4296 v1 Pakistan Sindh Agriculture Growth Project (SAGP) Environmental and Social Management Framework (ESMF) Department of Agriculture Government of Sindh July 2013 Environmental and Social Management Framework Executive Summary The provincial government of Sindh, Pakistan, through its Department of Agriculture(DoA) and Department of Livestock and Fisheries (DoLF), is planning to undertake the Sindh Agriculture Growt Project (SAGP) in various parts of the Province, and seeking the World Bank (WB) assistance for this purpose. In line with the prevailing legislation in the Country, and WB safeguard policies, an environmental and social assessment of the Project has been carried out and the presnet Environmental and Social Management Framework (ESMF) has been prepared. Project Overview The Government of Pakistan (GoPak) and Government of Sindh (GoSindh) have both highlighted commercial agriculture and market linkages as priority investments for the sector. GoSindh has also prioritized investments in support of small and medium farmers and in value chains that will positively impact women. The project will improve marketing infrastructure and facilitate reform in local marketing regulations and policies to enhance competitiveness. The project consists of three components: Component A comprises capacity building of producers, modernization of extension services and agricultural research, and strategic planning for the agricultural sector; Component B comprises horticulture value chains, post-harvest loss management, livestock value chains, and demand driven investment fund; and Component C comprises project management, monitoring and evaluation. Further project details are presented later in the document. For the SAGP implementation, a Project Management Unit (PMU) will be established in each of the implementing agencies (i.e. DoA and DoLF). In addition, Project Implementation Units (PIUs) will be established at district level. Regulatory and Policy Overview The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 (the Act) is the basic legislative tool empowering the government to frame regulations for the protection of the environment. The Act is applicable to a broad range of issues and extends to socioeconomic aspects, land acquisition, air, water, soil, marine and noise pollution, as well as the handling of hazardous waste. The discharge or emission of any effluent, waste, air pollutant or noise in an amount, concentration or level in excess of the National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) specified by the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (Pak- EPA) has been prohibited under the Act, and penalties have been prescribed for those contravening the provisions of the Act. This Act will be applicable to the proposed SAGP. The World Bank’s Operation Policy 4.01 (OP 4.01) requires environmental assessment (EA) of projects proposed for Bank financing to help ensure that they are environmentally sound and sustainable, and thus to improve decision making. The OP defines the EA process and various types of the EA instruments. Other WB operational policies include OP 4.04 for natural habitat, OP 4.36 for forestry, OP 4.09 for pest management, OP 4.37 for safety of dams, OP 7.50 for projects in international waterways, OP 4.11 for physical cultural property, OP 4.10 for indigenous people, OP 7.60 for projects in disputed areas, OP 4.12 for involuntary resettlement, and policy on Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project ii Environmental and Social Management Framework access to information. Of these policies, the OP 4.01, OP 4.09, and policy on access to information will be applicable to the SAGP. Overview of Environmental and Social Baseline Location and Geography. The Province of Sindh is located on the western corner of South Asia, bordering the Iranian plateau in the west. Geographically it is the third largest province of Pakistan, stretching about 579 km from north to south and 442 km (extreme) or 281 km (average) from east to west, with an area of 140,915 square kilometers of Pakistani territory. Sindh is bounded by the Thar Desert to the east, the Kirthar Mountains to the west, and the Arabian Sea in the south. In the centre is a fertile plain around the Indus River Sindh consists of the Lower Indus Plain, which is very flat, generally sloping to the south with an average gradient of about 95 mm per kilometer. The Lower Indus Plain primarily comprises Indus Delta in the south, meander flood plain and cover fold plan. The area can be divided into five micro-relief land forms: active flood plain; meander flood plain; cover flood plain; scalloped interfluves; and Indus Delta. Topographically, Sindh can be divided into four distinct parts: (a) Kirthar range on the west; (b) a central alluvial plain bisected by the Indus River; (c) a desert belt in the east; and (d) the Indus delta in the South. Soils. The soil in the plains of Sindh is plastic clay that has been deposited by the Indus. Combined with water it develops into a rich mould and without water it degenerates into a desert. Nearly the entire Indus valley has soil which is extremely friable and easily disintegrated by the flow of water. Resultantly, the water always contains a large amount of suspended silt. Landuse. Agriculture, followed by forestry, is the main land use in most parts of Sindh. Although more than 50 percent of the total geographical area is cultivable, only 26 percent of it is actually located in the central plain. The land inside the Indus embankments is almost equally employed by agriculture and forestry, while that outside the embankments is more extensively utilized for agriculture in the form of sparsely distributed irrigated plantations. Water resources. Sindh is entirely dependent on the River Indus for its survival and development. About 95 percent of the farmland in Sindh obtains its water from the irrigation system, while the rest is cultivated with the help of tube wells. The limited groundwater (less than 5 million acre feet or MAF – about 6.17 billion cubic meters or BCM) in the province is available in only 28 percent of the entire area. Rainfall is only in the range of 100 to 200 mm per annum, while the evaporation rate is about 1000 to 2000 mm, depending on climatic conditions. Thus the whole of Sindh is arid, with the River Indus being the primary freshwater source that gives life to the province. With population growth, the average amount of renewable freshwater available to each person has been declining. Irrigation. The irrigation canals of Sindh were extended and improved by the British in the late 1800s. By 1910, the irrigated area had expanded to 1.4 million hectares (MHa). Sukkur Barrage, completed in 1932, increased the annual cultivated area to 2.37 MHA. The completion of Kotri Barrage (Ghulam Muhammad Barrage, 1955), and Guddu Barrage (1962) brought the rest of Sindh's irrigation system under barrage control. The total command area under the three barrages was 5.1 MHa in 1997-98. There are 13 Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project iii Environmental and Social Management Framework existing surface drainage systems in Sindh that serve a total area of over 2.5 MHa and have an aggregate length of about 4,800 km. Additional drains are under construction. Agriculture. About 40 percent of the land in Sindh is arable land and 5 percent of it is rangeland. The total cultivated area in Sindh is 5.88 million hectares and the net area sown is 2.39 million hectares. The total cropped area is 3.10 million hectares, of which 0.71 million hectares are sown more than once1. Sindh grows a variety of field and horticultural crops. Wheat, cotton, rice, and sugarcane are the major field crops, which constitute 68 percent of the total cropped area, while mango, banana and chilies are the major horticultural crops. Among the horticultural crops, Sindh produces 73 percent bananas, 34 percent mangoes, and 88 percent of the chilies. Of the total cropped area of 3.1 million hectares in the year 2000-01, almost 50 percent of the area was under food crops (wheat, rice, maize, sorghum, millet and barley), 25 percent under cash crops (cotton, sugarcane). The remaining area was under fodder (9.1 percent), pulses (4.7 percent), condiments (4.1 percent), oilseeds (3.8 percent), fruits (3.3 percent), and vegetables (1.4 percent). Demography and administrative division. Sindh has the second highest Human Development Index out of all of Pakistan's provinces at 0.628. The 1998 Census of Pakistan indicated a population of 30.4 million; the current estimates indicate a population of over 35 million in Sindh. Just under half of the population is urban, mainly found in Karachi, Hyderabad, Sukkur, Mirpurkhas, Nawabshah District, Umerkot and Larkana. Sindhi is the sole official language of Sindh since the 19th century. According to the 1998 Population Census of Pakistan, Sindhi-speaking households make up 59.73 percent (92.02 percent in rural and 25.79 percent in urban area) of Sindh; Urdu- speaking households make up 21.05 percent (1.61 percent in rural and 41.48 percent in urban areas); Punjabi 06.99 percent; Pashto 05.01 percent; Balochi 2.11 percent; Saraiki 01.00 percent; and other languages 04.93 percent. Other languages include Gujarati, Memoni, Persian, Kutchi (last one being a dialect of Sindhi), Khowar, Thari, Luri and Brahui. Administratively, Sindh is divided into 23 districts. Literacy. Literacy is one of the important indicators of education because its improvement is likely to have a longer run impact on other important indicators of national welfare. According to the latest Pakistan Social and Living Standards Measurement (PSLM) Survey 2010-11, the literacy in Sindh for the population (10 years and above) was 59 percent during 2010-11. Literacy remains much higher in urban areas than in rural areas and much higher for men than for women. Health. The government healthcare facilities in the Province comprise seven Teaching Hospitals, 11 District Headquarter Hospitals, 56 Tehsil Headquarter Hospitals/Civil Hospitals, 130 Rural Health Centers, 774 Basic Health Units, 643 Dispensaries, 90 Mother and Child Health Centers, and 15 Sub-health Centers. In addition, a large number of private healthcare facilities mostly located in cities and towns also exist in the Province. The Infant Mortality Rate in the Province is 81 per 1,000 live births, Under 5 Mortality Rate is 101 per 1,000 live births, Maternal Mortality Ratio is 314 per 100,000 live births, Malnutrition is 22 percent, and Immunization for children under one year is 37 percent. Stakeholder Consultations Stakeholder consultations have been carried out while finalizing the project details and during the present ESMP preparation. These consultations have been carried out with institutional as well as grass-root stakeholders. These consultations have revealed that Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project iv Environmental and Social Management Framework the proposed SAGP is considered to have a positive social impact by developing selected value chains through supporting farmer mobilization, extension services in enhancing production and productivity, post-harvest processing, value addition, and marketing (consultations summarized below). However, in the agriculture sector, in particular, the stakeholders suggested that project should ensure participation by small landholders, tenants, and women, who play a critical role in production and post-harvest processing. Impact Assessment and Mitigation Activities proposed to be financed through SAGP are unlikely to have significant adverse environmental and social impacts. The project would essentially provide extension services to farmers in order to improve productivity and market access for selected crops along a value chain approach. The project would also finance some on-farm activities to directly increase crop production through demonstrations of better farm practices to education farmers about sustainable farming practices including integrated pest and nutrient management. The potential negative environmental impacts of the project include construction related short-term impacts such as air and water pollution, noise generation, and safety hazards, generation of vegetative solid wastes, increased use of pesticides and other agro- chemicals, drainage and hygiene particularly in livestock markets. Similarly, the potential negative social impacts identified include lack of participation particularly from landless and women farmer groups resulting in differential access to project benefits. While at individual sites, these may be small, cumulative impacts when seen as aggregates could be moderate to high and, therefore, require appropriate mitigation and management measures to contain them. Environmental and Social Management Framework Since exact nature, extent, and location of individual investments (subprojects) to be implemented under the SAGP are not known at this stage, a framework approach has been adopted for the present environmental and social assessment. Under this approach, each subproject would be screened for the severity and extent of environmental and social impacts. Small subprojects having negligible environmental and or social impacts would be assessed with the help of a rapid assessment checklist included in this document. Medium to large subprojects having some negative but localized environmental and or social impacts would require an Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) to be prepared. Templates and methodologies of ESMP have been included in the present Framework. An ESMP for the Artificial Insemination Training Center to be established under the SAGP has been prepared as a sample and annexed to the present document. Institutional Arrangements for ESMF Implementation. The Project Director of Agriculture PMU and Project Manager of Livestock PMU will be overall responsible for the environmental performance of their respective project components. They will also ensure effective ESMF implementation throughout the project. In each PMU, an appropriate officer will be designated as ESMF Focal Point (EFP) who will be responsible for ESMF implementation for project activities under his/her respective department. Specifically, the EFPs will ensure the preparation and implementation of subproject-specific ESMPs, manage ESMF trainings, carry out environmental monitoring, and prepare monthly and quarterly ESMF reports. The project will also engage an Environment Specialist and a Social Specialist on a short-term contract basis Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project v Environmental and Social Management Framework to assist PMUs in overall ESMF implementation particularly in preparing ESMPs, carrying out monitoring, and conducting trainings. ESMF Monitoring. ESMF monitoring will be carried out at three levels. At the PMU level, the EFPs with the help of environment and social specialists will carry out ESMF monitoring to ensure that the mitigation plans are being effectively implemented, and will conduct field visits on a regular basis. At the field level, more frequent ESMF monitoring will be carried out by the PIU staff, under the guidance and supervision of EFPs and Environment Specialist. Monitoring checklists will be prepared on the basis of the subproject-specific mitigation plans included in the ESMPs. In addition, the project will engage specialists/firms to conduct external monitoring as third party validation on an annual basis. ESMF Capacity building. Capacity building of the project staff and project beneficiaries will be carried out for the environmental and social management of the subprojects. The EFPs, Environment Specialist, and Social Specialist will be responsible for this capacity building. Grievance Redress Mechanism. A grievance redress mechanism (GRM) will be put in place during the project implementation. Under this mechanism, any stakeholder (individual or organization) will be able to submit a grievance to the Project if s/he believes a practice is having a detrimental impact on their community, the environment, or on their quality of life. The PIUs will be tasked to manage the GRM and address the grievances. Reporting and documentation. Complete documentation will be maintained for the entire ESMF implementation process. This will include environmental and social monitoring checklists filled by the PIUs and EFPs, visit reports with photographs prepared by the environment and social specialists, quarterly reports on overall ESMF implementation of the project, to be prepared by the EFPs, annual third party monitoring reports, and project completion report on overall ESMF implementation during the entire duration of the project – to be prepared by EFPs. The EFPs will be overall responsible for this documentation and reporting. ESMF disclosure requirements. Once finalized, the ESMF as well as the Urdu and Sindhi translations will be disclosed on the official websites of GoSindh, Agriculture Department, and Livestock Department. These documents will also be maintained in the PMUs and PIUs. In addition, the ESMF will be disclosed on WB InfoShop. ESMF implementation cost. The total cost of the ESMF implementation has been estimated to be about Pak Rupees 41 million. This includes costs of environment and social specialists, capacity building, third party validation, and ESMP preparation for individual subprojects. This cost is included in the overall project cost. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project vi Environmental and Social Management Framework Acronyms ADB Asian Development Bank AITC Artificial Insemination Training Center amsl Above mean sea level AWB Area Water Board BCM Billion cubic meters BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand CITES Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species DoA Department of Agricuture DoLF Department of Livestock and Fisheries EA Environmental Assessment ECA Employment of Child Act EFP ESMF Focal Point EHS Environment, Health, and Environment EIA Environmental Impact Assessment EPA Environmental Protection Agency ESA Environmental and social assessment ESMF Environmental and Social Management Framework ESMP Environmental and Social Management Plan FAO Food and Agriculture Organization FMU Field Management Unit FO Farmers’ Organization FPA Foreign Project Assistance GAPs Good Agricultural Practices GDP Gross Domestic Product GoSindh Government of Sindh GRM Grievance redress mechanism IEE Initial Environmental Examination IPM Integrated pest management IRRI International Rice Research Institute IUCN International Union for Conservation of Nature KPI Key performance indicator KWSB Karachi Water and Sewerage Board LAA Land Acquisition Act LOS UN Convention on the Law of Seas M&E Monitoring and evaluation MAF Million acre feet MARPOL Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships MEA Multilateral Environmental Agreement Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project vii Environmental and Social Management Framework MHa Million hectares MIS Management information system MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet NEQS National Environmental Quality Standards NGO Non-governmental organization OHS Occupational health and safety OP Operational Policy Pak-EPA Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency PDO Project Development Objective PEPA Pakistan Environmental Protection Act PEPC Pakistan Environmental Protection Council PMU Project Management Unit POPs Persistent Organic Pollutants PPE Personal protective equipment PSC Project Steering Committee PSLM Pakistan Social and Living Standards Measurement SAGP Sindh Agriculture Growth Project SIDA Sindh Irrigation Development Authority SS Suspended solids SWMO Sindh Water Management Ordinance TDS Total dissolved solids UNFCCC UN Framework Convention on Climate Change WB World Bank Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project viii Environmental and Social Management Framework Contents Executive Summary .............................................................................................. ii Acronyms ............................................................................................................ vii 1. Introduction ............................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Background ............................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Project Overview ...................................................................................... 1-3 1.3 The Study................................................................................................... 1-3 1.3.1 Need of the Study ................................................................................... 1-3 1.3.2 Study Objectives .................................................................................... 1-3 1.3.3 Study Methodology ................................................................................ 1-4 1.4 Document Structure ................................................................................. 1-5 2. Legislative, Regulatory, and Policy Framework .................................... 2-1 2.1 National Laws and Regulations ............................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 ........................................ 2-1 2.1.2 Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Review of IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000 ................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.3 National Environmental Quality Standards ............................................ 2-2 2.1.4 Land Acquisition Act, 1894 ................................................................... 2-2 2.1.5 Sindh Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 ...................................................... 2-3 2.1.6 Forest Act, 1927 ..................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.7 Canal and Drainage Act, 1873................................................................ 2-3 2.1.8 Sindh Water Management Ordinance, 2002........................................... 2-3 2.1.9 Antiquity Act, 1975 ................................................................................ 2-3 2.1.10 Factories Act, 1934 ................................................................................ 2-4 2.1.11 Employment of Child Act, 1991 ............................................................ 2-4 2.1.12 Pakistan Penal Code, 1860 ..................................................................... 2-4 2.2 The World Bank Operational Policies .................................................... 2-4 2.2.1 Environmental Assessment (OP 4.01) .................................................... 2-4 2.2.2 Involuntary Resettlement (OP 4.12) ....................................................... 2-5 2.2.3 Forestry (OP 4.36) .................................................................................. 2-6 2.2.4 Natural Habitat (OP 4.04) ...................................................................... 2-6 2.2.5 Pest Management (OP 4.09 .................................................................... 2-6 2.2.6 Safety of Dams (OP 4.37) ...................................................................... 2-6 2.2.7 Projects on International Waterways (OP 7.50) ..................................... 2-6 2.2.8 Cultural Property (OP 4.11) ................................................................... 2-7 2.2.9 Indigenous People (OP 4.10).................................................................. 2-7 2.2.10 Projects in Disputed Areas (OP 7.60)..................................................... 2-8 2.2.11 Policy on Access to Information ............................................................ 2-8 2.2.12 Applicability of Safeguard Policies ........................................................ 2-8 2.3 Obligations under International Treaties ............................................... 2-9 Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project ix Environmental and Social Management Framework 2.4 Institutional Setup for Environmental Management .......................... 2-10 2.5 Environmental and Social Guidelines ................................................... 2-10 2.5.1 Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental and Social Guidelines ............................................................................................ 2-10 2.5.2 World Bank Environmental and Social Guidelines .............................. 2-10 3. Project Description .................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Project Development Objectives.............................................................. 3-1 3.2 Project Components ................................................................................. 3-1 3.3 Alternatives Considered and Reasons for Rejection ............................. 3-5 3.4 Institutional and Implementation Arrangements .................................. 3-5 4. Environmental and Social Baseline Conditions ...................................... 4-1 4.1 Location ..................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Geography ................................................................................................. 4-2 4.3 Geological Setting ..................................................................................... 4-3 4.4 Soils .......................................................................................................... 4-3 4.5 Land Use .................................................................................................... 4-5 4.6 Water Resources ....................................................................................... 4-5 4.7 Climate ....................................................................................................... 4-8 4.8 Agriculture ................................................................................................ 4-8 4.9 Human Environment .............................................................................. 4-11 4.10 Biological Resources ............................................................................... 4-14 5. Stakeholder Consultations ........................................................................ 5-1 5.1 Objectives .................................................................................................. 5-1 5.2 Participation Framework ......................................................................... 5-1 5.3 Stakeholder Identification........................................................................ 5-2 5.4 Consultation Process ................................................................................ 5-2 5.5 Consultations with Institutional Stakeholders ....................................... 5-2 5.5.1 Project Design ........................................................................................ 5-3 5.5.2 Project Environmental Impacts .............................................................. 5-3 5.5.3 Project Social Impacts ............................................................................ 5-3 5.6 Consultations with Potential Beneficiaries ............................................. 5-3 5.6.1 Market Mechanisms ............................................................................... 5-3 5.6.2 Targeting Small Farmers and Producers ................................................ 5-4 5.7 Summary Findings.................................................................................... 5-4 6. Impact Assessment and Mitigation .......................................................... 6-1 6.1 Positive Impacts ........................................................................................ 6-1 6.2 Environmental Screening ......................................................................... 6-1 6.3 Assessment of Potential Impacts and Generic Mitigation..................... 6-7 Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project x Environmental and Social Management Framework 6.3.1 Subproject Siting (Land Use and Landform) ......................................... 6-7 6.3.2 Land Donation/Purchase ........................................................................ 6-7 6.3.3 Ecological Disturbances and Loss of Precious Ecological Values ......... 6-8 6.3.4 Soil and Water Contamination, and Degradation of Water Bodies caused by Discharge of Wastes .................................................. 6-8 6.3.5 Aggravation of Solid Waste Problems ................................................... 6-9 6.3.6 Public Health Issues ............................................................................... 6-9 6.3.7 Construction related Issues ................................................................... 6-10 6.3.8 Environmental Degradation from Intensification of Agricultural Land Use .............................................................................................. 6-11 6.3.9 Health and Safety Hazards for the Community .................................... 6-11 6.3.10 Occupational Health and Safety Hazards ............................................. 6-12 6.3.11 Vehicular Traffic .................................................................................. 6-12 6.3.12 Impacts on Women, Children, and Vulnerable Groups ........................ 6-12 6.3.13 Influx of Workers and Employment ..................................................... 6-13 6.3.14 Impacts from Projects Emerging from Feasibility Studies ................... 6-13 6.4 Cumulative Impacts................................................................................ 6-14 7. Environmental and Social Management Framework ............................ 7-1 7.1 Subproject Screening................................................................................ 7-1 7.2 Institutional Arrangements...................................................................... 7-2 7.3 Mitigation Plans ........................................................................................ 7-2 7.4 Monitoring ............................................................................................... 7-19 7.5 Capacity Building ................................................................................... 7-19 7.6 Grievance Redressal Mechanism ......................................................... 7-20 7.7 Reporting and Documentation .............................................................. 7-21 7.8 ESMF Disclosure Requirements............................................................ 7-21 7.9 ESMF Implementation Budget .............................................................. 7-21 Annexes Annex A: National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) Annex B: List of Institutional Stakeholders Consulted Annex C: Questionnaire for Stakeholder Consultation Annex D: Written Responses Annex E: Rapid Assessment Checklist Annex F: Methodology and Structure of ESMP Annex G: ESMP for Artificial Insemination Facility (Sample Only) Annex H: Involuntary Resettlement Screening Checklist Annex I: Format to Document Contribution of Assets Annex J: Checklist for Scheme Siting Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project xi Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex K: Safeguards Procedures for Inclusion in the Technical Specifications of Contracts Annex L: Environmental Guidelines Annex M: World Bank Group’s Environment, Health, and Safety Guidelines List of Figures and Tables Table ‎ 4.1: Extent of Land Capability Classes in the Surveyed Area of Sindh ................................................................................... 4-4 Table ‎ 4.2: Land Use in Sindh ........................................................................... 4-5 Table ‎ 4.3: Key Facts about Indus River a ....................................................... 4-6 Table ‎ 4.4: Main Features of Agro-Ecological Zones including Water Supply, Soil Salinity and Cropping Pattern ................... 4-10 Table ‎ 4.5: Literacy in Sindh(10 years and above) ........................................ 4-13 Table ‎ 4.6: Important Mammals of Sindh ....................................................... 4-16 Table ‎ 4.7: Important Reptiles and Amphibians of Sindh ............................. 4-17 Table ‎ 4.8: Important Birds of Sindh .............................................................. 4-18 Table ‎ 4.9: Protected Areas of Sindh ............................................................... 4-21 Table ‎ 4.10: Game Reserves of Sindh .............................................................. 4-22 Table ‎ 5.1: Participation Framework ............................................................... 5-5 Table ‎ 6.1: Environmental Screening ................................................................ 6-2 Table ‎ 7.1: Screening Criteria ............................................................................ 7-1 Table ‎ 7.2: Generic Mitigation Plan .................................................................. 7-3 Table ‎ 7.3: Mitigation Plan for Water Tanks and Ponds................................ 7-9 Table ‎ 7.4: Mitigation Plan for Land Development and Leveling Schemes .......................................................................................... 7-10 Table ‎ 7.5: Mitigation Plan for Storage, and Packing/Processing Facilities ......................................................................................... 7-12 Table ‎ 7.6: Mitigation Plan for Rural Roads, Culverts and Bridges ........... 7-13 Table ‎ 7.7: Mitigation Plan for Livestock Schemes ....................................... 7-15 Table ‎ 7.8: Mitigation Plan for Establishing Training Centers ................... 7-16 Table ‎ 7.9: Mitigation Plan for Facility Rehabilitation ................................. 7-18 Table ‎ 7.10: Environmental and Social Training Plan .................................. 7-19 Table ‎ 7.11: ESMF Implementation Budget .................................................. 7-21 Figure ‎ 4.1: Sindh Province and its Surroundings ........................................... 4-1 Figure ‎ 4.2: Districts in Sindh Province ............................................................. 12 Figure ‎ 5.1: Conceptual Framework for ESMF Stakeholder Consultations ................................................................................... 5-6 Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project xii Environmental and Social Management Framework 1. Introduction The provincial government of Sindh, Pakistan, through its Department of Agriculture and Department of Livestock and Fisheries, is planning to undertake the Sindh Agriculture Growt Project (SAGP) in various parts of the Province, and seeking the World Bank (WB) assistance for this purpose. In line with the prevailing legislation in the Country, and WB safeguard policies, an environmental and social assessment of the Project has been carried out and the presnet Environmental and Social Management Framework (ESMF) has been prepared. 1.1 Background1 Starting in the late 1960s, the Green Revolution introduced unprecedented technological and economic transformation and growth in Pakistan’s agriculture sector; however, that growth has steadily declined for the past two decades–from 5.4 percent in the 1980s to 3.2 percent in the 2000s. The aggregate numbers hide extreme volatility—e.g., 6.5 percent growth in 2004 compared to only 0.6 percent in 2010. Agriculture in Pakistan has reached a point of diminishing marginal returns from the technologies and resources at its disposal, and insufficient investment in agriculture research and extension has left the sector ill-equipped to cope with climate shocks, reduce rural poverty, or compete in the marketplace. In recent decades, agriculture’s contribution to Pakistan’s gross domestic product (GDP) has declined; however, it still accounts for 21.6 percent of value added. Agriculture GDP consists of 32.8 percent major crops, 11.1 percent minor crops, 53.2 percent livestock, 2.9 percent fisheries and forestry.2 Through its production, agriculture contributes 60 percent to the country’s export earnings, and, despite strong urban growth, 64 percent of the population still lives in rural areas and 45 percent of the nation’s labor force still work in agriculture. Despite declining productivity growth, Pakistan is among the top 20 global producers in over 48 different agricultural commodities. The country produces over 108 million tonnes of agricultural commodities worth over US$13 billion annually. In July 2011, the 18th Amendment of Pakistan’s Constitution introduced devolution of many government services, including agriculture, to the provinces. With this, many national programs either ended or moved to each province, as did the responsibility for areas like policy development and food security. The provinces now face significant challenges in taking on additional roles that were previously under federal responsibility in addition to the research, extension, and marketing support challenges they already managed. The top agriculture producing provinces in Pakistan are Punjab and Sindh, which account for 81 percent of agriculture GDP, most of which comes from rice and wheat production. This project will focus on Sindh Province, which contributes 23 percent to agriculture GDP, has a high unmet productive potential, and has received little attention from the World Bank in the past. 1 Adopted from the WB Project Appraisal Document. 2 Major crops include cotton, wheat, rice, maize, sugarcane; minor crops include fruits, vegetables, barley, pulses, tobacco, and oil seeds. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 1-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework Sindh Province has 23.8 percent of Pakistan’s population, 18 percent of its land area, and 14 percent of its total cropped area.3 About 30-35 percent of Sindh’s population lives below poverty line, and a majority of the poor are rural. Landholding patterns in Sindh are highly skewed from national norms, with a median farm size of around 11.33 hectares, as compared with 2.83 hectares in Punjab. According to one estimate in 2005, wealthy landlords in Sindh, who held farms in excess of 100 acres and who accounted for less than 1 percent of all farmers in the province, owned 150 percent more land than the combined holdings of 62 percent of small farmers with landholding less than five acres. Large landowners dominate production of the four major crops in Sindh—rice, wheat, sugar cane, and cotton. These crops are heavily regulated and receive extensive government subsidies through price support structures that often favor one segment of the value chain over another. The SAGP will focus on horticulture—particularly chilies (92 percent of national production), onions (33 percent), and dates (about 50 percent)—and milk production because they have a small farmer focus, have significant involvement of women in production and processing, and, from a national perspective, Sindh enjoys the greatest competitive advantage in these pro-poor production value chains. Horticulture is largely unregulated, includes more private sector actors than the major crops, and has received little donor attention in the past. When donors have invested, they have focused largely on mangos and bananas—the two most profitable horticulture crops, which are often grown by large landowners. Investing in horticulture is seen to offer the best potential for increased small producer incomes, new employment opportunities in production and processing, improved resource productivity, and enhanced micronutrient availability in the market.4 The one exception to this strategy is the planned intervention in the rice value chain, which will target a cluster of small and medium sized producers to help them reduce the post-harvest damage and loss from poor practices. The first order constraint identified in the analysis of the targeted value chains is the quality of production and the high level of post-harvest losses, so SAGP will first focus on improving that quality. The interaction between producers and other actors along a value chain varies by commodity. In milk, producers generally produce directly for processors. In horticulture, they may link with either traders or processors. In all of targeted value chains, there are several private sector actors (traders and processors) who are actively seeking high-quality products for domestic and international markets. Despite the presence of many value chain actors, 25 percent of Pakistan’s fruits and vegetables produced annually go to waste between the farm and the consumer. Only four percent of Pakistan’s total fruit and vegetables are exported and at far lower prices (less than 41% of the world average) due to poor quality and the reliance on traditional low end markets. In milk production, losses climb to about 30 percent in the summer due to lack of infrastructure and equipment. Since milk production declines by 50 percent in the summer, this leads to huge shortages and high prices. The introduction of good agricultural practices and modest investments in relatively simple technology could substantially increase the quality of production and the potential for increased trade and higher incomes. For example, chili exports from Pakistan are banned by the EU due to unacceptable levels of aflatoxin. In dates, only 20-30 percent of 3 Sindh’s cultivated area is 3.1 million hectares. 4 Dr. Muhammad Jameel Khan, Advisor for Agriculture Planning, Government of Pakistan Planning Commission. 2011. “Agricultural Growth and Productivity Enhancement”. Presentation made at the Roundtable Dialogue on Agriculture and Water in Pakistan. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 1-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework the production is in high value table dates (khajoor) and only 10 percent of those are Grade A, 60 percent are Grade C. The majority of dates grown are dried dates (chuhara), the majority of which are exported to India to be used in religious ceremonies, where they are thrown into the Ganges. Improved tissue culture, orchard management, and harvesting practices, could increase the production of Grade A table dates, thus increasing income. 1.2 Project Overview The Government of Pakistan (GoPak) and Government of Sindh (GoSindh) have both highlighted commercial agriculture and market linkages as priority investments for the sector. GoSindh has also prioritized investments in support of small and medium farmers and in value chains that will positively impact women. This project also responds to the Country Partnership Strategy (CPS) (FY2010-13) which states that the Bank will engage in providing technical assistance to help Pakistan in its agricultural policy analysis and design with a view to increasing agricultural competitiveness and expanding rural livelihoods. The project will improve marketing infrastructure and facilitate reform in local marketing regulations and policies to enhance competitiveness. The project consists of three components: Component A comprises capacity building of producers, modernization of extension services and agricultural research, and strategic planning for the agricultural sector; Component B comprises horticulture value chains, post-harvest loss management, livestock value chains, and demand driven investment fund; and Component C comprises project management, monitoring and evaluation. Further project details are presented later in the document. 1.3 The Study The various aspects of the present study, including its need and objectives, its scope, the methodology employed while conducting it are described in the following sections. 1.3.1 Need of the Study The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 (PEPA 1997) requires the proponents of every development project in the country to submit either an Initial Environmental Examination (IEE) or “where the project is likely to cause an adverse environmental effect,” an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) to the concerned environmental protection agency (EPA). The IEE/EIA Regulations 2000 issued under the PEPA 1997 provide separate lists for the projects requiring IEE and EIA (The Act and Regulations are further discussed later in the document). The World Bank Operational Policy 4.01 (OP 4.01) states that “The Bank requires environmental assessment (EA) of projects proposed for Bank financing to help ensure that they are environmentally sound and sustainable, and thus to improve decision making”5. The present study has been conducted in response to both of the above requirements. 1.3.2 Study Objectives Since the nature, extent and location of the project activities requiring physical intervention and thus potentially causing environmental degradation are not known at this 5 Excerpts from OP4.01 – Environmental Assessment. WB, January, 1999. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 1-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework stage, a ‘framework’ approach has been adopted during the presnet environmental assessment, and an ESMF has been prepared as the outcome of this study. The specific objectives of the present study are to:  To assess the existing environmental and socioeconomic conditions of the project area,  To identify potential impacts of the proposed project on the natural and human environment of the area, to predict and evaluate these impacts, and determine their significance, in light of the technical and regulatory concerns,  To propose appropriate generic mitigation measures that should be incorporated in the design of the project (and subprojects to be designed and implemented during project implementation) to minimize if not eliminate the potentially adverse impacts,  To assess the compliance status of the proposed activities with respect to the national environmental legislation and WB’s OPs,  To develop an ESMF providing an environmental and social assessment framework for the subprojects to be implemented under the project. 1.3.3 Study Methodology The key steps that were followed while conducting the present assessment are briefly described below. Scoping During this phase, key information on the project was collected and reviewed. A ‘long list’ of the potential environmental as well as social issues likely to arise as a result of the project was developed. The stakeholder analysis was also carried out for the consultation to be carried out subsequently. Stakeholder Consultations Stakeholder consultations were carried out during the study. Meetings were held with the institutional stakeholders and key environmental and social issues discussed. Extensive consultations with the grass root stakeholders were carried out during visits to the agricultural farms and fields in various parts of the Province. Data Collection/Compilation During this phase, data was collected and compiled, in order to develop a baseline of the project area’s physical, biological and human environment. For this purpose, primarly review of secondary sources was carried out. The secondary resources that were consulted included reports of the studies carried out earlier, published books and data, and relevant websites. With the help of these resources a generic profile of the entire project area was developed. Impact Assessment During the impact assessment, the environmental, socioeconomic, and project information collected in previous steps was used to determine the potential impacts of the proposed project. Subsequent to this, the potential impacts were characterized in order to determine their significance. Mitigation measures were identified where required to minimize the significant environmental impacts. A management framework was also Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 1-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework developed in the form of an ESMF for the implementation of the mitigation measures identified during the study. Report Compilation Report compilation was the last step of the study. The report includes a brief description of the proposed project, a review of environmental legislation and policy framework relevant to the project, a description of baseline environmental and socioeconomic conditions in the project area, and potential project impacts and mitigation measures. (Complete structure of the report is provided in Section 1.4 below.) 1.4 Document Structure Chapter 2 discusses the legislative, regulatory, and institutional setup that exists in the Country, as well as the World Bank’s safeguard policies relevant to the environmental and social assessment. The Chapter also outlines the international environmental agreements to which the country is a party. Chapter 3 provides a simplified description of the Project and its components. The environmental and social baseline conditions are presented in Chapter 4. The stakeholder consultations have been covered in Chapter 5. The assessment of environmental as well as socioeconomic impacts, their mitigation measures are presented in Chapters 6. Finally, the Environmental and Social Management Framework is presented in Chapter 7. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 1-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework 2. Legislative, Regulatory, and Policy Framework This Chapter discusses the policy, legal and administrative framework as well as institutional set-up relevant to the environmental and social assessment of the proposed Project. Also included in the Chapter are the environmental and social guidelines from the national agencies as well as international donors and other organizations. 2.1 National Laws and Regulations6 Pakistan’s statute books contain a number of laws concerned with the regulation and control of the environmental and social aspects. However, the enactment of comprehensive legislation on the environment, in the form of an act of parliament, is a relatively new phenomenon. Most of the existing laws on environmental and social issues have been enforced over an extended period of time, and are context-specific. The laws relevant to the developmental projects are briefly reviewed below. 2.1.1 Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 (the Act) is the basic legislative tool empowering the government to frame regulations for the protection of the environment (the ‘environment’ has been defined in the Act as: (a) air, water and land; (b) all layers of the atmosphere; (c) all organic and inorganic matter and living organisms; (d) the ecosystem and ecological relationships; (e) buildings, structures, roads, facilities and works; (f) all social and economic conditions affecting community life; and (g) the inter- relationships between any of the factors specified in sub-clauses ‘a’ to ‘f’). The Act is applicable to a broad range of issues and extends to socioeconomic aspects, land acquisition, air, water, soil, marine and noise pollution, as well as the handling of hazardous waste. The discharge or emission of any effluent, waste, air pollutant or noise in an amount, concentration or level in excess of the National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) specified by the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (Pak- EPA) has been prohibited under the Act, and penalties have been prescribed for those contravening the provisions of the Act. The powers of the federal and provincial Environmental Protection Agencies (EPAs), established under the Pakistan Environmental Protection Ordinance 1983,7have also been considerably enhanced under this legislation and they have been given the power to conduct inquiries into possible breaches of environmental law either of their own accord, or upon the registration of a complaint. The requirement for environmental assessment is laid out in Section 12 (1) of the Act. Under this section, no project involving construction activities or any change in the physical environment can be undertaken unless an initial environmental examination (IEE) or an environmental impact assessment (EIA) is conducted, and approval is received from the federal or relevant provincial EPA. Section 12 (6) of the Act states that the provision is applicable only to such categories of projects as may be prescribed. The 6 In the wake of 18th Amendment in the Constitution of Pakistan, the provinces need to enact their own laws for the subjects devolved to them. Most of the federal laws, most importantly the Pakistan Environmental Protection Act of 1997, will therefore be replaced by corresponding provincial laws. 7 Superseded by the Pakistan environmental Protection Act, 1997. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework categories are defined in the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Review of IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000 and are discussed in Section 2.1.2 below. The requirement of conducting an environmental assessment of the proposed project emanates from this Act. 2.1.2 Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Review of IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000 The Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Review of IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000 (the ‘Regulations’), developed by the Pak-EPA under the powers conferred upon it by the Act, provide the necessary details on preparation, submission and review of the initial environmental examination (IEE) and the EIA. Categorization of projects for IEE and EIA is one of the main components of the Regulations. Projects have been classified on the basis of expected degree of adverse environmental impacts. Project types listed in Schedule I are designated as potentially less damaging to the environment, and those listed in Schedule II as having potentially serious adverse effects. Schedule I projects require an IEE to be conducted, provided they are not located in environmentally sensitive areas. For the Schedule II projects, conducting an EIA is necessary. The proposed project falls under the Schedule II of the Regulations. Hence an EIA has to be conducted for it.8 2.1.3 National Environmental Quality Standards The National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS), promulgated under the PEPA 1997, specify the following standards:  Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in gaseous emissions from industrial sources,  Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in municipal and liquid industrial effluents discharged to inland waters, sewage treatment and sea (three separate set of numbers).  Maximum allowable emissions from motor vehicles.  Ambient air quality standards.  Drinking water standards  Noise standards. The above NEQS’s are presented in Tables A.1 to A.6 in Annex A. Only a few of these standards will be applicable to the gaseous emissions and liquid effluents discharged to the environment from the activities under the proposed project. 2.1.4 Land Acquisition Act, 1894 The Land Acquisition Act (LAA) of 1894 amended from time to time has been the de- facto policy governing land acquisition and compensation in the country. The LAA is the most commonly used law for acquisition of land and other properties for development projects. It comprises of 55 sections pertaining to area notifications and surveys, acquisition, compensation and apportionment awards and disputes resolution, penalties and exemptions. 8 The terms ESA and EIA, and ESMF have been used interchangeably in this document. The document has been named as the ESMF, however, it meets all the requirements of an EIA as well. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework The subprojects to be implemented under SAGP may require some land. Efforts will be made to acquire such land either on voluntary donation or commercial transaction (willing buyer – willing seller) basis. 2.1.5 Sindh Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 This law was enacted to protect the province’s wildlife resources directly and other natural resources indirectly. It classifies wildlife by degree of protection, i.e., animals that may be hunted on a permit or special license, and species that are protected and cannot be hunted under any circumstances. The Act specifies restrictions on hunting and trade in animals, trophies, or meat. The Act also defines various categories of wildlife protected areas, ie, National Parks, Wildlife Sanctuaries, and Game Reserve. The project activities will have to be carried out in accordance with this Act. In particular, no physical interventions will be carried out inside any protected areas defined under the Act. 2.1.6 Forest Act, 1927 The Act authorizes Provincial Forest Departments to establish forest reserves and protected forests. The Act prohibits any person to set fire in the forest, quarry stone, remove any forest-produce or cause any damage to the forest by cutting trees or clearing up area for cultivation or any other purpose. The project activities will have to be carried out in accordance with this Act. No activities will be carried out in any protected forests, and no unauthorized tree cutting will be carried out. 2.1.7 Canal and Drainage Act, 1873 The Canal and Drainage Act (1873) prohibits corruption or fouling of water in canals (defined to include channels, tube wells, reservoirs and watercourses), or obstruction of drainage. This Act will be applicable to the physical works to be carried out during the proposed project. 2.1.8 Sindh Water Management Ordinance, 2002 The Sindh Water Management Ordinance (SWMO) provided a framework for institutional reforms in the water sector by decentralizing the water resources management and irrigation and drainage services. Sindh Irrigation Development Authority (SIDA) has been established under the SWMO at the provincial level for water resources management with a board comprising of stakeholders. Area Water Boards (AWBs) have been established for a similar function at canal command area and Farmers’ Organizations (FOs) at distributary and minor level consisting of Water Users Associations at the water course level. 2.1.9 Antiquity Act, 1975 The Antiquities Act of 1975 ensures the protection of cultural resources in Pakistan. The Act is designed to protect ‘antiquities’ from destruction, theft, negligence, unlawful excavation, trade and export. Antiquities have been defined in the Act as ancient products of human activity, historical sites, or sites of anthropological or cultural interest, and national monuments. The law prohibits new construction in the proximity of a Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework protected antiquity and empowers the Government of Pakistan to prohibit excavation in any area that may contain articles of archeological significance. Under this Act, the project proponents are obligated to:  Ensure that no activity is undertaken in the proximity of a protected antiquity, and  If during the course of the project an archeological discovery is made, it should be protected and reported to the Department of Archeology, Government of Pakistan, for further action. This Act will be applicable to the physical interventions such as constructionactivities to be carried out during the proposed project. 2.1.10 Factories Act, 1934 The clauses relevant to the proposed project are those that address the health, safety and welfare of the workers, disposal of solid waste and effluents, and damage to private and public property. The Act also provides regulations for handling and disposing toxic and hazardous substances. The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act of 1997 (discussed above), supersedes parts of this Act pertaining to environment and environmental degradation. 2.1.11 Employment of Child Act, 1991 Article 11(3) of the Constitution of Pakistan prohibits employment of children below the age of 14 years in any factory, mines or any other hazardous employment. In accordance with this Article, the Employment of Child Act (ECA) 1991 disallows the child labor in the country. The ECA defines a child to mean a person who has not completed his/her fourteenth years of age. The ECA states that no child shall be employed or permitted to work in any of the occupation set forth in the ECA (such as transport sector, railways, construction, and ports) or in any workshop wherein any of the processes defined in the Act is carried out. The processes defined in the Act include carpet weaving, biri (kind of a cigarette) making, cement manufacturing, textile, construction and others). The project proponent, participating farmers and their contractors will be bound by the ECA to disallow any child labor at the project sites. 2.1.12 Pakistan Penal Code, 1860 The Code deals with the offences where public or private property or human lives are affected due to intentional or accidental misconduct of an individual or organization. The Code also addresses control of noise, noxious emissions and disposal of effluents. Most of the environmental aspects of the Code have been superseded by the Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997. 2.2 The World Bank Operational Policies The WB Operating Policies (OPs) relevant to the proposed project are discussed in the following sections. 2.2.1 Environmental Assessment (OP 4.01) The World Bank requires environmental assessment (EA) of projects proposed for Bank financing to help ensure that they are environmentally sound and sustainable, and thus to Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework improve decision making.9 The OP defines the EA process and various types of the EA instruments. The proposed project may consist of activities which can potentially have environmental and social consequences, including:  Changes in land use,  Damage to crops  Deterioration of air quality,  Water contamination and consumption,  Damage to top soil, land erosion,  Cutting of trees  Safety hazard. Since none of the potential impacts of the project are likely to be large scale, unprecedented and/or irreversible, the project has been classified as Category B, in accordance with OP 4.01. Furthermore, the present assessment is being carried out in accordance with this OP, to identify the extent and consequences of these impacts, and to develop an EMP for their mitigation. 2.2.2 Involuntary Resettlement (OP 4.12) The WB’s experience indicates that involuntary resettlement under development projects, if unmitigated, often gives rise to severe economic, social, and environmental risks: production systems are dismantled; people face impoverishment when their productive assets or income sources are lost; people are relocated to environments where their productive skills may be less applicable and the competition for resources greater; community institutions and social networks are weakened; kin groups are dispersed; and cultural identity, traditional authority, and the potential for mutual help are diminished or lost. This policy includes safeguards to address and mitigate these impoverishment risks.10 The overall objectives of the Policy are given below.  Involuntary resettlement should be avoided where feasible, or minimized, exploring all viable alternative project designs.  Where it is not feasible to avoid resettlement, resettlement activities should be conceived and executed as sustainable development programs, providing sufficient investment resources to enable the persons displaced by the project to share in project benefits. Displaced persons should be meaningfully consulted and should have opportunities to participate in planning and implementing resettlement programs.  Displaced persons should be assisted in their efforts to improve their livelihoods and standards of living or at least to restore them, in real terms, to pre-displacement levels or to levels prevailing prior to the beginning of project implementation, whichever is higher. 9 Excerpts from WB OP 4.12.WB Operational Manual. January 1999. 10 Excerpts from WB OP 4.12.WB Operational Manual. December 2001. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework The subprojects to be implemented under SAGP may require some land, as stated earlier as well. Such land will be arranged either on voluntary donation or commercial transaction (willing buyer – willing seller) basis, and it will be ensured that such transactions do not cause any involuntary resettlement. Hence the OP 4.12 is not triggered. 2.2.3 Forestry (OP 4.36) The objective of this Policy is to assist the WB’s borrowers to harness the potential of forests to reduce poverty in a sustainable manner, integrate forests effectively into sustainable economic development, and protect the vital local and global environmental services and values of forests. None of the project components would be located inside any forested areas. Hence the OP 4.36 is not triggered. 2.2.4 Natural Habitat (OP 4.04) The conservation of natural habitats, like other measures that protect and enhance the environment, is essential for long-term sustainable development. The Bank therefore supports the protection, maintenance, and rehabilitation of natural habitats and their functions …11 All of the proposed project components would be located in areas where the natural habitat has already been significantly modified, as a result of cultivation and associated activities. No subproject would be established inside or in the immediate vicinity of protected area (list provided later in the document). However in view of the presence of a large number of protected areas in the province, the OP 4.04 is triggered for the proposed project (list of the protected areas is presented later in the document). 2.2.5 Pest Management (OP 4.09 Through this OP, the WB supports a strategy that promotes the use of biological or environmental control methods and reduces reliance on synthetic chemical pesticides. While the project is not financing any direct procurement of pesticides and other agro- chemicals, it is likely that with better marketing opportunities in close proximity, farmers could tend to increase land-based productivity through application of fertilizers, pesticides and other agro-chemicals for increasing crop yields. Therefore, Pest Management is triggered. An Integrated Pest Management Plan (IPMP) will address pesticide usage especially in the chilies crop besides other crops being considered in the project. The plan will also articulate a strategy to incorporate IPM principles in project interventions specifically and in the agriculture sector in Sindh in general. 2.2.6 Safety of Dams (OP 4.37) The Policy seeks to ensure that appropriate measures are taken and sufficient resources provided for the safety of dams the WB finances. However this OP is not relevant since the proposed project does not involve construction of dams. 2.2.7 Projects on International Waterways (OP 7.50) This OP defines the procedure to be followed for projects the WB finances that are located on any water body that forms a boundary between, or flows through two or more 11 Excerpts from WB OP 4.04.WB Operational Manual. June 2001. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-6 Environmental and Social Management Framework states. However, no project components will be located on any such waterways. Hence this OP is not triggered. 2.2.8 Cultural Property (OP 4.11) The World Bank’s general policy regarding cultural properties is to assist in their preservation, and to seek to avoid their elimination. The specific aspects of the Policy are given below. 12  The Bank normally declines to finance projects that will significantly damage non- replicable cultural property, and will assist only those projects that are sited or designed so as to prevent such damage.  The Bank will assist in the protection and enhancement of cultural properties encountered in Bank-financed projects, rather than leaving that protection to chance. In some cases, the project is best relocated in order that sites and structures can be preserved, studied, and restored intact in situ. In other cases, structures can be relocated, preserved, studied, and restored on alternate sites. Often, scientific study, selective salvage, and museum preservation before destruction is all that is necessary. Most such projects should include the training and strengthening of institutions entrusted with safeguarding a nation’s cultural patrimony. Such activities should be directly included in the scope of the project, rather than being postponed for some possible future action, and the costs are to be internalized in computing overall project costs.  Deviations from this policy may be justified only where expected project benefits are great, and the loss of or damage to cultural property is judged by competent authorities to be unavoidable, minor, or otherwise acceptable. Specific details of the justification should be discussed in project documents.  This policy pertains to any project in which the Bank is involved, irrespective of whether the Bank is itself financing the part of the project that may affect cultural property. Since the project activities will be carried out in or near the cultivated fields, it is unlikely that any sites of cultural, archeological, historical, or religious significance will be affected. However, in case of discovery of any such sites or artifacts during the project implementation, the work will be stopped at that site and the provisions of this Policy will be followed. Additionally, the provincial and federal archeological departments will be notified immediately, and their advice sought before resumption of the construction activities at such sites. 2.2.9 Indigenous People (OP 4.10) For purposes of this policy, the term “Indigenous Peoples” is used in a generic sense to refer to a distinct, vulnerable, social and cultural group possessing the following characteristics in varying degrees:13  self-identification as members of a distinct indigenous cultural group and recognition of this identity by others;  collective attachment to geographically distinct habitats or ancestral territories in the project area and to the natural resources in these habitats and territories; 12 Excerpts from the OPN 11.03.WB Operational Manual. September 1986. 13 Excerpts from the OP 4.10.WB Operational Manual. July 2005. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-7 Environmental and Social Management Framework  customary cultural, economic, social, or political institutions that are separate from those of the dominant society and culture; and  an indigenous language, often different from the official language of the country or region. The OP defines the process to be followed if the project affects the indigenous people. There are no known indigenous groups in the entire Sindh province as identified under Op 4.10. Therefore, this OP is not triggered. The only identified indigenous people are in Kalash valley in the northern Pakistan (Chitral district of Khyber Pakhtunkhwa province). 2.2.10 Projects in Disputed Areas (OP 7.60) Projects in disputed areas may raise a number of delicate problems affecting relations not only between the Bank and its member countries, but also between the borrowerand one or more neighboring countries. In order not to prejudice the position of either the Bank or the countries concerned, any dispute over an area in which a proposed project is located is dealt with at the earliest possible stage. The Bank may proceed with a project in a disputed area if the governments concerned agree that, pending the settlement of the dispute, the project proposed for country A should go forward without prejudice to the claims of country B. 14 This OP is not triggered since no part of the Sindh Province is located in any disputed territory. 2.2.11 Policy on Access to Information The World Bank recognizes that transparency and accountability are of fundamental importance to the development process and to achieving its mission to alleviate poverty. Transparency is essential to building and maintaining public dialogue and increasing public awareness about the Bank’s development role and mission. It is also critical for enhancing good governance, accountability, and development effectiveness. Openness promotes engagement with stakeholders, which, in turn, improves the design and implementation of projects and policies, and strengthens development outcomes. It facilitates public oversight of Bank-supported operations during their preparation and implementation, which not only assists in exposing potential wrongdoing and corruption, but also enhances the possibility that problems will be identified and addressed early on.15 In accordance with this Policy, the present ESMF will be disclosed to public. 2.2.12 Applicability of Safeguard Policies Applicability of the WB safeguard policies – on the basis of the discussion in Sections 2.2.1 to 2.2.11 above - with respect to the environmental and social issues associated with the proposed project is summarized below. 14 Excerpts from the OP 7.60.WB Operational Manual. November 1994. 15 Excerpts from the World Bank Policy on Access to Information. World Bank, July 2010. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-8 Environmental and Social Management Framework Operational Policy Triggered Environmental Assessment (OP 4.01) Yes Involuntary Resettlement (OP 4.12) No Forestry (OP 4.36) No Natural Habitat (OP 4.04) Yes Pest Management (OP 4.09) Yes Safety of Dams (OP 4.37) No Projects in International Waters (OP 7.50) No Cultural Property (OP 4.11) No Indigenous People (OP 4.10) No Projects in Disputed Area (7.60) No Policy on Access to Information Yes 2.3 Obligations under International Treaties Pakistan is signatory of several Multilateral Environmental Agreements (MEAs), including:  Basel Convention,  Convention on Biological Diversity, Convention on Wetlands (Ramsar),  Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES),  UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC),  Kyoto Protocol,  Montreal Protocol,  UN Convention to Combat Desertification,  Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL),  UN Convention on the Law of Seas (LOS),  Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants (POPs),  Cartina Protocol. These MEAs impose requirements and restrictions of varying degrees upon the member countries, in order to meet the objectives of these agreements. However, the implementation mechanism for most of these MEAs is weak in Pakistan and institutional setup mostly nonexistent. The MEA most applicable for the Project is the Stockholm Convention on Persistent Organic Pollutants (POPs), under which certain pesticides such as dichloro diphenyl trichloroethane (commonly known as DDT) cannot be used. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-9 Environmental and Social Management Framework 2.4 Institutional Setup for Environmental Management The apex environmental body in the country is the Pakistan Environmental Protection Council (PEPC), which is presided by the Chief Executive of the Country. Other bodies include the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (Pak-EPA), provincial EPAs (for four provinces, Azad Jammu and Kashmir and Gilgit-Baltistan), and environmental tribunals. The EPAs were first established under the 1983 Environmental Protection Ordinance; the PEPA 1997 further strengthened their powers. The EPAs have been empowered to receive and review the environmental assessment reports (IEEs and EIAs) of the proposed projects, and provide their approval (or otherwise). The proposed project would be located in the Sindh Province. Hence the present report will be sent to the Sindh EPA for review. 2.5 Environmental and Social Guidelines Two sets of guidelines, the Pak-EPA’s guidelines and the World Bank Environmental Guidelines are reviewed here. These guidelines address the environmental as well as social aspects. 2.5.1 Environmental Protection Agency’s Environmental and Social Guidelines The Federal EPA has prepared a set of guidelines for conducting environmental assessments. The guidelines derive from much of the existing work done by international donor agencies and non-governmental organizations (NGOs). The package of regulations, of which the guidelines form a part, includes the PEPA 1997 and the NEQS. These guidelines are listed below.  Guidelines for the Preparation and Review of Environmental Reports,  Guidelines for Public Consultation,  Guidelines for Sensitive and Critical Areas,  Sectoral Guidelines. It is stated in the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Review of IEE and EIA Regulations, 2000 that the EIA or IEE must be prepared, to the extent practicable, in accordance with the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Environmental Guidelines. 2.5.2 World Bank Environmental and Social Guidelines The principal World Bank publications that contain environmental and social guidelines are listed below.  Environment, Health, and Environment (EHS) Gudeilines prepared by International Finance Corporation and World Bank in 1997.  Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook 1998: Towards Cleaner Production  Environmental Assessment Sourcebook, Volume I: Policies, Procedures, and Cross- Sectoral Issues.  Social Analysis Sourcebook. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 2-10 Environmental and Social Management Framework 3. Project Description16 This Chapter describes various aspects of the proposed project including its background, objectives, its components, and activities under each component. 3.1 Project Development Objectives The proposed Project Development Objective (PDO) is to improve the productivity and market access of small and medium producers in selected commodity value chains. This will be achieved by: (i) investing in knowledge and technology for producers, sub-sectors of crops and livestock; and (ii) strengthening public sector institutions to enhance the enabling environment for sustained sectoral growth. Project Beneficiaries The proposed project would contribute to more inclusive growth by prioritizing support to small and medium sized producers who are trying to compete in horticulture markets. The project would reach to approximately 112,000 farmers covering over 66,000 ha. A substantive number of these farmers would be women involved in the agricultural processes on-farm for pre- and post-harvest practices for the selected commodities. The project will use a value chain approach to provide direct investment support to the farmers and producers groups for: (i) development of more effective and efficient farming systems; (ii) introduction of technology packages for increased productivity and value addition, and; (iii) improved market access. These services will be made available with a defined focus on how they reach the women in agriculture. The project will be provincial in scope but specific activities may be concentrated geographically based on agro-ecological conditions or natural clustering of economic activities. It is expected that beneficiaries will be able to establish effective and efficient production systems and create market linkages. PDO Level Results Indicators The key performance indicators for the SAGP (at the outcome results level) will measure changes in:  Average yields for selected commodities by targeted beneficiaries.  Percent of high grade produce of selected commodities by targeted beneficiaries.  Number of beneficiaries disaggregated by gender. 3.2 Project Components The SAGP would contribute to more inclusive growth by prioritizing support to small producers with commercial potential. The project would be implemented over a period of five years and would have the following components: Component A: Capacity Building and Institutional Development (US$ 17.1 million): The project will finance capacity building of producers through technology development, technology dissemination, training and exposure. The project would also provide institutional development for the implementing agencies and support strategic planning for Sindh’s agricultural sector. 16 Adopted from the Project Appraisal Document (PAD), prepared by WB. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 3-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework Sub-component A.1: Capacity Building of Producers (US$ 1.5 million). The project will finance training and capacity building for farmers, which will be based on training needs assessment carried out by the departments and their technical assistance providers. Training topics will include, but not limited to, good agricultural practices, agribusiness management, negotiating in the market, basic accounting, record keeping, etc. This will be done through inter-alia demonstration plots, public information campaigns, face-to- face training, and farmer-to-farmer study tours, and exposure visits. For each value chain, the department will sponsor stakeholder forums to facilitate dialogue with and among value chain actors that will increase the market orientation of departmental activities as well as build capacity of the departments to carry out stakeholder engagement for other crops in the future. Sub-component A.2: Modernization of Extension Services and Agricultural Research (US$ 13.1 million). This subcomponent will finance: (a) technical assistance to the implementing departments; (b) modernization of extension services and facilities; and (c) competitive fund for adaptive research. Technical assistance and capacity building. The project will finance the extended presence of a technical assistance consultant/firm who will (a) assist with the planning and management of implementation of investments in Component B, and (b) designing and delivering effective capacity building components. Additional technical assistance and training will be financed through twinning arrangements with international agencies. Modernization of programs and facilities. Both the Agriculture Department and the Livestock & Fisheries Department have facilities that were affected by the 2010 and 2011 floods, and the project will provide a modest amount of financing to facilitate their rehabilitation. In addition, it will provide support to establish and/or rehabilitate facilities critical to fulfilling the requirements of the project including, the agricultural research centers, artificial insemination training center, and semen production units. Modernization of extension services by introducing ICT-based technologies. The project will finance ICT-based technologies and services for delivery of agriculture extension and marketing for farmers/producers. These would include information going out to small producers and other stakeholders through the use of mobile phone and other ICT tools including 24/7 call center and interactive websites and other communication tools. Competitive research fund. The project will finance a program of competitive research grants supporting research on crop agriculture, livestock, and fisheries. The program would be managed Department of Agriculture, in collaboration with Sindh Agriculture University at Tando Jam. The research proposals will be reviewed based on agreed criteria outlined in the Operational Manual. Sub-component A.3: Strategic Planning for the Agricultural Sector (US$ 2.5 million): The project will finance the: (a) development of Sindh Agricultural Development Strategy; and (b) preparation of feasibility studies for future investments. Sindh Agricultural Development Strategy ($1.0 million). The project will finance development of the provincial Strategy to set the long-term development and growth vision for Sindh’s agricultural sector. To more accurately forecast needs of the sector relative to pricing, climate smart agriculture, competitiveness and consumer demand, etc. The project will finance economic modeling, public expenditure review, private sector development, and sectoral results framework to inform future investment planning as part of preparing background studies. The Strategy development process will be managed by Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 3-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework the office of the Project Coordinator (see Component C) and guided by the Project Steering Committee (PSC). Preparation of feasibility studies for future investment plans ($1.5 million). The project will finance preparation of studies on additional crop and livestock value chains including, but not limited to, fisheries and aquaculture, meat production and marketing, seed production and food storage, etc. The studies will feed into discussions for future investment project preparation. The approval of topics to study will be accorded by the PSC and the Project Coordinator will manage the implementation and dissemination feasibility studies. Component B: Investment for Agricultural Growth (US$ 70.6 million): This component finances specific investments in the horticulture and dairy value chains and a targeted investment to reduce post-harvest loss among small-holder rice growers. The component would also finance a demand driven innovation fund to support farmers and producers with technology innovations in the selected value chains. Selection criteria for farmers and producer groups to receive project interventions and detailed procedures for funds transfer and managing contributions are included in the Operational Manual. Sub-component B.1: Horticulture Value Chains (US$ 36.3 million). The project will finance investments in three (3) horticulture crops – dates, onions and chilies. The key focus will remain on adopting good agricultural practices for production and post-harvest handing of the selected crops. Dates crop. The project would finance investments for increased productivity through good agricultural practices for improved crop husbandry, tools for pre- and post-harvest processes including, mats for spreading dates in the sun, disease control kits, moisture testing meters, conductivity meters, tree pruner, pollinator guns, harvesting tool, solar dryers, hand carts, plastic crates, tarpaulin sheets, etc. would be provided to small and medium growers on a 30-70 percent cost sharing basis. To support market access, technology would be provided on a 70-30 cost sharing basis with the farmer or farmer group providing their 30 percent of the cost to DoA, which would then notify a supplier in close proximity to the farmer/farmer group to deliver the implement/tool. Onion crop. The project would provide extension services for increased productivity through correct plant husbandry, both as a pure stand and an intercrop, fertilizer application, spraying techniques, weed and disease control, harvesting, curing and drying. The integrated pest management extension would focus on developing an environmentally sensitive approach to pest management. Under pest and disease management, thrips, damping off, bulb rotting and downy mildew would be of primary concern. The project would also finance technology packages for increase market access which may include, but not limited to, onion diggers, curing and storage facilities to increase shelf life, mechanical dryers, seed threshers, and ancillary equipment, etc. The financing of the tools and equipment will be provided on cost sharing where growers will contribute 30 percent. Chili crop. The project will focus on increased productivity through improving agricultural practices including introduction of polyester drying mats, along with similar sheets to cover the crop to prevent dew formation on the harvested crop would be provided to famer and grower associations on 30 percent cost sharing bases. The reduction in aflatoxins is directly in response to improving market access by addressing the urgent need of improved food safety of the chili crop for domestic market as well as for facilitating opening of exports to more desirable markets, thus boosting farmer Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 3-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework incomes and foreign exchange earnings. Rehabilitation and up gradation of the Kunri chili research station in district Umerkot would also be financed. The project would facilitate a public-private partnership involving the Chili Growers Association to establish a common facility center in Kunri, which will house equipment and other implements to improve post-harvest handling of chilies. Project financing of the facility will be contingent on an approved business plan and secured cofinancing. Depending on the size of the facility, IFC support would be sought during implementation. Sub-component B.2: Rice Post-harvest Loss Management (US$ 10.8 million). To increase productivity and stem the loss of 30-40% of the rice crop due to poor processing practices, this subcomponent will finance threshers for farmers and paddy dryers for small mill operators. In addition, the project will provide soil and moisture testing kits, conductivity meters, etc. Financing for the threshers and dryers would be provided on 50 percent cost sharing basis (in accordance with current government practice) to groups of farmers, small mill operators, and individual medium-scale farmers. The remaining smaller technology inputs would be provided on a 70-30 cost sharing basis. To support the market access, the project would also promote knowledge sharing and learning from other rice producing countries for potential market linkage for Sindh’s rice. Sub-component B.3: Dairy Value Chain (US$ 18.5 million): The project will increase productivity of milk commodity through introducing improved animal health and husbandry practices, nutritional services, hygienic milk collection and testing of milk quality, milk quality monitoring and recording, and storage. Approximately 153 milk producers groups (MPGs) will be formed in 8 districts to improve their market access. The project will target small and medium milk-producing households, but since women are involved in at least 80 percent of production management, the project will provide services exclusively targeting women (e.g., extension messages, female extension agents, etc.). The number of MPGs per district will vary according to the animal population and market linkage. Essentially, each MPG would have a production capacity of 1,000 liters each day. Initial targeting will focus on identified “milk pockets” in the 8 districts. Through meetings in these targeted areas, producers will be informed of the project and given the rules for forming an MPG. The mobilization of MPGs will be done by the private sector milk processors and the district level project implementation unit. In addition, arrangements for producers to access markets will vary based on the existence of a competitive field of private sector actors. They could include, direct tie-ups with traders or processors, or community chilling units that allow the MPG to negotiate with different actors on a competitive basis. Sub-component B.4.: Demand Driven Innovation Fund (US$ 5.0 million). The project would establish a demand driven innovation fund to respond to the needs for small inputs that supplement the project objectives of improved productivity and market access. The identification, planning and selection criteria along with procedures to implement the Fund are included in the Operational Manual. Component C: Project Management and Monitoring and Evaluation (US$ 12.3 million): This component would finance costs for following: Sub-component C.1.: Project Management (US$ 8.2 million). Operational costs for Project Management Units (PMUs), Project Coordinator’s office and Project Implementation Units (PIUs). This component also includes costs for implementation of Environment and Social Management Framework (ESMF) and Pest Management Plan (PMP) and development of Social Assessment. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 3-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework Sub-component C.2.: Monitoring and Evaluation and Project Support Costs (US$ 4.1 million). Costs for: (i) development and implementation of communications strategy and awareness campaigns through print and electronic media; (ii) effective grievance redressal mechanism (GRM) include interactive voice response and complaint tracking system; (iii) rigorous impact evaluation rigorous Impact Evaluation will be designed to attribute causality to project interventions; (iv) third party monitoring; and (v) a management information system (MIS). 3.3 Alternatives Considered and Reasons for Rejection Under agriculture, the emphasis of the proposed initial subproject is on horticulture crops and post-harvest management in rice. However, horticulture, though showing impressive growth in the agricultural sector is a minor contributor to provincial GDP when compared to the four major agricultural crops of wheat, rice, sugarcane and cotton. Alternative design scenarios were considered; these included: Alternative 1: No investment project. The ‘no-project’ alternative is not acceptable since in that scenario, no direct investment would strategically promote sectoral growth for agriculture and its subsectors. Additionally, investments in agricultural sector with a focus on reaching to the small and medium farmers have been ad hoc at best. As a result, promotion of horticulture while remains a priority for the GoSindh, few resources are available to address the subsectors many challenges that limit its growth. Alternative 2: Focus on different horticulture crops. Mangos and bananas are both economically valuable crops in Sindh, and offer a moderate export potential if varietal selection were improved. However, these crops are primarily grown by larger farmers, who are able to access the required investment capital for production units that are economically viable. In addition, both crops have received significant prior support from donors and government and appear to be thriving. Nevertheless, their contribution to the economy of Sindh is lower than that of dates, onions and chilies. Alternative 3: Focus on the major crops. Wheat, rice, sugarcane and cotton are the backbone of the Sindh agricultural economy. However, to make an impact in these crops would need considerable amounts of investment, and would be beyond the scope of the first phase of this program, which was tasked with showing measurable impact in the first six years. A second consideration is that fact that the major four crops all receive considerable government subsidies in one form or another and operate in distorted market following political rather than economic imperatives. 3.4 Institutional and Implementation Arrangements The Department of Agriculture and the Department of Livestock and Fisheries will jointly be responsible for implementing the project and for ensuring that the project development objectives are met. The two Departments will be responsible for implementation of their respective components as well as project management. The project would largely be implemented through the existing structures of the two Departments for delivering local agriculture and livestock extension and research services. However, both Departments would be augmented with additional technical and project management capacities to support the implementation. The implementation arrangements would comprise of three tiers:  Project oversight and coordination at provincial level; Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 3-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework  Project management at departmental levels; and  Project implementation at districts level. Provincial Level Oversight and Coordination A provincial level the Project Steering Committee (PSC) will guide, monitor, and supervise the implementation of the Bank project. The PSC will be chaired by the Additional Chief Secretary and will provide overall decision making and policy guidance on aspects relating to agricultural sector development and growth for its contribution to the provincial GDP. The PSC would review progress and will meet every quarter or as needed. The PSC members will include:  Additional Chief Secretary (chair)  Secretary Finance  Secretary Agriculture  Secretary Livestock  Representatives of Private Sector Stakeholders  Project Coordinator (member secretary) The PSC would be supported by a full-time Project Coordinator. The Project Coordinator would be responsible for consolidated monitoring and evaluation of the project. The quarterly reports prepared by the PMUs would be consolidated by the Project Coordinator. In addition, the Project Coordinator would prepare Annual Reports with Project Implementation Plans (PIP). The project monitoring and evaluation (M&E) consultants would report to the Project Coordinator. The Sindh Agricultural Development Strategy will also be managed by the office of the Project Coordinator with under the guidance of the Project Steering Committee (PSC). And the Project Coordinator will be responsible for managing the implementation and dissemination feasibility studies. Project Management Project Management Unit: Two Project Management Units (PMUs) would be established in the Department of Agriculture and Department of Livestock respectively headed by Project Directors who are appointed by the Government. The position of a Project Coordinator will be established to ensure that joint monitoring, reporting and coordination takes place with the help of two Departments. The PMUs would be responsible for overall project management, monitoring and supervision, as well as fiduciary and safeguards implementation and compliance. The PMUs will have project management and implementation staff with adequate qualification and expertise. The PMUs and where needed, would be provided with additional technical support through consultants. Project Implementation Project Implementation Units: At the district level, Project Implementation Units (PIUs) will be established to provide support staff, training and equipment to build capacity and strengthen the arrangements already in place, mainly the existing Research and Extension wings of the Department of Agriculture and Department of Livestock. The PIUs would be provided with capacity building so that they can access and use a greater range of information products, decision tools, and manage field demonstrations. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 3-6 Environmental and Social Management Framework A total of eight (8) PIUs will be established – two each in Hyderabad, Mirpukhas, and Sukkur and one in Larkana and Thatta districts. The PIUs would have adequate staff to ensure all implementation responsibilities are properly resourced. The PIUs will be responsible for the operational management and implementation of the specific sub- components. The PIUs will report to respective PMUs for day-to-day management and implementation of project sub-components and will be supported by implementation as well as fiduciary staff of the PMUs. Results Monitoring and Evaluation The PMUs will have overall responsibility for all results monitoring and evaluation. The PMUs will prepare quarterly report that will be consolidated by the Project Coordinator and submitted in an appropriate format to the GoSindh PSC, and the Bank no later than three weeks after the end of each quarter. The quarterly report would cover the progress and implementation status of all project components progress on capacity building and training, activities of the project consultants, progress and results of special studies, other technical, environmental and social, procurement and financial management issues. These reports would be in addition to the quarterly interim financial statements, including: (a) comparison of actual physical and financial outputs with forecasts, and updated six-months project forecasts; (b) project financial statements, including sources and application of funds, expenditures by category statement, and designated account reconciliation statement; and (c) a procurement management report, showing status and contract commitments, overall procurement plan for the next six months. The interim financial statements would be submitted within 45 days after the close of each quarter by each implementing agency. The Project Coordinator will also prepare Annual Reports with Project Implementation Plans (PIP). The Annual Reports will be consolidated with inputs from the two PMUs and will be prepared by no later than March 31 of each year of project implementation. The Annual Reports will cover: (a) the progress of each component, implementation of key features of the environmental and social management framework, key performance indicators, results framework, operation of project facilities, and financial statements; and (b) the annual Project Implementation Plan (PIP) for the following Fiscal Year with funds required for implementation with breakdown by components/activities, an updated disbursement profile, planned actions for mitigating environmental and social negative effects during implementation, and target indicators for the coming year. The project would hire M&E consulting firm with a proven track record. The M&E consultants would report to the Project Coordinator and provide support on: (a) monitoring the project results framework including key performance indicators (KPIs); (b) completing a baseline survey for each component; (c) carry out impact evaluation studies for each intervention tier; and (d) establish a Project Management Information System (MIS). The M&E activities would provide continuous feedback to the GoSindh and PSC on the project’s performance and its overall impact and of various components, so that corrective actions could be undertaken in a timely manner. In addition, an impact evaluation would be carried out with the objective of establishing the net contribution of the project to the sustainable livelihoods of the targeted families "before" and" after" the project and/or "with" and "without" the project. This impact evaluation would also feed into preparation of the next phase or follow on of the project. A Mid Term Review (MTR) would be undertaken half way through the project Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 3-7 Environmental and Social Management Framework implementation period and an Implementation Completion Report (ICR) would be submitted to the Bank no later than six months after the closing date of project. Sustainability Sustainability under the SAGP has several dimensions. First, is the sustainability of individual investments which includes that in principle, investments under the SAGP are included as part of a broader effort to enhance agriculture sustainability at the farm level. This applies to overall agricultural and in particular horticultural practices initially in the selected crops and scaled up to future investments in other crops. Second is the sustainability of the investments across a given crop cluster which will depend on the quality of the SAGP planning process, the timely execution of activities and the incentives that farmers have in implementing activities. Third, as there are trade-offs between the project support accessed by farmers within different parts of the province, it is expected demonstrative effect will engage additional farmers to participation, in the longer-run, in the sectoral growth programs of the GoSindh and other development partners. In addition, the sustainability of the sector growth agenda will be ensured by the Sindh Agriculture Development Strategy which would address key constraints in promoting extension and marketing issues from small and medium farmers’ perspective and hence enable public policy lessons and possible transfer of these towards scaling-up of sectoral investments. All of this will also be linked directly to the quality of the M&E system in capturing results as well as lessons in the SAGP and effectively communicating these to stakeholders including policy and decision makers, development partners and direct and indirect beneficiaries. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 3-8 Environmental and Social Management Framework 4. Environmental and Social Baseline Conditions This Chapter presents an overall profile of the existing environmental and socioeconomic situation in the Sindh Province as the baseline conditions for project and it’s ESMF, since the sites for the interventions included in the proposed project are likely to be spread all over the Province. This baseline has been prepared based upon the secondary literature resources17. 4.1 Location Sindh is bounded to the west by Balochistan Province, to the north by Punjab Province, to the east by the Indian states of Gujarat and Rajasthan and to the south by the Arabian Sea. The capital of the province is Karachi, Pakistan's largest city and financial hub (see Figure 4.1 for the map of the Province and its surroundings). GilgitBaltistan Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Afghanistan Punjab Balochistan India Sindh Arabian Sea Figure 4.1: Sindh Province and its Surroundings 17 Sources include: 1) Atlas of Pakistan; Survey of Pakistan, 1997. 2) Sindh – State of Environment and Development; IUCN, 2004. 3) Wikipedia web page on Sindh accessed on 12 May 2013. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework 4.2 Geography The Province of Sindh is located on the western corner of South Asia, bordering the Iranian plateau in the west. Geographically it is the third largest province of Pakistan, stretching about 579 km from north to south and 442 km (extreme) or 281 km (average) from east to west, with an area of 140,915 square kilometers (54,408 square miles) of Pakistani territory. It lies between 23° and 28° North latitudes and 66° and 71° East longitudes. Sindh is bounded by the Thar Desert to the east, the Kirthar Mountains to the west, and the Arabian Sea in the south. In the centre is a fertile plain around the Indus River Sindh consists of the Lower Indus Plain, which is very flat, generally sloping to the south with an average gradient of about 95 mm per kilometer. The Lower Indus Plain primarily comprises Indus Delta in the south, meander flood plain and cover fold plan. The area can be divided into five micro-relief land forms: active flood plain; meander flood plain; cover flood plain; scalloped interfluves; and Indus Delta. Topographically, Sindh can be divided into four distinct parts: (a) Kirthar range on the west; (b) a central alluvial plain bisected by the Indus River; (c) a desert belt in the east; and (d) the Indus delta in the South. These are briefly described below.  Kirthar Range consisting of three parallel tiers of ridges which run in north south direction and vary in width from 20 to 50 kilometers. The Kirthar range has little soil and is mostly dry and barren.  Central Alluvial Plain comprising the valley of the Indus River. This plain is about 580 kilometers long and about 51,800 square kilometers in area and gradually slopes downward from north to south. It is a vast plain, around 100 meters high above sea level. According to the past tradition it has been divided into three distinct zones: i) Lar or Southern Sindh comprising the area south of Hyderabad; ii). Wichalo or Central Sindh, the area lying immediately around Hyderabad; and iii) Siro, or Northern Sindh, comprising the area beyond Naushahero Feroze and Sehwan.  Eastern Desert Belt including low dunes and flats in the north, the Achhrro Thar (white and desert) to the south and the Thar Desert in the south-east. There is small hilly tract known as Karunjhar hills. The Aravalli series belongs to Archaen system which constitutes the oldest rocks of the earth’s crust.  Indus Delta consisting of the distributaries of the Indus River which starts spreading out near Thatta across the deltaic flood plain in the sea. The even surface is marked by a network of flowing and abandoned channels. A coastal strip, 10 to 40 kilometers wide, is flooded at high tide and contains some mangrove swamps. Except for a small hilly tract (Nagarparkar), in the southeast corner of the Tharparkar District, western Sindh is the only region which is mountainous and includes the hill ranges of Kirthar, Pab, Laki, and Kohistan. There is no vegetation on these ranges due to scanty rainfall. The highest altitude known as Kutai-ji-Kabar is in the Kirthar Range and is about 2,073 meters high. These ranges run north to south like a crescent turned towards the low lands and extend up to the northern extremity of the province. Kirthar has a simple, anticlinal structure with flanks gently dipping towards west and south. The Laki Range, on the other hand, is mainly composed of tertiary rocks and contains a large number of thermal springs. A large part of Sindh lies in the deltaic plain of the Lower Indus Valley. Most of this region consists of plains overlain by alluvium, trenched with river channels in some places and overridden by raised terraces in others. A few isolated Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework low limestone hills are the only relieving features in the plains which are otherwise at one level. The plains may be subdivided into three parts: the western valley, the eastern valley, and the deltaic area. The western valley section is distinguished from the eastern valley by the presence of old alluvium and seasonal nala flowing from the Kirthar mountain range into the Manchhar Lake. The deltaic area largely consists of mangrove swamps and sandbars. The chief characteristic of the region is the creeks, which serve as the changing outlets of the Indus and as inlets for the sea. The lowland Indus plain merges into this region. The eastern part of Sindh consists of the Thar Desert which continues into Rajasthan (India). The landscape is sandy and rough with sand dunes covering more than 56 percent of the area. The relief in the area varies between near sea level to more than 150 meters above sea level. The sand dunes are mostly longitudinal with a north-east-south-west trend and are stabilized by shrub vegetation and grass. 4.3 Geological Setting The prevailing geologic conditions in the region are the results of extensive inundation, depositions, coastal movements, and erosions over a long period of time in the geological ages. The geology of the region is closely related to the formation process of Himalayan ranges resulting in intense deformation with complex folding, high angle strike-slip faults and crust thickening expressed in a series of thrust faults. The important tectonic changes which have had so much influence in the region are feebly visible particularly in the Indus Plain, and it is only by considering the geology on a broader regional scale, as well as in site specific detail, that the effects can be appreciated. Most parts of Sindh are covered either by recent alluvium or wind-borne sand. The principal features of geological significance are to be found in the hilly portions of the province, towards the west of the Indus. Outlying extensions of this hilly tract occur east of the Indus as well, near Sukkur, Hyderabad and Jerruck. The isolated hills of Nagarparkar on the northern border of the Rann of Kutch belong to quite a different system both geographically and geologically. The geological studies of the proposed site have not been conducted in detail. However, the studies carried out in the vicinity of Port Qasim area which is not far away from the proposed site reveal that Port Qasim and its adjoining areas have been formed in the middle and upper Tertiary and the soil formation found in the area are fresh and slightly weathered with recent and sub-recent shoreline deposits. These formations are derived from Gaj / Manchhar formation of lower Miocene to middle Miocene to Pliocene age. Similar deposits are found all along the coastal belt of Karachi and adjoining areas. The earthquake hazard in the Indus Delta and the estuaries on the passive continental margin is mainly from intra-plate active faults particularly Rann of Katch Fault also known as the Karachi-Jati-Allah Bund Fault. It has three other segments namely Jhimpir Fault, Pab Fault and Surjani Fault. The main faults between Karachi and Rann of Kutch are generally oriented easterly and slightly concave to the north. Two severe earthquakes occurred in the vicinity of Karachi, one in the year 1050 at Bhambore in which 0.15 million casualties were reported and the other in the year 1668 at Pipri near Steel Mill which is only 60 km away from Karachi, however the details of this are not available. 4.4 Soils The soil in the plains of Sindh is plastic clay that has been deposited by the Indus. Combined with water it develops into a rich mould and without water it degenerates into Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework a desert. Nearly the entire Indus valley has soil which is extremely friable and easily disintegrated by the flow of water. Resultantly, the water always contains a large amount of suspended silt. The Soil Survey of Pakistan has grouped approximately 80 percent Sindh soils into eight land capability classes according to their agriculture potential and the relative suitability for sustained agriculture use (see Table 4.1). Soils placed in Class I are generally very responsive to high inputs of water, improved seed, fertilizers, labor and also to improved management techniques, while lower classes have correspondingly decreasing response to inputs and management. Approximately 10 percent of classified land in Sindh falls under Class I and 20 percent under Class II and 15 percent under Class III. Arable area constitutes approximately 50 percent of the classified area in Sindh. Table 4.1: Extent of Land Capability Classes in the Surveyed Area of Sindh Salinity is one of the major soil problems confronting agriculture in Sindh. The problem is generally considered to be the result of the canal irrigation system, but countrywide soil surveys have established that most of the existing saline/saline sodic soils are not related to the present irrigation system, and their formation is the consequence of the gradual redistribution of salts already present in the soil. However, the canal irrigation system has certainly aggravated the situation. This kind of salinity, identified as secondary salinity, is relatively temporary and can be easily eliminated by adopting appropriate measures. Major factors responsible for the development of secondary salinity include lateral seepage of water from the canal system and its evaporation from the surface of adjoining soils, the rising of water table due to excessive percolation from the canal system and over-irrigation practices, inadequate availability of water, and accumulation of salts in low lying areas through runoff from surrounding saline soils. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework 4.5 Land Use Agriculture, followed by forestry, is the main land use in most parts of Sindh. Although more than 50 percent of the total geographical area is cultivable, only 26 percent of it is actually located in the central plain. The land inside the Indus embankments is almost equally employed by agriculture and forestry, while that outside the embankments is more extensively utilized for agriculture in the form of sparsely distributed irrigated plantations. The land use in Sindh is given in Table 4.2. Table 4.2: Land Use in Sindh Area Land Use Percentage (Million Ha) Not Sown 3.022 21.446 Current Fallow 1.439 18.935 Cultivable Waste 2.688 10.212 Total Available for 7.149 50.593 Cultivation Not Available for 5.830 41.374 Cultivation Forest 1.125 7.984 Unreported 0.007 0.049 Total 14.091 100.000 Source: Sindh State of Environment and Development, International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN), 2004. 4.6 Water Resources Sindh is entirely dependent on the River Indus for its survival and development. About 95 percent of the farmland in Sindh obtains its water from the irrigation system, while the rest is cultivated with the help of tube wells. The limited groundwater (less than 5 million acre feet or MAF – about 6.17 billion cubic meters or BCM) in the province is available in only 28 percent of the entire area. Rainfall is only in the range of 100 to200 mm per annum, while the evaporation rate is about 1000 to 2000 mm, depending on climatic conditions. Thus the whole of Sindh is arid, with the River Indus being the primary freshwater source that gives life to the province. With population growth, the average amount of renewable freshwater available to each person has been declining. A country is considered to be under serious water stress if it falls below 2000 cubic meters. It is classified as water deficient if the per capita water availability falls under 1000cubic meters. In such a situation the socioeconomic and environmental development of the country is seriously hampered. IndusRiver: The Indus River is the main source of surface water in the project area (and in the country). The Indus rises in Tibet, at an altitude of about 18,000 feet (5,486 m) above mean sea level (amsl), and has a total catchment area of 654,329 km2. Length of the Indus River in the country is about 2,750 km. Five main rivers that join the Indus from the eastern side are Jhelum, Chenab, Ravi, Beas and Sutlej. Besides these, two minor rivers - Soan and Harrow also drain into the Indus. On the western side, a number of small rivers join Indus, the biggest of which is River Kabul with its main tributaries i.e. Swat, Panjkora and Kunar. Several small streams such as Kurram, Gomal, Kohat, Tai Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework and Tank, also join the Indus on the right side. Table 4.3 presents key facts about the river. The Indus River and its tributaries on an average bring about 154 MAF (189.9 BCM) of water annually. This includes 144.9 MAF (178.7 BCM) from the three western rivers and 9.14 MAF (11.2 BCM) from the eastern rivers. Most of this, about 104.7 MAF (129.1 BCM) is diverted for irrigation, 39.4 MAF (48.6 BCM) flows to the sea and about 9.9 MAF (12.2 BCM) is consumed by the system losses which include evaporation, seepage and spills during floods. The flows of the Indus and its tributaries vary widely from year to year and within the year. As is the case with the water availability there is significant variation in annual flows into sea. Table 4.3: Key Facts about Indus River a Length of River Indus in Pakistan: 1,708 miles (2,767 km) Tarbela Dam and Ghazi Barotha Hydro Power Project Important Engineering Jinnah Barrage (950,000 cusecs), Structures on the River: Chashma Barrage (1.1 million cusecs), Taunsa Barrage (750,000 cusecs), Guddu Barrage (1.2 million cusecs), Sukkur Barrage (1.5 million cusecs) and Kotri Barrage (750,000 cusecs) Catchment Area: 252,638 miles2 (663,023km2) Annual Average Flow: 48.0 MAF (41.41 Kharif and 6.61 Rabi) a Source: Pakistan Water Gateway. The Indus Basin Irrigation System The Indus River system can be divided into western rivers (Indus, Jhelum and Chenab) and eastern rivers (Ravi, Beas and Sutlej). The total flows of the western rivers belong to Pakistan while India has the right to the waters of the eastern rivers. All the rivers of the Indus system are perennial. The irrigation system of Pakistan, fed by the Indus and its tributaries, is the largest integrated irrigation network in the world. The system consists of three major storage reservoirs, 19barrages, 12 inter-river link canals, 43independent irrigation canal commands, and over107,000 watercourses. These are complemented by a surface drainage system. The total length of the canals is 61,000 km whereas watercourses and farm channels measure another 1.6 million km. A watercourse generally commands 80 to320 hectares. The system draws an average of106 MAF (130.7 BCM) of surface water each year for irrigation, supplemented annually by pumped groundwater of some 43 MAF (53 BCM). The overall irrigation efficiency of the IBIS is around 36 percent. The irrigation canals of Sindh were extended and improved by the British in the late 1800s.By 1910, the irrigated area had expanded to 1.4million hectares (MHa). Sukkur Barrage, completed in 1932,increased the annual cultivated area to 2.37MHA. The Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-6 Environmental and Social Management Framework completion of Kotri Barrage (Ghulam Muhammad Barrage, 1955), and Guddu Barrage (1962) brought the rest of Sindh's irrigation system under barrage control. The total command area under the three barrages was 5.1 MHa in 1997-98. There are 13 existing surface drainage systems in Sindh that serve a total area of over 2.5 MHa and have an aggregate length of about 4,800km. Additional drains are under construction. During the year 1999-2000, the total irrigated area using all sources in Sindh was of the order of 2.52 MHa. This included 2.39 MHa in the canal commands and 0.13 MHa irrigated by private wells and tube wells. The irrigation system presently comprises of 14canals, 1200 distribution channels and 47,400watercourses. On an average, Sindh has drawn 45 MAF (55.5 BCM) during the period of 1970 to1997.Data from 1980-81 to 1997-98 demonstrates that about 95 percent of the farmland in Sindh gets water from the irrigation system and the rest is cropped with the help of tube wells. River Water Quality The water quality of Indus River is generally considered excellent for irrigation purposes. The total dissolved solids (TDS) range from 60 milligrams per liter (mg/l) in the upper reaches to 375 mg/l in the lower reaches of the Indus, which are reasonable levels for irrigated agriculture and also as raw water for domestic use. The disposal of saline drainage from various irrigation projects has been a major factor in the increased TDS in the lower reaches of the rivers in the Indus Plain. There is progressive deterioration downstream and the salinity is at its maximum at the confluence of the Chenab and Ravi rivers, where the TDS ranges from 207 to 907 mg/l. A slight improvement in water quality is noted further downstream at Panjnad due to dilution from the inflow from Sutlej River. The quality of the Indus water at Guddu, however, is within acceptable limits for agriculture; TDS being in the range of 164-270 mg/l. In the upper reaches of the Indus River, the Dissolved Oxygen (DO) content remains above 8.5 mg/l which is well above the acceptable levels of 4 mg/l. The Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD) downstream of Attock has been recorded as 2.9 mg/l. At Kotri, it has a suspended solid (SS) content of 10 to 200 mg/l. Indus River water quality has been studied at the Dadu – Moro Bridge and Kotri Barrage, with nitrate levels at 1.1 and 7.5 mg/l, phosphate at 0.02 and 0.3 mg/l, BOD at 2.4 and 4.1 mg/l, faecal coliforms at 50 and 400 per ml, and aluminum at 1.8 and 0.2 mg/l respectively. Due to industrial waste discharges from Punjab and Sindh, a high content of heavy metals such as nickel, lead, zinc and cadmium have also been found in Indus water. Groundwater Sources Regular surveys have not been carried out to assess the availability of groundwater in the province. Various sources estimate that its volume is between 3 to 5 MAF (3.7 to 6.2 BCM) scattered in 28 percent of the geographical area of Sindh. However, some experts suggest it to be less than these estimates. This water is found mainly along the Indus water channels and in the few natural underground streams. In recent years, drought has caused excessive extraction of groundwater to make up for the lack of irrigation water. This, in turn, has resulted in rapid depletion of the groundwater and filling up of the underground freshwater channels and reservoirs with brackish water. There is an urgent need to conduct a survey for assessing the location and potential of ground water in Sindh. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-7 Environmental and Social Management Framework Rain Harvesting. Little effort has been made towards harvesting rainwater in the province. Several projects like the Mol Dam, Kacho Reservoir, the development of lakes, depressions and reservoirs, remain unattended. These water bodies can harvest rain for irrigating crops and can be used for fish farming. However, such projects can cause ecological damage if not well-planned and can also result in the eviction of communities from productive areas they have inhabited for centuries. 4.7 Climate The climate of Sindh is arid and hot. According to classification made by UNESCO the region has been divided into three zones as under: (i) Coastal- South of Thatta. (ii) Southern- from Thatta through Hyderabad to Shaheed Benazirabad (Nawabshah). (iii) Northern-from Shaheed Benazirabad (Nawabshah) to Jacobabad. In an average year coastal region receives the maximum rainfall of 175-200mm. The hottest region is Northern where mercury during summer goes upto 53 °C. The wind direction changes from west to southwest in the Coastal zone, to south-southeast in northern zone. The coldest season extends from December to February when dominating influence is the eastern winds. Mean monthly temperature varies from 20 °C near the coast to 14 °C in the north. Daily variation is about 30 °C but temperature above 32or below 2 °C may occasionally be expected. Frosts are very rare in south of Nawabshah. Humidity is in the 40-60 percentage range. Monthly rate of evaporation in the irrigated areas varies from 76mm in the north to 114mm in the south. Rainfall for the three months is less than 25mm. Mean daily temperature rises rapidly from February onwards to its peak in May and June, rather earlier in the south than in the north. Mean maximum temperature reaches about 24 °C in May in the south and as high as 45 °C in June in the north. The severity of the heat varies from year to year, the highest temperature ever recorded on the subcontinent was 53 °C at Jacobabad. Winds are rather variable, being transitional from the northeast to southwest as the season develops. Humidity is at its lowest generally below 40 percent, but increases as the sea breeze become dominant. Evaporation is correspondingly at its highest exceeding 25mm in rocky desert areas. Rainfall is low and generally associated with local thunderstorm. July to mid September is the monsoon season and is characterized comparatively by low day temperature, high humidity (over 60 percent in the south and 50 percent in the north), reduced evaporation (only 15 or 18mm at some stations in August) and a considerable increase in clouds in coastal areas. Occasional depressions from the east result in a 4 or 5 day period of rain and thunderstorm, especially in the south. Heavy rain is generally rare in the north, which receives little influence either from the monsoon current in the south or from those that come up from the Ganges Valley to the northern Indus plains. The rainfall is very variable, instances have been recorded where a single day has considerably exceeded the highest annual average. Mid September to November is the period of sea breeze with occasional north winds. At the start temperature rises slightly, then falls in November. Humidity falls to about 10 to 15 percent, and the evaporation decreases about 100mm in the north, 125mm in the south. 4.8 Agriculture Agriculture is the foundation of Pakistan's economy. It contributes about 25 percent to the Gross Domestic Product (GDP) of the country. Sindh is a major contributor of staple Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-8 Environmental and Social Management Framework crops in the country, producing 35percent of rice, 28 percent of sugarcane, 20 percent of cotton and 12 percent of wheat, respectively. A majority of the people of Sindh depend on agriculture as their main source of livelihood. About 40 percent of the land in Sindh is arable land and 5 percent of it is rangeland. The total cultivated area in Sindh is 5.88 million hectares and the net area sown is 2.39 million hectares. The total cropped area is 3.10 million hectares, of which 0.71 million hectares are sown more than once1. Sindh grows a variety of field and horticultural crops. Wheat, cotton, rice, and sugarcane are the major field crops, which constitute 68 percent of the total cropped area, while mango, banana and chilies are the major horticultural crops. Among the horticultural crops, Sindh produces 73 percent bananas, 34percent mangoes, and 88 percent of the chilies. Of the total cropped area of 3.1 million hectares in the year 2000-01, almost 50 percent of the area was under food crops (wheat, rice, maize, sorghum, millet and barley), 25 percent under cash crops (cotton, sugarcane). The remaining area was under fodder (9.1 percent), pulses (4.7 percent), condiments (4.1 percent), oilseeds (3.8 percent), fruits (3.3 percent), and vegetables (1.4 percent). Crop yields in Sindh are generally low and have remained either stagnant or have increased at slow rates. The low availability of quality seed of crop varieties continues to be of major concern for agriculture. The use of crop inputs such as fertilizer and pesticides has increased considerably without a corresponding increase in yield levels. The supply of substandard and adulterated pesticides and fertilizers is also affecting crop yields and the cost of production. There is increasing degradation of the resource base such as soil, and current farming practices do not adequately address the issue of sustainability of crop production systems. This is in addition to the high cost of inputs and unstable market prices. The farming community is, for the most part, below the poverty line and this is a major constraint to the development of agriculture. Farm mechanization is limited to the use of tractors and wheat threshers. Laser levelers are a recent introduction with considerable potential for enhancing yield levels and better use of irrigation water. Current water scarcity related problems demand the adoption of efficient water management practices. Agro-Ecological Zones The irrigated areas of the province have been divided into three major agro-ecological zones, two of which are further divided into sub-zones, as given below. Zone A Rice/wheat zone of the right bank of river Indus (upper Sindh) Sub-zone A1 Main area Sub-zone A2 Piedmont soil region Zone B Cotton/wheat zone of the left bank of river Indus Sub-zone B1 Guddu Barrage command area Sub-zone B2 Sukkur Barrage command area Zone C Rice/wheat/sugarcane zone of lower Sindh. In addition to the above three zones, there are two more zones in Sindh. Zone D is a desert area in the east of Sindh, and Zone E is the western hilly zone. Main agricultural activity is, therefore, concentrated in the Zones A, Band C. Table 4.4 shows the main features of the agro-ecological zones including climate, water supply, soil, and cropping pattern. Zone A: It covers the districts of Shikarpur, Jacobabad, Larkana and the northern taluka of Dadu district. There are six main canals (three from the Guddu Barrage and three from the Sukkur Barrage) feeding zone A, three of which are perennial. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-9 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 4.4: Main Features of Agro-Ecological Zones including Water Supply, Soil Salinity and Cropping Pattern Zone A1 covers the districts of Shikarpur, Larkana and the northern taluka (Mehar and Khairpur Nathan Shah) of Dadu district. Dadu, Rice and NWC Canals of Sukkur Barrage irrigate the zone. Rice is the major crop of the zone, followed by wheat while Rabi pulses and oilseeds are dubari crops. Wheat, sugarcane, oilseeds, Rabi and Kharif vegetables as well as guava and dates are also grown under the command of Dadu and NWC perennial canals. Zone A2 covers the region of Jacobabad and Larkana districts. Here the soil is richer in clays than the soil of Zone A1, potentially more fertile and less prone to salinity Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-10 Environmental and Social Management Framework problems. However, it is slower to drain. The major crop of the zone is rice in Kharif, followed by wheat, Rabi pulses and oilseeds as dubari crops. Zone B: Zone B covers the left bank of river Indus in the districts of Ghotki, Sukkur, Khairpur, Naushero Feroze, Sanghar, Hyderabad, Mirpurkhas and Tharparkar. The entire zone is Indus flood plain. Saline soils are encountered throughout the zone. The problem tends to be more acute in the east of Ghotki and Sukkur Districts (Zone B1) and in eastern Sanghar and Mirpurkhas District (Zone B2). Cotton and sugarcane are the main Kharif crops of Zone B1. Oilseeds like sesame and sunflower are also being cultivated increasingly in the zone due to water scarcity. Wheat, oilseeds and vegetables follow the Kharif crops. Zone B2 lies in the command area of four perennial canals (Rohri, Khairpur Feeder East and West and Nara) of the Sukkur barrage covering the districts Khairpur, Naushero Feroze, Sanghar, Hyderabad, Mirpurkhas, and Tharparkar. The major Kharif crops of the zone are cotton and sugarcane, followed by sesame, sunflower, and groundnuts. In the Rabi season, wheat is the major crop followed by rapeseed, mustard, sugarcane, Rabi vegetables, and onion. The zone also produces mango, banana, chiku, papaya, citrus, and jujube. Zone C: Zone C consists of lower Sindh, and is fed from the Kotri Barrage. It includes the Indus Delta and covers the districts of Thatta, Karachi, Badin (except taluka Matli and northern parts of Tando Bago) and taluka Tando Mohammad Khan of District Hyderabad. Zone C is more saline than any other area in Sindh. Salinity and water- logging are most severe in this zone where drainage is difficult due to an absence of a gradient. The climate of Zone C is mild and humid, and it has the highest rainfall in Sindh (180 to 250 mm per year). However, its agricultural production is low. The main crops are rice and sugarcane in Kharif, which are followed by wheat and vegetables in perennial areas. The main vegetables grown here are onion and tomato and the zone also produces banana, chiku, papaya and coconut. Palm oil plantation has been successfully introduced in this zone. 4.9 Human Environment Demography and Administrative Division Sindh has the second highest Human Development Index out of all of Pakistan's provinces at 0.628. The 1998 Census of Pakistan indicated a population of 30.4 million; the current estimates indicate a population of over 35 million in Sindh. Just under half of the population is urban, mainly found in Karachi, Hyderabad, Sukkur, Mirpurkhas, Shaheed Benazirabad District, Umerkot and Larkana. Sindhi is the sole official language of Sindh since the 19th century. According to the 1998 Population Census of Pakistan, Sindhi-speaking households make up 59.73 percent (92.02 percent in rural and 25.79 percent in urban area) of Sindh; Urdu-speaking households make up 21.05 percent (1.61 percent in rural and 41.48 percent in urban areas); Punjabi 06.99 percent; Pashto 05.01 percent; Balochi 2.11 percent; Saraiki 01.00 percent; and other languages 04.93 percent. Other languages include Gujarati, Memoni, Persian, Kutchi (last one being a dialect of Sindhi), Khowar, Thari, Luri and Brahui. The Sindh is as a whole are composed of original descendants of an ancient population known as Sammaat, various sub-groups related to the Baloch origin are found in interior Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-11 Environmental and Social Management Framework Sindh and to a lesser extent Sindhis of Pashtun origins. Sindhis of Balochi origins make up about 30 percent of the total Sindhi population (they however speak Sindhi as their native tongue), while Urdu-speaking Muhajirs make over 20 percent of the total population of the province. Also found in the province are groups of Sindhi tribes claiming descent from early Muslim settlers including Arabs, and Persian. There are 23 districts in Sindh, listed below and shown in Figure 4.2.  Karachi  Naushahro Feroze  Larkana  Jamshoro  Tando Muhammad  Matiari Khan  Thatta  Hyderabad  Ghotki  Badin  Sanghar  Shikarpur  Tharparkar  Khairpur  Jacobabad  Umerkot  Shaheed Benazirabad  Sukkur  Mirpur Khas  Dadu  Kashmore  Tando Allahyar  Qambar Shahdadkot Figure 4.2: Districts in Sindh Province Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-12 Environmental and Social Management Framework Economy Sindh has the second largest economy in Pakistan. Its GDP per capita was $1,400 in 2010 which is 50 per cent more than the rest of the nation or 35 per cent more than the national average. Historically, Sindh's contribution to Pakistan's GDP has been between 30 percent and 32.7 percent. Its share in the service sector has ranged from 21 percent to 27.8 percent and in the agriculture sector from 21.4 percent to 27.7 percent. Performance wise, its best sector is the manufacturing sector, where its share has ranged from 36.7 percent to 46.5 percent. Since 1972, Sindh's GDP has expanded by 3.6 times. Endowed with coastal access, Sindh is a major centre of economic activity in Pakistan and has a highly diversified economy ranging from heavy industry and finance centered in and around Karachi to a substantial agricultural base along the Indus. Manufacturing includes machine products, cement, plastics, and various other goods. Sindh is Pakistan's most natural gas producing province. Agriculture is very important in Sindh with cotton, rice, wheat, sugar cane, bananas, and mangoes as the most important crops. Sindh is the richest province in natural resources of gas, petrol, and coal. Education and Literacy Literacy is one of the important indicators of education because its improvement is likely to have a longer run impact on other important indicators of national welfare. According to the latest Pakistan Social and Living Standards Measurement (PSLM) Survey 2010-11, the literacy in Sindh for the population (10 years and above) was 59 percent during 2010- 11. Literacy remains much higher in urban areas than in rural areas and much higher for men than for women. The details are given in Table 4.5. According to the Annual School Census 2010-11, Sindh has a total of 48,914 schools. These include 44,522 Primary, 2,505 Middle, 1,641 Secondary, and 246 Higher Secondary schools. Of these schools, 12,827 are for boys, 8,458 for girls, and 27,629 are for both boys and girls. In terms of location, 5,765 schools are located in urban areas and 43,149 are located in rural areas. These schools have a total of 144,610 teachers. According to the same survey, the total enrollment in the schools is 4,402,993, which includes 3,291,974 Primary, 237,003, Middle, 620,951 Secondary, and 253,065 Higher Secondary enrollment. 18 Table 4.5: Literacy in Sindh(10 years and above) Percentages 2008-09 2010-11 Male Female Total Male Female Total Rural 61 22 43 60 22 42 Urban 81 65 73 82 68 75 Overall 71 45 59 71 46 59 Source: Pakistan Social and Living Standards Measurement Survey, 2010-11. 18 Source: Statistical Bulletin – Annual School Census, 2010-11. SEMIS Reforms Support Unit, Department of Education and Literacy, Government of Sindh. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-13 Environmental and Social Management Framework Health The government healthcare facilities in the Province comprise seven Teaching Hospitals, 11 District Headquarter Hospitals, 56 Tehsil Headquarter Hospitals/Civil Hospitals, 130 Rural Health Centers, 774 Basic Health Units, 643 Dispensaries, 90 Mother and Child Health Centers, and 15 Sub-health Centers. In addition, a large number of private healthcare facilities mostly located in cities and towns also exist in the Province. The Infant Mortality Rate in the Province is 81 per 1,000 live births, Under 5 Mortality Rate is 101 per 1,000 live births, Maternal Mortality Ratio is 314 per 100,000 live births, Malnutrition is 22 percent, and Immunization for children under one year is 37 percent.19 Cultural Heritage Sindh's history dates back to the early Stone Age and fossils of Pleistocene, Paleolithic, Mesolithic and Neolithic periods have been discovered in the mountainous areas. A large quantity of ground stone axes and tools were excavated at the stone age tool factories in upper Sindh at Rohri, Sukkur and Kotdiji areas; Site 101 in Thatta district; as well as at Drigh Road, Korangi and Orangi areas in Karachi. In addition, Sindh has two world heritage sites: Mohenjodaro, located on the right bank of Indus in Larkana district, and Makli, the world's largest necropolis (36 km) in Thatta district. The province has five different geographical regions with a distinct ethnography, dialect and folklore. They are the mountains of Kohistan, the alluvial plains at the foot of the mountains called Ka'achho, the riverine belt of Indus or Kacho, the Indus Delta, and the desert of Tharparkar. The cultural heritage sites of Sindh range from the Stone Age to the Indus Valley Civilization (third millennium BC) and from Jain and Buddhist to the Hindu and Muslim period spread over all the five regions. The remnants of Jain sites exist only in Sindh's Nagar Parkar taluka of Thar where ruins of half a dozen major temples depict the past glory of Jain architecture. The most important of these sites is the Gori Temple near Islamkot. Buddhist sites are located all over the plains and also in the western Kirthar Range. The sites and monuments documented during archaeological surveys undertaken between 1993 and 1996 by the Federal Archaeology Department, listed 26 Buddhist sites in eight districts of upper Sindh. The same survey recorded a dozen Hindu sites, while more than50 Muslim sites are recorded in upper Sindh that include tombs, forts and mosques belonging to the Arghuns, Tarkhans, Kalhora and other Muslim dynasties. Eighty-four sites in Sindh are protected under the Department of Archaeology, Government of Pakistan, but these sites are badly attended to. These include the Rannikot Fort, believed to be the biggest stone fort in South Asia, its walls stretching over 20 miles. Rannikot Fort is situated 18 miles west of Sann in Dadu district in the Kirthar range and is important for its aesthetic value and military engineering. 4.10 Biological Resources Flora Sindh is endowed with a rich diversity of flora. This flora, apart from its aesthetic value, is used as fodder, in rural homes, in industry as well as in the production of medicines. The flora of Sindh can be classified with respect to the ecological zones described below. 19 Source: Health Facility Assessment – Sindh Provincial Report. TRF/Government of Pakistan. June 2012. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-14 Environmental and Social Management Framework Littoral and mangrove: This zone possesses mangroves that are fairly widespread. In Sindh, these forests are confined to a few areas and represent a genetic stock adapted to local conditions. These areas serve as a dwelling for plant and animal species vital for biodiversity in this ecosystem. Plant species in these regions are Avicenniaalba, Ceriopstagal (C.candol/eana), Halopyrummucronatum and Brugujeraconjugata. In most regions there is a pure stand of only Avicennia. In higher areas, not subject to daily inundation, there is a low scrub of Salsolaimbricata and Suaedafruticosa with scattered bunches of grasses such as Urochondrasetulosa and Halopyrummucronatum. Riverine: This zone comprises of habitats located in the immediate vicinity of the Indus River and its tributaries up to the base of the foothills in the north. Due to the control of seasonal flooding through irrigation barrages and increased intensity of cultivation adjacent to the main riverbanks, this zone is rapidly disappearing and the riverine forests are drying out. Plant species in these regions are ClimaxAcacia nilotica (A.arabica), and in less stable areas, Tamarixindica, Tamarixaphylia, Populuseuphraticawith grasses such as Saccharumben galense (Erianthusmunja, Saccharummunja) and Saccharumspontaneum. Swamps and the jheel: These areas are subject to summer flooding and often become dry by April or May. Typical examples are found around the East Nara and Sanghar, Ghauspur (Jacobabad district) and Manchar (Dadu district).The most commonly found plant species inthese regions are Taniarixdioica. Otherdominant shrubs and grasses are Phragrniteskarka, Typhaangustata, Paspalumpaspaloides, Imperatacylindrica, Arundodonax, Sacdarunispontaneum, and in water pools Valhsneriaspiralis, Neiunbiumnuciferum and Hydrillaverticillata are present. Tropical thorn forest: This is a major habitat originally occupying the entire Indus plain from the foothills to the coast, but due to human activity over the course of more than one thousand years, most of this forest has been lost. Its principal edaphic feature is deep soil, where the tropical thorn forests survive in small pockets. A few have recently regenerated in areas such as airfield peripheries (for soil stabilization), around graveyards, and uncultivated areas such as saline flats or the patt. In Sindh, they are mostly found on the rightbank of the Indus around Kashmore. Plant species in these forests are Prosopiscineraria, Capparis decidua, Salvadoraoleoides, Tamarixaphvlla, Ziziphusnummularia, Calotropisprocera, Suaedafruticosawith grasses such as Aristidaadscensionis and Octhocloacompressa. Some of these species are scattered shrubby trees which are affectedby lopping. In the waterlogged and saline areasof the south, Salvadoraoleoides is replaced by Salvadorapersica and Tamarixindica and in the southwest the calcareous rocks are dominated by Euphorbia caducifolia. Sand dune desert: There are five main sand dune deserts in Sindh. They are widely separated from each other. One of these is located between 610 and 1,060 meters (2,000and 3,500 feet) above sea level. The others are less than 152 meters (500 feet) above sea level. Thar is a typical example of the latter type. Plant species in these deserts are Prosopiscineraria (P. spicigera), Tamarixaphylla, Euphorbia caducifoha, Capparis decidua, Salvadoraoleoides, Commiphorawightii, Ziziphusnummularia, Grewiatenax,Cassia senna, Calligonumpolygonoides and Blepharissindica. Dry, sub-tropical, semi-evergreen scrub forest: These are tracts with ridges of sandstone and limestone escarpments, interspersed with low soil deposits in the northern regions of the province. Generally, they are heavily overgrazed by domestic stock and pocked by severe gully erosion. They are found in the hilly areas of Kohistan at an Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-15 Environmental and Social Management Framework elevation of 3,000 feet and above. Clumps of cactus-like Euphorbia dominate the landscape of Kohistan, which is subject to humid winds during the monsoon season but is hot, dry, and relatively frost-free for the rest of the year. Other species in the region are Acaciajacquemontii, Maeruacrassifolia, Commiphorawightmukul, Ziziphusnummu/aria, Rhazyastricla, Euphorbia caducifolia, Grewiatenax, and Blepharissindica. Fauna Historically, the province of Sindh was known for its diverse range of habitats, ecosystems and several unique species of wildlife. However, the present state of almost all wildlife species in this region is bleak. Most of the wildlife species are found in areas which are not suitable for human habitation and cultivation. Tables 4.6 and 4.7 respectively present lists of important mammals and reptiles/amphibians of the Province. Birds. Birds from the South Asian subcontinent, East Africa, Europe and much of Asia are found in the Sindh, which serves as a caravanserai for Eurasian avifauna travelers. Some fly in to stay for the winter, while the rest fly through. For many species the province serves as a breeding ground while others procreate in other areas but have been spotted in this region. There are resident species specific to Sindh, whilst others come from far and wide. Table 4.8 presents a list of some important birds of the Province. Table 4.6: Important Mammals of Sindh Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-16 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 4.7: Important Reptiles and Amphibians of Sindh Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-17 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 4.8: Important Birds of Sindh Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-18 Environmental and Social Management Framework Wetlands Sindh's coastal and estuarine wetlands serve as spawning, rearing, and nursery grounds for the production of shrimp, lobster and fish. They also serve as critical breeding, rearing, staging and wintering grounds for a number of globally important fish and shellfish species. During the migration season, thousands of water birds from 108 species use this habitat. The key wetlands of Sindh are briefly described below. The Indus Dolphin Reserve is spread over 135 km from the Sukkur upstream to the Guddu Barrage. In 1974, the entire area was declared the home of the endangered Blind Dolphin (IUCN Red Data Book). The major threats it faces include split populations of the dolphins due to dams and barrages on the River Indus, reduction in habitat size during dry season, high turbidity, pollution, and hunting. The number of dolphins at the site has increased from 150 in 1974 to 620 in 2001. Keenjhar (Kalri) Lake is a large freshwater lake providing drinking water to Karachi. It is located in Thatta district. It was declared a Ramsar site in 1976 and later became a wildlife sanctuary under the Sindh Wildlife Protection Ordinance. An annual Waterfowl Census has been carried out since 1971. Some baseline information indicates 65 species of fauna whose number had increased from 50,000 to 150,000 in the 1970s to 205,000 in 1988. Major threats to the lake include illegal fishing operations, an excessive number of motorized fishing boats and the use of synthetic nets in the lake. The grazing of domestic animals and unchecked recreational activities are other significant threats. Drigh Lake is a small, slightly brackish lake with extensive marshland. The lake was declared a wildlife sanctuary in 1972, and became a Ramsar site in 1976. Threats include diversion of water; and overgrown Typha and Tamarix resulting in increased grazing pressure. The number of wintering birds visiting the site has decreased over the years from 32,000 in 1973 to 17,400 in 1987-88. Haleji Lake is a perennial freshwater lake with marshes and a brackish seepage lagoon. Considered a game reserve in 1971, this lake was declared a wildlife sanctuary and in 1976, the lake proceeded to become a Ramsar site. Haleji serves as an important source of water for Karachi besides being a popular recreational destination. Threats to the site include the overlapping of the management of the lake by the Karachi Water and Sewerage Board (KWSB) and the Sindh Wildlife Department; the unauthorized and illegal fishing, hunting and cutting of trees and siltation, as well as eutrophication. The number of birds visiting the site was 60,000 to 100,000 in the 1970s. In 1988, the figure was 103,000. Jubho Lagoon is a shallow, small brackish water lagoon with mudflats and marshes that support a large concentration of migratory birds including flamingos and endangered Dalmation pelicans, a rare species in the world. This was declared a Ramsar site in 2001 because of the efforts made by IUCN Pakistan. Nurruri Lagoon is also a brackish, privately owned lagoon with barren mudflats that is visited by large concentrations of migratory water birds. It was also declared a Ramsar site in 2001. Increased salinity, sea intrusion, population pressures, agricultural and industrial pollution are major threats to this site. Deh Akro is a wildlife sanctuary consisting of four major habitats; desert, wetland, marsh, and agricultural. Located 330km northeast of Karachi, it is a natural inland wetland ecosystem, which supports a variety of rare and endangered wildlife species. This area hosts a considerable number of rare fauna. Many indigenous fish species are Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-19 Environmental and Social Management Framework also found here. Water scarcity during a persistent dry spell is adversely affecting this area. Runn of Kutch is part of the great Thar desert and comprises of stabilized sand dunes, with broad interdunal valleys of alluvial soil, connected across the frontier with India, which includes permanent saline marshes, coastal brackish lagoons, tidal mudflats, and estuarine habitats. The site supports many locally and globally threatened species, including the Great Indian bustard (Choriotisnigriceps), Houbara bustard (Chlamydotisundulata), Sarus crane (Grusantigone), and hyena (Hyeanahyaena) and supports more than 1 percent of the biogeographical population of flamingos. Indus Delta is the fifth largest delta in the world. The fan-shaped delta consists of creeks, estuaries, mud flats, sand dunes, mangrove habitat, marshes and sea bays. It shelters 82,669 mangroves, mostly Avicenna marina which comprises 97 percent of the total mangrove area in the country and is said to be the largest coastal mangrove forest in the world. A large number of species of birds (including the threatened Dalmatian pelican) of fish and shrimps, and of dolphins (Plumbeous dolphin, Finless porpoise, and Bottlenose dolphin), humpback whale and reptiles are found here. The area is rich in archaeological and religious heritage. Protected Areas After 1970, the Sindh government took the initiative of drafting wildlife legislation and promulgated it as the Sindh Wildlife Protection Ordinance, 1973. This legislation has been amended from time to time, keeping in view the requirements of wildlife protection and conservation. Kirthar National Park, covering an area of 1192 square miles, was created in the year 1975 and 35 wildlife sanctuaries and 15game reserves were brought under the wildlife enactment. There are a number of protected areas in Sindh (see Table 4.9 and 4.10).These areas contribute to the protection and maintenance of biodiversity, and of natural and associated cultural resources, managed through legal or other effective means (IUCN, 1994). A wildlife sanctuary is an area, which is set aside specifically as an undisturbed breeding ground for the protection of wildlife9. It is a restricted area, the use of which is denied to the public. No exploitation of the land is allowed except for reducing fire hazards, epidemics, insect attacks or natural calamities. National Parks such as the Kirthar National Park mentioned above, are accessible to the public for and facilities for recreation, education and research are provided, however, the wildlife in these areas must not be harmed within a three miles radius of the park's boundary. In order to control excessive hunting activity, game reserves were created. Hunting and shooting of animals in these areas are regulated under a special permit. Permits specify the maximum number of animals that may be killed or captured, the area in which it can be done and the hunting period during which these activities can be carried out. The Indus blind dolphin population was declining at an alarming rate before the WWF International and the Sindh Wildlife Management Board invited Dr Giorgio Pilleri, the Director of the Brain Anatomy Institute and Professor of Neuro anatomy and Comparative Neuropathology at the University of Berne, Switzerland, to study the biological behavior and echolocation of this unique aquatic mammal. On his recommendations, the Government of Sindh created an Indus Dolphin Reserve to ensure the survival of this species in a very disturbed environment. Encouraging results have Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-20 Environmental and Social Management Framework been achieved through effective conservation and scientific management which have also been documented. Table 4.9: Protected Areas of Sindh Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-21 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 4.10: Game Reserves of Sindh A great impetus was given to wildlife conservation in 1990 when the Wildlife Department was regrouped with the Agriculture Department. A number of new schemes for wildlife management along scientific lines were launched. These included captive breeding of endemic waterfowl species, captive breeding of Nara hog deer, biological studies of ungulates found in Kirthar National Park, establishment of game reserve in Kundah Reserve Forest, breeding of the marsh crocodile and its reintroduction in its original habitat, and multiplication trials of Black buck for introduction into wild habitats in Khairpur and Nawabshah districts. The results achieved overshot the targets that were envisaged in the schemes. Most of the schemes were completed in the first phase but, unfortunately, the second phase of the schemes was not implemented due to financial constraints. Prominent wildlife conservation interventions include the change in the alignment of the National Highway Authority's Karachi to Peshawar motorway to avoid the bifurcation of Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-22 Environmental and Social Management Framework the Mahal Kohistan Wildlife Sanctuary and the Kirthar National Park. The mid-winter waterfowl count initiated by the Sindh Wildlife Management Board in association with the Asian Wetland Bureau and the International Waterfowl Research Bureau has also been initiated. A program for the rehabilitation of the Lung Wetland by the Sindh Wildlife department has been completed. Other conservation interventions include mitigating measures to save the Marbled teal, the hog deer and marsh crocodile, which have become endangered due to the ecological damage being caused by the Chotiari reservoir. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 4-23 Environmental and Social Management Framework 5. Stakeholder Consultations This Chapter provides the objectives, process and outcome of the stakeholder consultations conducted as part of the present study. The primary objective of consultations at this stage were to incorporate intensive considerations of the local institutional knowledge about the socioeconomic and environmental conditions in the project area and the potential positive and negative environmental and social impacts of the project into project design through the ESMF. The consultations included a meeting of key institutional stakeholders active in the project area and discipline. More than fifteen institutional stakeholders participated in the meeting. A questionnaire was developed for consultations to seek formal responses in addition to the informal discussion that took place and was noted during the consultation meeting. The objectives, process and findings are recounted in this chapter in further detail. 5.1 Objectives The stakeholder consultation is an integral part of the environmental and social assessment for a project such as SAGP, and aims to provide a two-way communication channel between the stakeholders and the project proponents. In line with this aim, the objectives of the stakeholder consultation conducted as part of the present study were to:  develop and maintain communication links between the project proponents and stakeholders,  provide key project information to the stakeholders, and to solicit their views on the project and its potential or perceived impacts, and  collect and document local institutional knowledge about the socioeconomic and environmental conditions in the project area, how these relate to the project activities and how project activities can be designed to maximize social and environmental benefits and minimize potentially negative impacts, and  ensure that views and concerns of the stakeholders are incorporated into the project design and implementation with the objectives of reducing or offsetting negative impacts and enhancing benefits of the proposed project. 5.2 Participation Framework The stakeholder consultation is a continuous process, and should be carried out throughout the life of project. The consultations carried out during the present study and reported in this Chapter are essentially among the initial steps in this process. During the subsequent project phases as well, participation of the project stakeholders need to be ensured. Table 5.1 charts out the proposed participation framework during different project phases, while Figure 5.1 provides the conceptual framework employed during the stakeholders consultation carried out as part of the present study. While the different stages identified in the figure are conceptually separate, in actual effect, many of them, (say indidvidual and group consultations) often merge. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 5-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework 5.3 Stakeholder Identification Stakeholder analysis was carried out to identify relevant stakeholders on the basis of their ability to influence the project or their vulnerability to be negatively impacted from it. This approach ensured that no relevant groups are excluded from the consultation, and appropriate engagement strategies are developed for each stakeholder. Key stakeholders consulted at various levels include:  People directly affected by the Project and Project beneficiaries  Officials from the Agriculture and Livestock Departments  Environment Protection Agency  Academia  The broader interested community  Donors  NGOs, international organizations, and other interest groups. For the purposes of this study, the following institutional stakeholders were consulted;  Government and affiliated institutions operational in the area and in the field of agriculture  Regulatory agencies such as Environment Protection Agency  NGOs, international organizations, and other interest groups.  Academia and local researchers 5.4 Consultation Process The consultations with the project stakeholders were carried out while conducting the present study. A participatory and consultative approach was employed for information gathering and data collection. 5.5 Consultations with Institutional Stakeholders At this stage, a consultation meeting was held with key institutional stakeholders. The meeting was organized by Director General Agriculture Extension Sindh, in Hyderabad on May 16, 2013. Twenty six participants representing more than fifteen institutional members attended the meeting. Key participants included representatives from Sindh Environment Protection Agency, Sindh Irrigation and Drainage Authority, Sindh Agriculture University Tando Jam and a number of local NGOs including DAMAN, Indus Future Foundation and Bhandar Sangat. For a complete list of participants see Annex B: List of Institutional Stakeholders. A questionnaire was developed to faciliate the discussion and was circulated among the participants in advanced. Five participants provided written responses to the questionnaire and the questionnaire as well as the written responses are provided in Annex C; Institutional Stakeholder Consultations Questionnaire and Some Responses. The following section summarizes some of the key recommendations which emerged as the lietmotiv from the written and verbal responses during consultations. The findings and suggestions have been summarized and anonymised for the purposes of this section. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 5-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework 5.5.1 Project Design SAGP should target marginalized populations, in particular, small landholders, women and landless. In the agriculture sector, value chains, such as chili, fruits, and vegetables should be supported, where women and other marginalized populations play substantial roles in production and post-harvest processing. In the livestock sector, the dairy value chain will target women. In facilitating training, the project will enhance female extension workers. The project will also have a gender advisor, who will ensure women’s access to training and support their market linkages. The project should build on existing community-level organizations. SIDA has formed water course associations (WCAs) and farmer organizations (FOs) jointly with the Bank- supported On-farm Water Management (OFWM) project. These are registered organizations under the Sindh Water Management Ordinance (SWWMO) 2002. In mobilizing producer groups, SAGP could engage WCAs and FOs, where they are active. Cost sharing or in-kind contribution should be considered in providing farming equipment and infrastructure. 5.5.2 Project Environmental Impacts The project activities would have a positive impact on environment in terms of potential reduction in pesticide usage and safer on-farm practices. The capacity building activities should include trainings on environmental issues. 5.5.3 Project Social Impacts Social accountability mechanisms should be in place. The project needs to have such mechanisms, in particular, a grievance redressal mechanism that would address complaints related potentially to beneficiary targeting or other issues. The project should develop a communication strategy to raise awareness on SAGP. 5.6 Consultations with Potential Beneficiaries Detailed consultations were undertaken with various stakeholders, including produce wholesale dealers (including traders and middlemen), female livestock extension workers, and farmers. The farmers include large, medium and small landholders, landless (tenants), and women.The key observations from the meetings are discussed below; the detailed meeting notes are presented in Annex D. 5.6.1 Market Mechanisms At the produce markets, the wholesale dealers and middlemen facilitate transactions between the producer and the retailer. For this facilitation they charge 7% of each transaction. Part of the facilitation process is the exercise of price determination. There is no standardization in this regard and the dealer determines the price based on a judgemental assessment of a very small sample of the produce. In effect, the price is controlled entirely by the dealer. Unless this process is standardized, increasing produce quality may not benefit the grower and small farmer. It was also found out that almost all the growers selling produce at the Hyderabad market were indebted to the dealers who gave loans to the farmers in return for promise of share in future produce. This also hinders the ability of the growers and the small farmers specifically to fetch optimal price for their produce. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 5-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework 5.6.2 Targeting Small Farmers and Producers In Sindh the patterns of land ownership continue to be dominated by a somewhat feudal structure with much of the farming being done by ‘tennants’, farming small chunks (up to 5 acres) for large land owners who have hundreds if not thousands of such tennants working for them. In return for his labor, the tennant gets half of the produce’s value. While small and medium farmers and landowners (owning less than 25 acres) do operate in Sindh, they usually augment their income by taking on labor at other farms. Targeting these small farmers would be a challenge as they are spread out and not organized. Also, making sure that the value chain benefits and modernizes while the small and medium farmers benefit from the project interventions, will be a delicate balance to strike. Evidence of this can also be seen in the case of women milk producers. Currently they get paid about PKR 50/liter for their milk. This milk is then sold by milkmen in the city for as much as PKR 75/liter. Providing access for these women to chillers where they can sell their milk directly to commercial producers would benefit the value chain by increasing the quantity of milk being sold after UHT and in Tetrapack. However, the women may not be able to obtain a higher price for their milk, as these companies presently buy the milk at PKR 45/liter. In developing each selected value chain, the project’s consultation framework will identiry roles and opportunities for small and medium farmers, tenants, and women. This will ensure that the project benefits reach the intended beneficiaries while improving the value chain in each sector. 5.7 Summary Findings Overall, the proposed SAGP is considered to have a positive social impact by developing selected value chains through supporting farmer mobilization, extension services in enhancing production and productivity, post-harvest processing, value addition, and marketing (consultations summarized below). However, in the agriculture sector, in particular, the project should ensure participation by small landholders, tenants, and women, who play a critical role in production and post-harvest processing. The project should strike a right balance between value chain development and social inclusion by developing and implementing (a) a consultation framework to identify roles and opportunities for the marginalized populations and (b) targets in inclusiveness, which should be monitored regularly, such as % of marginal populations in training, % increase in labor, and/or % increase in income among these populations. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 5-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 5.1: Participation Framework Stakeholders Consulted / Project Stage Proposed Tool Responsibility to be Consulted Project Design Phase Meetings with institutional stakeholders Institutional stakeholders; Director General Agriculture Meetings with grass root stakeholders(carried out Grass root stakeholders, Extension, Sindh, Hyderabad during the present study); including the communities to (See Annex B for key stakeholders consulted.) be affected/benefitted during the project implementation. Pre-implementation Consultation framework Institutional and grassroots Director General Agriculture phase stakeholders Extension, Sindh, Hyderabad Director General Livestock Project Sharing of the project objectives, project Institutional stakeholders; Director General Agriculture implementation components, major benefits, potential impacts, and Grass root stakeholders, Extension, Sindh, Hyderabad Phase mitigation measures with the affected including the communities to Director General Livestock communities (and other stakeholders). be affected during the project Through the project consultant implementation. Grievance Redressal Mechanism (discussed in The communities to be AIUs and PMUs Section 7.6). affected/benefitted Consultations with the communities during The communities to be AIUs and PMUs Environmental and Social Monitoring (discussed affected/benefitted in Section 7.4). Consultations with the project affectees / The communities to be External monitoring beneficiaries and communities during the external affected/benefitted consultant. monitoring (discussed in Section 7.4). Consultations with the project affectees / The communities to be WB monitoring mission. beneficiaries, and communities during the site affected/benefitted; visits by the WB monitoring mission. District government officers Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 5-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework Figure 5.1: Conceptual Framework for ESMF Stakeholder Consultations Identification of grassroots level and management level stakeholders Individual Individual Group consultations consultations with consultations with with the grassroots the management the grassroots level and management level stakeholders stakeholders level stakeholders Discussions on the likely impacts of the project Identification of the mitigation of the impacts of the project Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 5-6 Environmental and Social Management Framework 6. Impact Assessment and Mitigation This Chapter assesses the potential impacts of the proposed project on environment and people. Also provided in the Chapter are the generic mitigation measures to minimize if not eliminate the potentially negative impacts, in order to ensure that the interventions under the proposed project do not cause environmental and/or social impacts beyond the acceptable level. 6.1 Positive Impacts The key activities under Component A of the project include capacity building of farmers, producers, and relevant government departments as well as preparing Agriculture Strategy. While it is obvious that such activities will not have any negative environmental or social impacts, they do provide environmental enhancement opportunities in the form of integrating environmental awareness aspects in the capacity building initiatives and including environmental protection approaches in the Agriculture Strategy. While the details of these opportunities will be worked out during the project implementation, some suggestions are listed below.  Health hazards of inappropriately handling pesticides, and guidelines for their proper handling  Health and environmental hazards for inappropriately and excessively using pesticides and guidelines for their proper application.  Advantages of integrated pest management.  Minimizing waste generation in activities such as packaging and processing.  Proper waste disposal related to agriculture and livestock value chain activities  Health and hygiene aspects in operations such as handling milk and other dairy products.  Occupational health and safety aspects related to agriculture and livestock value chain activities such as packaging and processing  Awareness of environmental degradation caused by intensification of cultivation caused by value chain development, and ways and means to avoid/counter this undesirable consequence.  Promotion of sustainable and judicious usage of natural resources.  Awareness, adaptation, and mitigation for climate change and its implications for agriculture sector in the Province. 6.2 Environmental Screening The Component B of the project will include activities or subprojects for agriculture and livestock value chains and also for post harvest loss management (See Section 3.2). These subprojects can potentially cause negative environmental and social impacts. However, exact nature, extent, and location of these subprojects is not known at this stage, as stated in Chapter 1 also. These potential impacts of generic nature have nonetheless been screened using the Asian Development Bank’s (ADB’s) Rapid Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Assessment Checklist for agro-industrial projects as given in Table 6.1 below. Table 6.1: Environmental Screening Screening Questions Yes No Remarks A. Project Siting Is the Project area adjacent to or within any of the following environmentally sensitive areas?  Cultural heritage site ? Unlikely, however this aspect will be confirmed for each individual sub- project under Component B.  Protected Area ? - Unlikely, however this aspect will be confirmed for each individual subproject under Component B. It will be ensured that no subproject is located inside any protected area.  Wetland ? Unlikely, however this aspect will be confirmed for each individual subproject under Component B. It will be ensured that no subproject is located inside any protected wetland.  Mangrove ? Unlikely. Most of the cultivation fields are well away from the mangrove forests. However this aspect will be confirmed for each individual subproject under Component B.  Estuarine ? Unlikely. Most of the cultivation fields are well away from the estuarine areas. However this aspect will be confirmed for each individual subproject under Component B.  Buffer zone of protected area ? Unlikely, however this aspect will be confirmed for each individual subproject under Component B. It will be ensured that no subproject is located inside any protected area.  Special area for protecting ? Unlikely, however this aspect will be biodiversity confirmed for each individual subproject under Component B. It will be ensured that no subproject is located inside any protected area. B. Potential Environmental Impacts Will the Project cause:  ecological disturbances arising ? Unlikely, however this aspect will be from the establishment of a confirmed for each individual plant or facility complex in or subproject under Component B. It near sensitive habitats? will be ensured that no subproject is Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks located inside any protected area.  loss of precious ecological ? Unlikely, however this aspect will be values (e.g. result of confirmed for each individual encroachment into subproject under Component B. It forests/swamplands or will be ensured that no subproject is historical/cultural located inside any protected area. buildings/areas, disruption of hydrology of natural waterways, regional flooding, and drainage hazards)?  eventual degradation of water ? - This aspect will be assessed while bodies due to discharge of designing specific subprojects under wastes and other effluents Component B. It will be ensured from plant or facility complex? that the subprojects do not cause significant degradation of water bodies.  serious contamination of soil ? - This aspect will be assessed while and groundwater? designing specific subprojects under Component B. It will be ensured that the subprojects do not cause contamination of soil and groundwater.  aggravation of solid waste ? - This aspect will be assessed while problems in the area? designing specific subprojects under Component B. It will be ensured that the subprojects do not aggravate solid waste problems in the area.  public health risks from ? - These aspects will be assessed while discharge of wastes and poor designing specific subprojects under air quality; noise and foul odor Component B. It will be ensured from plant emissions? that the subprojects do not cause public health risks associated with facility construction or operation.  short-term construction Likely - The design of subprojects will impacts (e.g. soil erosion, include mitigation and management deterioration of water and air measures to address and minimize quality, noise and vibration construction-related impacts. from construction equipment?  dislocation or involuntary ? Unlikely, however this aspect will be resettlement of people confirmed for each individual subproject under Component B. It will be ensured that subprojects do not cause any involuntary resettlement of people.  social conflicts arising from ? Unlikely, since most of the the influx of laborers from interventions are expected to be other areas? small and thus not necessitating influx of construction laborers from other areas. This aspect will be Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks confirmed for each individual subproject under Component B.  environmental degradation ? The project interventions are not (e.g. erosion, soil and water likely to cause expansion of contamination, loss of soil cultivated area. Monoculture fertility, disruption of wildlife practices have already been adopted habitat) from intensification of in most the cultivated areas of the agricultural land use to supply province. Awareness raising will be raw materials for plant carried out regarding potential operation; and modification of environmental degradation caused by natural species diversity as a intensified cultivation. result of the transformation to monoculture practices?  water pollution from discharge ? This aspect will be assessed while of liquid effluents? designing specific subprojects under Component B. It will be ensured that the subprojects do not cause significant water pollution.  air pollution from all plant ? This aspect will be assessed while operations? designing specific subprojects under Component B. It will be ensured that the subprojects do not cause significant air pollution.  gaseous and odor emissions to ? This aspect will be assessed while the atmosphere from designing specific subprojects under processing operations? Component B. It will be ensured that the odor and gaseous emissions from subprojects are within acceptable limits.  accidental release of ? This aspect will be assessed while potentially hazardous solvents, designing specific subprojects under acidic and alkaline materials? Component B. If applicable, the subproject design will include safeguards against accidental release of potentially hazardous solvents, acidic and alkaline materials.  uncontrolled in-migration with ? Unlikely. The project is unlikely to opening of roads to forest area cause any un-controlled in- and overloading of social migration, in view of the small and infrastructure? scattered subprojects. Any potential overloading of local infrastructure will be assessed while designing specific subprojects under Component B.  occupational health hazards ? This aspect will be assessed while due to fugitive dust, materials designing specific subprojects under handling, noise, or other Component B. If applicable, the process operations? subproject design will include safeguards against occupational health hazards due to fugitive dust, Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks materials handling, noise, or other process operations.  disruption of transit patterns, ? This aspect will be assessed while creation of noise and designing specific subprojects under congestion, and pedestrian Component B. If applicable, the hazards aggravated by heavy subproject design will include trucks? mitigation measures to address disruption of transit patterns, creation of noise and congestion, and pedestrian hazards aggravated by heavy trucks.  disease transmission from ? This aspect will be assessed while inadequate waste disposal? designing specific subprojects under Component B. If applicable, the subproject design will include safeguards against disease transmission from inadequate waste disposal.  impediments to movements of ? - This aspect will be assessed while people and animals? designing specific subprojects under Component B. Appropriate measures will be included in the design of the subprojects to address these issues.  disproportionate impacts on ? - The project will generally benefit the the poor, women and children, small land owners and growers, in Indigenous Peoples or other addition to providing employment vulnerable groups? opportunities for the local community. This aspect will be assessed while designing specific subprojects under Component B. No indigenous people are known to exist in the Province.  potential social conflicts Unlikely - This aspect will be assessed while arising from land tenure and designing specific subprojects under land use issues? Component B.  noise from construction and ? - This aspect will be assessed while plant equipment? designing specific subprojects under Component B. It will be ensured that the noise from subprojects’ construction and operation remains within acceptable limits.  soil pollution, polluted farm Possibly - The project interventions can runoff and groundwater, and potentially increase the usage of public health risks due to pesticides and fertilizers. excessive application of Appropriate awareness raising and fertilizers and pesticides? capacity building initiatives will be included in the project design to address the potential impacts.  risks to community health and Possibly This aspect will be assessed while Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks safety due to the transport, designing specific subprojects under storage, and use and/or Component B. If applicable, the disposal of materials such as subproject design will include explosives, fuel and other safeguards against risks to chemicals during construction community health and safety. and operation? C. Potential Social Impacts  Does the subproject require ? This aspect will be assessed while land acquisition for new designing specific subprojects under construction (e.g., processing Component B. center) or installment of new Land for subprojects will be equipment/facility (e.g., milk arranged either on voluntary chiller)? If yes, how is the land donation or commercial transaction obtained? (willing buyer – willing seller) basis, and it will be ensured that such transactions do not cause any involuntary resettlement.  [Private land] Will the ? This aspect will be assessed while construction or installation be designing specific subprojects under done on a private land? If yes, Component B. will the cost of construction or Complete documentation will be installation be shared between maintained for land procurement or the project and landowner? donation, including the percentage share in investment (between the project and the land owner), number of individuals (tenants, women, etc.) accessing the facility, etc.  [Purchased by a group of ? This aspect will be assessed while farmers] Will the private land designing specific subprojects under be obtained through land cost Component B. paid by the community Complete documentation will be through willing buyer-willing maintained for land procurement, seller arrangement? including the percentage share in investment (between the project and the farmers), number of farmers accessing the facility, etc.  [Private donation to a group of ? This aspect will be assessed while farmers] Will the land be designing specific subprojects under obtained through private Component B. voluntary donations, provided Complete documentation will be the donation will have minimal maintained for land donation livelihood impact on the including the percentage share in concerned person (less than 10 investment (between the project and percent)? the farmers), number of farmers accessing the facility, etc. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-6 Environmental and Social Management Framework 6.3 Assessment of Potential Impacts and Generic Mitigation The potentially negative impacts identified with the help of environmental screening discussed in Section 6.2 are assessed in the subsections below. The generic mitigation measures have also been provided here; additional measures may be added as a result of the subproject-specific environmental assessments to be carried out during the Project implementation (subproject-specific environmental assessments are further discussed in the next Chapter). 6.3.1 Subproject Siting (Land Use and Landform) The subprojects to be implemented under Component B may potentially cause changes in land use and land form, resulting in the following negative impacts:  disputes over land ownership, blocked access for people of the area,  encroachment into any sensitive habitat and/or protected areas, and  encroachment into any sites of archeological, cultural, historical, or religious significance. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the potential impacts associated with the subproject siting are given below.  Community consultations will be carried out before establishing the facility.  It will be ensured that the local routes are not blocked by such schemes.  It will be ensured that natural drainage paths are not blocked by the establishment of subprojects.  If trees are to be cut for any subprojects, the farmer/beneficiary will carry out compensatory plantation of appropriate indigenous tree species. Trees thus planted will be at least five times the number of trees felled for establishing the subproject.  No schemes should be located inside or in the immediate vicinity of any protected areas listed in Tables 4.9 and 4.10.  The subprojects will not be located in graveyards or shrines.  The ‘chance find’20 procedures will be included in the scheme agreements. 6.3.2 Land Donation/Purchase The subprojects to be implemented under Component B may need some land. The following procedures will be followed for obtaining this land:  The subprojects will be established preferably on the land owned by the beneficiary. It will be ensured that no involuntary resettlement takes place for these subprojects.  Land for subprojects will be arranged either on voluntary donation or commercial transaction (willing buyer – willing seller) basis, and it will be ensured that such transactions do not cause any involuntary resettlement. 20 ‘Chance find’ procedure: In case any artifact or site of archeological, cultural, historical, or religious significance are discovered during activities such as excavation of water ponds, the works will be stopped, and the Archeological Department will be informed. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-7 Environmental and Social Management Framework  Complete documentation will be maintained for land procurement or donation, including the percentage share in investment (between the project and the land owner), and number of individuals (tenants, women, etc.) accessing the facility.  Community consultations will be carried out before establishing the facility. 6.3.3 Ecological Disturbances and Loss of Precious Ecological Values The subprojects under Component B if established in or near sensitive habitats such as protected areas listed in Tables 4.9 and 4.10 can potentially cause ecological disturbances. This could be caused by changes in land form and habitat, habitat fragmentation, blockage of migration paths, water consumption and contamination. Similarly, the subprojects can potentially cause loss of precious ecological assets, if they are inappropriately located and encroach into forests/swamplands or historical/cultural buildings/areas, disrupt hydrology of natural waterways (including natural drainage particularly in southern Sindh where blockage of natural drainage is a serious issue), regional flooding, and drainage hazards. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures described in Section 6.3.1 above will address the potential issues associated with the ecological disturbance and loss of precious ecological values. Training shall be provided to internal and external stakeholders in the specific location and significance of the protected areas and in how it could be ensured to avoid location of project activities in sensitive or critical habitats. 6.3.4 Soil and Water Contamination, and Degradation of Water Bodies caused by Discharge of Wastes The facilities to be established under the value chain and post-harvest loss management subprojects may generate a wide range of waste effluents. These could include waste water from washing and cleaning operations, oils and oily water generated by machinery maintenance, leaked/spilled fuels and oils, waste effluent discharges from the processing operation, animal wastes, and others. Uncontrolled discharges of these wastes and other effluents can potentially contaminate the soil, pollute the nearby water bodies and degrade their value for communities and ecology. Depending upon their constituents and extent, these discharges can potentially affect the soil fertility, pollute the drinking water sources, contaminate irrigation water thus affecting the crops, and degrade wetlands thus negatively affecting the ecology of the area including natural flora and fauna. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the soil and water contamination and degradation of water bodies are listed below.  The subprojects will be designed employing technologies that are least polluting  Fuel, oil and other chemicals will be handled and stored at the subproject facilities following the standard operating procedures, avoiding any leakage and spillage, and minimizing contamination of soil and water.  Appropriate effluent treatment arrangements will be included in the design of the subprojects.  Settling/retaining tanks will be constructed at the site as appropriate to minimize contaminants leaving the subproject facilities. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-8 Environmental and Social Management Framework  Recycling of waste effluents will be carried out as far as possible and practical.  It will be ensured that the waste effluents leaving the facility comply with the NEQS (see Section 2.1.3).  It will be ensured that the wastes are not released into any drinking water source, cultivation fields, or critical habitat.  Waste effluents will be released in irrigation channels only if they do not negatively affect the irrigation water quality. 6.3.5 Aggravation of Solid Waste Problems The facilities to be established under the value chain and post-harvest loss management subprojects may potentially generate a wide range of solid wastes, including sludge produced by washing and cleaning operations, waste/rotten agriculture produce, animal secreta, wastage from packing operations, workshop wastes, and others. Inappropriate disposal of these wastes can potentially aggravate the solid waste management problems in the area, while also contaminating soil and water. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the solid waste management issues are listed below.  The subprojects will be designed employing technologies that minimize generation of solid wastes  Use of non-biodegradable substances (e.g. for packaging) will be minimized.  Recycling of solid waste will be carried out as far as possible and practical.  Technologies such as biogas will be promoted to gainfully dispose animal dung.  Composting of biodegradable waste will be considered and adopted if practicable.  Disposal of solid waste will be carried out in a manner that does not negatively affect the drinking water sources, cultivation fields, irrigation channels, natural drainage paths, wetlands and critical habitat, the existing waste management system in the area, local routes, and general aesthetic value of the area. 6.3.6 Public Health Issues The facilities to be established under the value chain and post-harvest loss management subprojects may potentially cause public health issues. These issues may be related to waste discharges discussed in Sections 6.3.4 and 6.3.5 above, and gaseous emissions from the subprojects. These waste discharges and emissions can potentially cause water borne disease, heavy metal poisoning, respiratory disorders, and other similar ailments. In addition, foul odor and noise from these subprojects can potentially cause public nuisance. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the public health issues are listed below.  Mitigation measures listed under Sections 6.3.4 and 6.3.5 will address the public health issues associated with waste effluents and solid waste from the subproject facilities. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-9 Environmental and Social Management Framework  It will be ensured that the emissions and noise from the subproject facilities comply with NEQS and other relevant standards (e.g. WHO guidelines where NEQS do not prescribe standards).  Community consultations will be carried out as part of the subproject design activities.  Grievance redress mechanism will be established in the area to address the public complaints regarding issues such as noise and odor from the subproject facilities. 6.3.7 Construction related Issues The construction of subproject facilities can potentially cause short-term environmental and social issues such as soil erosion, soil and water contamination, noise and air pollution, and safety hazards for the nearby population. These issues in turn can potentially affect the cultivation fields, soil fertility, human health, ecological degradation, and public nuisance. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the construction-related issues are listed below.  The design of the facility and appropriate construction planning will ensure that construction activities do not cause any soil erosion or degradation. Spoils and excess soil if generated will be disposed appropriately. Borrow areas will be dressed to minimize safety hazards and soil erosion.  Untreated waste effluents from the construction sites will not be released to drinking water sources, cultivation fields, irrigation channels, and critical habitats. Appropriate effluent treatment arrangements such as settling tanks will be made at the site. It will be ensured that the effluents comply with NEQS.  Construction machinery, generators, and vehicles will be kept in good working condition, minimizing exhaust emissions. It will be ensured that exhausts from these equipment and vehicles comply with relevant NEQS.  It will be ensured that noise generated from the construction activities comply with relevant NEQS.  All safety precautions will be taken to address safety hazards for the nearby community. These precautions may include safety/warning signage, safety barrier around the construction site, and safe driving practices.  Community consultations will be carried out before commencing the construction activities, informing the nearby population regarding the construction activities and possible impacts such as noise and additional vehicular traffic.  Grievance redress mechanism (GRM) will be established in the area to address the public complaints regarding issues such as noise from the construction sites.  WB Group’s Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines (attached at the end of this document) will be implemented  The construction contracts will include appropriate clauses to protect environment and public health. The present ESMF will be included in the bidding document. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-10 Environmental and Social Management Framework 6.3.8 Environmental Degradation from Intensification of Agricultural Land Use Development of value chains under Component B of the Project may potentially cause intensification of cultivation, thus increasing the usage of crop inputs including irrigation water, fertilizers, pesticides, and herbicides. This in turn can potentially cause water shortage as well as soil and water contamination, having negative impacts on people, as well as on natural flora and fauna. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the environmental degradation associated with agriculture intensification are listed below.  Judicious use of the irrigation water, chemical inputs and use of alternate techniques (such as integrated pest management, using disease-resistant seeds, and mulching) will be promoted through awareness raising and capacity building initiatives which are included in the Component A of the proposed project.  Adoption of integrated pest management (IPM) techniques will be promoted through capacity building programs. IPMP has been prepared and shall be implemented.  Crop rotation practices will be promoted to avoid soil fertility degradation.  The capacity building program will also include safe handling of hazardous substances such as pesticides.  High efficiency irrigation technologies (e.g. drip irrigation, tunnel farming) will be promoted to conserve already scarce irrigation water. 6.3.9 Health and Safety Hazards for the Community Transportation, storage, and use and/or disposal of materials such as explosives, fuel and other chemicals during construction and operation pose health and safety risks for the nearby community. Similarly, accidental release of potentially hazardous substances such as fuels, solvents, acidic and alkaline materials from the subproject facilities may potentially pose health and safety hazards for the nearby population. Such activities/releases may contaminate the drinking water source and other water bodies, damage crops, degrade the soil, contaminate ambient air, and cause explosion and fire thus posing serious risks to life, health, and property of the nearby population. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the risks associated with accidental releases from the subproject facilities are listed below.  The design of the facilities will comply with all relevant and applicable technical standards and safety codes.  Standard operating procedures will be developed and implemented at each facility.  Containment arrangements will be made for fuels and oils stored at the facility.  Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous substance will be made available at each facility.  Emergency response plans will be prepared for each facility as appropriate. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-11 Environmental and Social Management Framework  The facility workers will be appropriately trained to operate the facility and handle emergency situation.  WB Group’s EHS Guidelines will be implemented as appropriate. 6.3.10 Occupational Health and Safety Hazards Operation and maintenance of the subproject facilities may potentially cause occupational health and safety (OHS) risks for the workers. These risks may be associated with fugitive dust and gaseous emissions, fire and explosion, exposure to noise, electric shock, working on heights, body injuries caused by process equipment, working in confined spaces, and other similar aspects. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the OHS risks at the subproject facilities are listed below.  The design of the facilities will comply with all relevant and applicable technical standards and safety codes to minimize occupational health and safety risks.  Standard operating procedures will be developed and implemented at each facility. These procedures will address the OHS aspects as well.  The facility workers will be appropriately trained in OHS aspects.  Use of appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) will be mandatory at the facility.  WB Group’s EHS Guidelines will be implemented as appropriate. 6.3.11 Vehicular Traffic Vehicular traffic during facility construction and operation may potentially cause congestion on the local routes, generate noise, and pose safety hazards for the local population particularly for children and elderly people. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the vehicular traffic associated with the subproject facilities are listed below.  Depending upon the traffic volume and the condition/nature of local routes, a traffic management plan may need to be prepared.  Community consultations will be carried out before the facility establishment.  Community liaison will be maintained.  Safety signage will be erected at appropriate places.  Safe driving practices will be promoted among the drivers.  GRM will be put in place. 6.3.12 Impacts on Women, Children, and Vulnerable Groups The project will generally benefit the small land owners and growers, in addition to providing employment opportunities for the local community. The interventions under Component B are unlikely to negatively affect vulnerable groups such as poor, women and children. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-12 Environmental and Social Management Framework Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the potential impacts on women, children and vulnerable groups are listed below.  No discrimination with respect to religion, caste, gender, or association with any social group will be practiced during construction and operation of the facilities.  It will be ensured that the subprojects do not have any negative impacts on women, children and vulnerable groups. 6.3.13 Influx of Workers and Employment Construction as well as operation and maintenance of the value chain and post-harvest loss reduction facilities will generate employment and contracting/service delivery opportunities. This can potentially cause influx of workers, contractors, and service provides from outside the province resulting into possible conflicts and tension with the local communities. Mitigation Measures The generic mitigation measures to address the influx of workers and service providers are listed below.  Preference will be given to the local contractors, workers, and laborers.  The capacity building component of the project will include trainings for operation and maintenance of the subproject facilities for supply chains and post-harvest loss control.  GRM will be put in place to amicably resolve any disputes or conflicts related to employment and service provision. 6.3.14 Impacts from Projects Emerging from Feasibility Studies Under component A3 the project will finance the preparation of studies on additional crop and livestock value chains, in addition to sub-sectors included in the current project including, but not limited to, fisheries and aquaculture, meat production and marketing, seed production and food storage, etc. The studies will feed into discussions for future project preparation. The approval of topics to study will be accorded by the Project Steering Committee will as per pre-determined criteria with which to appraise study proposals. The Office of the Project Coordinator will manage the implementation and dissemination feasibility studies. These studies could lead to activities and projects which, though not funded by the project may have additional environmental or social impacts. Mitigation Measures  All projects emerging from the feasibility studies conducted under this project shall have to comply with World Bank safeguards policies and this will be reflected in the development of TORs for the feasibility studies for the projects. 6.4 Cumulative Impacts The environmental and or social impacts of individual subprojects may be quite insignificant, however cumulative impacts of a cluster of small subprojects may be quite Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-13 Environmental and Social Management Framework significant. This aspect will be considered while assessing the impacts of an individual subproject. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 6-14 Environmental and Social Management Framework 7. Environmental and Social Management Framework This Chapter presents the Environmental and Social Management Framework (ESMF) for the proposed project. 7.1 Subproject Screening As described in Section 1.3.2, exact nature, extent and location of the subprojects for value chains and post-harvest loss control under Component B of the Project are not known at this stage. As a consequence, a site- and subproject-specific environmental and social assessment has not been carried out during the present study, and a framework approach has been adopted instead. In line with this approach, a generic environmental and social assessment, discussed in Chapter 6, has been carried out. During the project implementation, when the exact nature, type, size, and location of individual subprojects are known, a site-specific environmental and social screening will need to be carried out for each subproject to be considered under the SAGP. The project will not finance subprojects with potentially significant negative environmental and or social impacts (eg. inside any environmentally and or social critical areas or protected areas; involving large quantities of waste disposal; large scale or linear infrastructural works; substantial health and safety risks; potential impacts likely to extend beyond the immediate vicinity of the site). On the basis of this screening, the nature and extent of the subproject-specific environmental and social assessment will be determined; see Table 7.1 below for the screening criteria. Table 7.1: Screening Criteria Subproject Types Assessment Needs Simple subprojects with minimal Environmental Assessment with the help of environmental and or social impacts checklist provided in Annex E (typically without involving any construction and waste disposal; subprojects such as Herd Disease Reporting System). Subprojects with some potentially negative Environmental Assessment with the help of environmental and or social impacts suggested methodology provided in (outside any environmentally and or social Annex F and preparation of an ESMP critical areas or protected areas; involving some construction and waste disposal activities; impacts likely to be confined to the immediate vicinity; subprojects such as Herd Health Screening; Efficient Utilization of Excess Animals; Processing and Packaging Facility). The above described checklists and ESMPs will be sent to WB for review and clearance. No site work of any subproject will be initiated unless its filled checklist or ESMP has been cleared by the Bank. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework ESMP for Artificial Insemination Training Center An ESMP has been prepared for the proposed Artificial Insemination Training Center to be established in the Agriculture University at Tando Jam (see Annex G). This ESMP, though having some gaps thus needing to be completed during the project implementation, will be used as a sample and template for such Plans to be prepared for various interventions under Component B. 7.2 Institutional Arrangements The Project Director of Agriculture PMU and Project Manager of Livestock PMU will be overall responsible for the environmental performance of their respective project components. They will also ensure effective ESMF implementation throughout the project. In each PMU, an appropriate officer will be designated as ESMF Focal Point (EFP) who will be responsible for ESMF implementation for project activities under his/her respective department. Specifically, the EFPs will ensure the preparation and implementation of subproject-specific ESMPs, manage ESMF trainings, carry out environmental monitoring, and prepare monthly and quarterly ESMF reports. The project will also engage an Environment Specialist and a Social Specialist on a short- term contract basis to assist PMUs in overall ESMF implementation particularly in preparing ESMPs, carrying out monitoring, and conducting trainings. 7.3 Mitigation Plans The generic mitigation plan prepared on the basis of impact assessment discussed in the previous Chapter is presented in Table 7.2. In addition, mitigation plans for the types of subprojects known at this stage are presented in Tables 7.3 to 7.9. The subproject- specific mitigation plans will be implemented in combination with the generic mitigation plan. These mitigation plans will be expanded if needed and finalized once the subproject location is known. These plans will also be included in the subproject ESMPs. The relevant mitigation plans and also the site-specific ESMP will be included in the design of each subproject, and included in the bidding documents in case contracting is involved. Appropriate environmental and social aspects will also be incorporated in the feasibility studies to be conducted under project component A3 (see Section 3.2). Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 7.2: Generic Mitigation Plan Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring 1 Subproject Siting  The subprojects will be established on the land owned by the beneficiary. It PIU and EFPs During design (Land Use, will be ensured that no involuntary resettlement takes place for these subproject stage of Landform, and subprojects. Checklist and agreement deed format in Annex H and design subproject Land Take); Annex I will be used for this purpose. team  Community consultations will be carried out before establishing the facility. Ecological Disturbances and  It will be ensured that the local routes are not blocked by such schemes. Loss of Precious  It will be ensured that natural drainage paths are not blocked by the Ecological Values establishment of subprojects.  If trees are to be cut for any subprojects, the farmer/beneficiary will carry out compensatory plantation of appropriate indigenous tree species. Trees thus planted will be at least five times the number of trees felled for establishing the subproject.  No schemes will be located inside or in immediate vicinity of any protected areas listed in Tables 4.9 and 4.10.  The subprojects will not be located in graveyards or shrines.  The ‘chance find’21 procedures will be included in the scheme agreements.  Use checkilist in Annex J for scheme location. 2 Soil and Water  The subprojects will be designed employing technologies that are least PIU and EFPs During design Contamination, and polluting subproject and O&M Degradation of design stages of  Fuel, oil and other chemicals will be handled and stored at the subproject Water Bodies team subproject caused by facilities following the standard operating procedures, avoiding any leakage 21 ‘Chance find’ procedure: In case any artifact or site of archeological, cultural, historical, or religious significance are d iscovered during activities such as excavation of water ponds, the works will be stopped, and the Archeological Department will be informed. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring Discharge of and spillage, and minimizing contamination of soil and water. Wastes  Appropriate effluent treatment arrangements will be included in the design of the subprojects.  Settling/retaining tanks will be constructed at the site as appropriate to minimize contaminants leaving the subproject facilities.  Recycling of waste effluents will be carried out as far as possible and practical.  It will be ensured that the waste effluents leaving the facility comply with the NEQS (see Section 2.1.3).  It will be ensured that the wastes are not released into any drinking water source, cultivation fields, or critical habitat.  Waste effluents will be released in irrigation channels only if they do not negatively affect the irrigation water quality. 3 Aggravation of  The subprojects will be designed employing technologies that minimize PIU and EFPs During design Solid Waste generation of solid wastes subproject and O&M Problems design stages of  Use of non-biodegradable substances (e.g. for packaging) will be team; Sub- subproject minimized. project  Recycling of solid waste will be carried out as far as possible and practical. owners  Technologies such as biogas will be promoted to gainfully dispose animal dung.  Composting of biodegradable waste will be considered and adopted if practicable.  Disposal of solid waste will be carried out in a manner that does not negatively affect the drinking water sources, cultivation fields, irrigation channels, natural drainage paths, wetlands and critical habitat, the existing Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring waste management system in the area, local routes, and general aesthetic value of the area. 4 Public Health  It will be ensured that the emissions and noise from the subproject facilities Sub-project EFPs During design Issues comply with NEQS and other relevant standards (e.g. WHO guidelines design and O&M where NEQS do not prescribe standards). team; Sub- stages of project subproject  Community consultations will be carried out as part of the subproject owners design activities.  Grievance redress mechanism will be established in the area to address the public complaints regarding issues such as noise and odor from the subproject facilities. 5 Construction  The design of the facility and appropriate construction planning will ensure Contractor PIUs and Construction related Issues that construction activities do not cause any soil erosion or degradation. EFPs phase  Spoils and excess soil if generated will be disposed appropriately.  Borrow areas will be dressed to minimize safety hazards and soil erosion.  Untreated waste effluents from the construction sites will not be released to drinking water sources, cultivation fields, irrigation channels, and critical habitats. Appropriate effluent treatment arrangements such as settling tanks will be made at the site. It will be ensured that the effluents comply with NEQS.  Construction machinery, generators, and vehicles will be kept in good working condition, minimizing exhaust emissions. It will be ensured that exhausts from these equipment and vehicles comply with relevant NEQS.  It will be ensured that noise generated from the construction activities comply with relevant NEQS.  All safety precautions will be taken to address safety hazards for the nearby Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring community. These precautions may include safety/warning signage, safety barrier around the construction site, and safe driving practices.  Community consultations will be carried out before commencing the construction activities, informing the nearby population regarding the construction activities and possible impacts such as noise and additional vehicular traffic.  Grievance redress mechanism (GRM) will be established in the area to address the public complaints regarding issues such as noise from the construction sites.  WB Group’s Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines (attached at the end of this document) will be implemented  The construction contracts will include appropriate clauses to protect environment and public health. The present ESMF will be included in the bidding document.  The generic safeguards requirements for construction works are presented in Annex K. 6 Environmental  Judicious use of the irrigation water, chemical inputs and use of alternate Sub-project PIUs and O&M phase Degradation from techniques (such as integrated pest management, using disease-resistant owners EFPs Intensification of seeds, and mulching) will be promoted through awareness raising and Agricultural Land capacity building initiatives which are included in the Component A of the Use proposed project.  Adoption of IPM techniques will be promoted through capacity building programs.  Crop rotation practices will be promoted to avoid soil fertility degradation.  The capacity building program will also include safe handling of hazardous Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-6 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring substances such as pesticides.  High efficiency irrigation technologies (eg, drip irrigation, tunnel farming) will be promoted to conserve already scarce irrigation water. 7 Health and Safety  The design of the facilities will comply with all relevant and applicable Sub-project EFPs During design Hazards for the technical standards and safety codes. design and O&M Community team; Sub- stages of  Standard operating procedures will be developed and implemented at each project subproject facility. owners  Containment arrangements will be made for fuels and oils stored at the facility.  Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each hazardous substance will be made available at each facility.  Emergency response plans will be prepared for each facility as appropriate.  The facility workers will be appropriately trained to operate the facility and handle emergency situation.  WB Group’s EHS Guidelines will be implemented as appropriate. 8 Occupational  Sub-project The design of the facilities will comply with all relevant and applicable EFPs During design Health and Safety technical standards and safety codes to minimize occupational health anddesign and O&M Hazards safety risks. team; Sub- stages of project subproject  Standard operating procedures will be developed and implemented at each owners facility. These procedures will address the OHS aspects as well.  Fire alarm and fire fighting arrangements will be provided, as appropriate  The facility workers will be appropriately trained in OHS aspects.  Use of appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) will be mandatory at the facility. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-7 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring  WB Group’s EHS Guidelines will be implemented as appropriate. 9 Vehicular Traffic  Depending upon the traffic volume and the condition/nature of local routes, Contractor EFPs During a traffic management plan may need to be prepared. construction and O&M  Community consultations will be carried out before the facility Sub-project owners stages of establishment. subproject  Community liaison will be maintained.  Safety signage will be erected at appropriate places.  Safe driving practices will be promoted among the drivers.  GRM will be put in place. 10 Impacts on  No discrimination with respect to religion, caste, gender, or association Contractor EFPs During Women, Children, with any social group will be practiced during construction and operation of construction and Vulnerable the facilities. Sub-project and O&M Groups stages of  It will be ensured that the subprojects do not have any negative impacts on owners subproject women, children and vulnerable groups. 11 Influx of Workers  Preference will be given to the local contractors, workers, and laborers. Contractor EFPs During and Employment  The capacity building component of the project will include trainings for construction Sub-project and O&M operation and maintenance of the subproject facilities for supply chains and owners stages of post-harvest loss control. subproject  GRM will be put in place to amicably resolve any disputes or conflicts related to employment and service provision. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-8 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 7.3: Mitigation Plan for Water Tanks and Ponds Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring 1 Land requirement Land if required for the subproject will be donated by the community on PIU and EFPs During design voluntary basis. Checklist and agreement deed format in Annex H and Annex I subproject stage of will be used for this purpose. design subproject team 2 Water quality and Carrying out laboratory analysis to ensure that that water complies with the PIU, EFPs During design availability NEQS for drinking water – if the water is to be used for drinking purposes. subproject and Protecting the water tanks and ponds from contaminants design construction Protective fencing for tanks and ponds to minimize safety hazards team and stages of contractor subproject 3 Location and Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, PIU, EFPs During design design of the graveyards and cultural heritage sites subproject and subproject Ensuring no effect on the water rights of others design construction Use checkilist in Annex J for subproject location team and stages of Ensuring equitable distribution of subproject benefits through community contractor subproject participation Avoiding blockage of natural drainage. Provide alternates as appropriate after carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community Carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring that the subproject is socially acceptable/suitable to women. Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain documentary and photographic record of each tree felled, and carry out compensatory tree plantation (five plants for every tree felled). No subproject will be located inside or in immediate vicinity of any protected areas listed in Tables 4.9 and 4.10. 4 Construction phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during Contractor EFPs During construction activities to avoid/minimize: soil erosion and contamination; construction release of polluted water/effluents; excessive noise generation near the stage of communities; damage to crops and cultivated fields; tree cutting, damage to Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-9 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring public infrastructure (damaged infrastructure to be restored/repaired); damage subproject to graveyards and other cultural heritage sites; and safety/health hazards for the community. The site will be restored and cleared of all debris/scrap/left over construction material after completion of construction works. The generic safeguards requirements for construction works are presented in Annex K. Appropriately disposing the surplus soil and left-over construction materials, in consultation with community (e.g., in existing ditches/depressions, proper contouring) 5 O&M phase Taking appropriate steps against mosquito breeding and educating the Subproject EFPs During O&M communities in preventive & curative measures against malaria/dengue. owner / stage of Educating the community regarding the importance and methods of cleaning community subproject the ponds and tanks. Educating farmers on modern irrigation (e.g., sprinkler system) and cultivation (e.g., bed and furrow) practices, water conservation, safe use of farm inputs, integrated pest management, disease control, and other related aspects. Table 7.4: Mitigation Plan for Land Development and Leveling Schemes Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring 1 Land requirement Land if required for the subproject will be donated by the community on PIU and EFPs During design voluntary basis. Checklist and agreement deed format in Annex H and Annex I subproject stage of will be used for this purpose. design subproject team 2 Location and Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, PIU, EFPs During design design of the graveyards and cultural heritage sites subproject and subproject Minimize the possibility of soil erosion by employing appropriate techniques Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-10 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring such as check-dams, embankments, and turfing. design construction Use checkilist in Annex J for scheme location team and stages of Ensuring equitable distribution of subproject benefits through community contractor subproject participation Avoiding blockage of natural drainage. Provide alternates as appropriate After carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring that the scheme is socially acceptable and suitable to women. Ensuring no damage to cultural heritage sites and graveyards. Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain documentary and photographic record of each tree felled, and carry out compensatory tree plantation (five plants for every tree felled). Avoid damage to public infrastructure. Repair/restore damaged caused by the scheme. Minimize noise generation near the communities. No subproject will be located inside or in immediate vicinity of any protected areas listed in Tables 4.9 and 4.10. 3 O&M phase Educating farmers on modern irrigation (e.g., sprinkler system) and cultivation Subproject EFPs During O&M (e.g., bed and furrow) practices, water conservation, safe use of farm inputs, owner / phase integrated pest management, disease control, and other related aspects. community Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-11 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 7.5: Mitigation Plan for Storage, and Packing/Processing Facilities Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring 1 Land requirement Land if required for the subproject will be donated by the community on PIU and EFPs During design voluntary basis. Checklist and agreement deed format in Annex H and Annex I subproject stage of will be used for this purpose. design subproject team 2 Location and Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, PIU and EFPs During design design of the graveyards and cultural heritage sites Design and subproject Minimize the possibility of soil erosion by employing appropriate techniques team; construction such as check-dams, embankments, and turfing. contractor stages of Use checkilist in Annex J for scheme location subproject Ensuring equitable distribution of subproject benefits through community participation Avoiding blockage of natural drainage. Provide alternates as appropriate After carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring that the scheme is socially acceptable and suitable to women. Ensuring no damage to cultural heritage sites and graveyards. Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain documentary and photographic record of each tree felled, and carry out compensatory tree plantation (five plants for every tree felled). Avoid damage to public infrastructure. Repair/restore damaged caused by the scheme. Minimize noise generation near the communities. No subproject will be located inside or in immediate vicinity of any protected areas listed in Tables 4.9 and 4.10. 3 Construction phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during Contractor EFPs During construction activities to avoid/minimize: soil erosion and contamination; construction release of polluted water/effluents; excessive noise generation near the stage of communities; damage to crops and cultivated fields; tree cutting, damage to subproject public infrastructure (damaged infrastructure to be restored/repaired); damage Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-12 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring to graveyards and other cultural heritage sites; and safety/health hazards for the community. The site will be restored and cleared of all debris/scrap/left over construction material after completion of construction works. The generic safeguards requirements for construction works are presented in Annex K. Appropriately disposing the surplus soil and left-over construction materials, in consultation with community (e.g., in existing ditches/depressions, proper contouring) Appropriately disposing the surplus soil, in consultation with community (e.g., in existing ditches/depressions, proper contouring) 4 O&M Phase Educating the subproject owners about safe waste management and disposal. subproject EFPs During O&M Educating the subproject owners about safe and efficient operation of the owners / phase facility managers Educating the subproject owners about standard HSE procedures and precautions. Table 7.6: Mitigation Plan for Rural Roads, Culverts and Bridges Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring 1 Land requirement Land if required for the subproject will be donated by the community on PIU and EFPs During design voluntary basis. Checklist and agreement deed format in Annex H and Annex I subproject stage of will be used for this purpose. design subproject team 2 Road alignment Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, PIU and EFPs During design cultivation fields, graveyards and cultural heritage sites Design and Use checkilist in Annex J for scheme location team; construction Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community stages of Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-13 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring participation contractor subproject Avoiding blockage of natural drainage. Provide alternates as appropriate After carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring that the scheme is socially acceptable and suitable for women. Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain documentary and photographic record of each tree felled, and carry out compensatory tree plantation (five plants for every tree felled). No subproject will be located inside or in immediate vicinity of any protected areas listed in Tables 4.9 and 4.10. 3 Construction phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during Contractor EFPs During construction activities to avoid/minimize: soil erosion and contamination; construction release of polluted water/effluents; excessive noise generation near the stage of communities; damage to crops and cultivated fields; tree cutting, damage to subproject public infrastructure (damaged infrastructure to be restored/repaired); damage to graveyards and other cultural heritage sites; and safety/health hazards for the community. The site will be restored and cleared of all debris/scrap/left over construction material after completion of construction works. The generic safeguards requirements for construction works are presented in Annex K. Appropriately disposing the surplus soil and left-over construction materials, in consultation with community (e.g., in existing ditches/depressions, proper contouring) 4 O&M Phase Installing warning signs along the road. subproject EFPs During O&M Educating the community for appropriate precautionary measures against safety owners / phase hazards associated with vehicular traffic. community Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-14 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 7.7: Mitigation Plan for Livestock Schemes Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring 1 Land requirement Land if required for the subproject will be donated by the community on PIU and EFPs During design voluntary basis. Checklist and agreement deed format in Annex H and Annex I subproject stage of will be used for this purpose. design subproject team 2 Location of Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, PIU and EFPs During design subproject cultivation fields, graveyards and cultural heritage sites Design and Use checkilist in Annex J for scheme location team; construction Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community contractor stages of participation subproject Avoiding blockage of natural drainage. Provide alternates as appropriate After carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring that the scheme is socially acceptable and suitable for women. Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain documentary and photographic record of each tree felled, and carry out compensatory tree plantation (five plants for every tree felled). No subproject will be located inside or in immediate vicinity of any protected areas listed in Tables 4.9 and 4.10. 3 Construction phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during Contractor EFPs During construction activities to avoid/minimize: soil erosion and contamination; construction release of polluted water/effluents; excessive noise generation near the stage of communities; damage to crops and cultivated fields; tree cutting, damage to subproject public infrastructure (damaged infrastructure to be restored/repaired); damage to graveyards and other cultural heritage sites; and safety/health hazards for the community. The site will be restored and cleared of all debris/scrap/left over construction material after completion of construction works. The generic safeguards requirements for construction works are presented in Annex K. Appropriately disposing the surplus soil and left-over construction materials, in Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-15 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring consultation with community (e.g., in existing ditches/depressions, proper contouring) 4 O&M Phase Educating the subproject owner/community for proper O&M of the facility, subproject EFPs During O&M safe hygiene practices, and safe waste disposal. owners / phase Educating the farm workers on bio-security issues and safe vaccination managers practices. Table 7.8: Mitigation Plan for Establishing Training Centers Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring 1 Land requirement Land if required for the subproject will be donated by the community on PIU and EFPs During design voluntary basis. Checklist and agreement deed format in Annex H and Annex I subproject stage of will be used for this purpose. design subproject team 2 Location of Ensuring no blocked access, avoiding damage to crops, cultivation fields, PIU and EFPs During design subproject cultivation fields, graveyards and cultural heritage sites Design and Use checkilist in Annex J for scheme location team; construction Ensuring equitable distribution of scheme benefits through community contractor stages of participation subproject Avoiding blockage of natural drainage. Provide alternates as appropriate After carrying out consultation with the beneficiary community, including women - ensuring that the scheme is socially acceptable and suitable for women. Minimizing tree felling requirements to the extent possible. If unavoidable, maintain documentary and photographic record of each tree felled, and carry out compensatory tree plantation (five plants for every tree felled). Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-16 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring No subproject will be located inside or in immediate vicinity of any protected areas listed in Tables 4.9 and 4.10. 3 Construction phase Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during Contractor EFPs During construction activities to avoid/minimize: soil erosion and contamination; construction release of polluted water/effluents; excessive noise generation near the stage of communities; damage to crops and cultivated fields; tree cutting, damage to subproject public infrastructure (damaged infrastructure to be restored/repaired); damage to graveyards and other cultural heritage sites; and safety/health hazards for the community. The site will be restored and cleared of all debris/scrap/left over construction material after completion of construction works. The generic safeguards requirements for construction works are presented in Annex K. Appropriately disposing the surplus soil and left-over construction materials , in consultation with community (e.g., in existing ditches/depressions, proper contouring) 4 O&M Phase Provision of toilets with appropriate sewage disposal (such as septic tank and Facility EFPs During O&M soaking pit); Provision of safe drinking water owners / phase Awareness raising for environmental care, personal hygiene and cleanliness. managers Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-17 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 7.9: Mitigation Plan for Facility Rehabilitation Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring 1 Rehabilitation Employing good engineering/construction practices and due diligence during Contractor EFPs During works construction/rehabilitation activities to avoid/minimize: soil erosion and rehabilitation contamination; release of polluted water/effluents; excessive noise generation phase near the communities; damage to crops and cultivated fields; tree cutting, damage to public infrastructure (damaged infrastructure to be restored/repaired); damage to graveyards and other cultural heritage sites; and safety/health hazards for the community. The site will be restored and cleared of all debris/scrap/left over construction material after completion of construction works. The generic safeguards requirements for construction works are presented in Annex K. Appropriately disposing the surplus soil and debris, in consultation with community (e.g., in existing ditches/depressions, proper contouring) 2 O&M Phase Provision of toilets with appropriate sewage disposal (such as septic tank and Facility EFPs During O&M soaking pit); Provision of safe drinking water owners / phase Awareness raising for environmental care, personal hygiene and cleanliness. managers Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-18 Environmental and Social Management Framework 7.4 Monitoring ESMF monitoring is carried out to ensure that the mitigation plans are regularly and effectively implemented. It will be carried out at three levels. At the PMU level, the EFPs with the help of environment and social specialists will carry out ESMF monitoring to ensure that the mitigation plans are being effectively implemented, and will conduct field visits on a regular basis. At the field level, more frequent ESMF monitoring will be carried out by the PIU staff, under the guidance and supervision of EFPs and Environment Specialist. Monitoring checklists will be prepared on the basis of the mitigation plans (Tables 7.2 to 7.9) and the subproject-specific mitigation plans included in the ESMPs. Finally, the project will engage specialists/firms to conduct external monitoring as third party validation on an annual basis. 7.5 Capacity Building The objectives of the environmental and social trainings include providing basic knowledge and information on the key environmental and social issues associated with the proposed interventions to the key project personnel including the EFPs, other PMU staff, PIUs, and project beneficiaries. The training plan is presented in Table 7.10. The EFPs will be responsible for the implementation of this plan, while the trainings will be conducted by the environment specialist and social specialist. At the subproject sites, the contractors will be responsible to provide such trainings to their construction staff and workers. Table 7.10: Environmental and Social Training Plan Description Aspects to be Covered Participants Responsibility Frequency Environmental Environmental and social PMU staff, EFPs with the At the start of and social awareness; EFPs, PIU assistance of the project; trainings Key environmental and staff Environment Afterwards as social issues associated Specialist and required with the project and Social subprojects Specialist ESMF findings; Subproject-specific ESMPs and their components; ESMP implementation. ESMP implementation, Contractor Contractors On-going OHS aspects staff and workers Awareness Judicious use of fertilizers, Subproject EFPs, PIUs On-going raising pesticides and herbicides; beneficiaries Use of alternate techniques (such as IPM, using better seeds) to reduce the application of chemical inputs; Safe handling and Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-19 Environmental and Social Management Framework Description Aspects to be Covered Participants Responsibility Frequency application of pesticides and herbicides and use of protective gear; Waste disposal; Community mobilization 7.6 Grievance Redressal Mechanism 22 Any stakeholder (individual or organization) will be able to submit a grievance to the Project if s/he believes a practice is having a detrimental impact on their community, the environment, or on their quality of life. They may also submit comments and suggestions. Grievances could include:  Negative impacts on a person or a community (e.g. financial loss, physical harm, nuisance);  Project participation and inclusiveness (consultation process, beneficiary targeting, etc.);  Dangers to health and safety or the environment;  Failure of the contractors and their workers or drivers to comply with standards or legal obligations;  Harassment of any nature;  Criminal activity;  Improper conduct or unethical behavior;  Financial malpractice or impropriety or fraud; and  Attempts to conceal any of the above. Each PIU at district level will be required to have a formal logging system, which is linked to a relevant PMU at provincial level.23 The PIUs will log grievances that are received directly. A standard form will be developed by the PMUs to record complaints that are received from individuals or organizations by any means including site visits, telephone calls or written correspondence. In addition to the contact information and complaint details, the logging system needs to track the action taken by the Project staff to investigate the cause of the complaint and bring about corrective action if justified, as well as the date of reply to the complainant, with a file reference to any correspondence. The PIUs will log the receipt of a comment, formally acknowledge it, track progress on its investigation and resolution, and respond in writing with feedback to the aggrieved party. A response time of 10 working days, unless there are exceptional circumstances, would be the aim. 22 Adopted from Environmental and Social Assessment (prepared by Independent Consultants), Tarbela 4th Extension Hydropower Project, Water and Power Development Authority, December 2011. 23 There will be two PMUs at provincial level: one at the Department of Agriculture and another at the Department of Livestock. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-20 Environmental and Social Management Framework The PIUs will identify an appropriate investigation officer/team with the correct skills to review the issue raised and to decide whether it is Project related or whether it is more appropriately addressed by a relevant authority outside the Project. The PIUs will explain in writing (or where literacy is an issue, orally) the manner in which the review was carried out, the results of the review, any changes to activities that will be undertaken to address the grievance or how the issue is being managed to meet appropriate environmental and social management systems and requirements. The PIUs will report to relevant PMU on, at least quarterly basis. The PIUs and PMUs will summarize grievances in project performance reports, at least quarterly during implementation. 7.7 Reporting and Documentation Complete documentation will be maintained for the entire ESMF implementation process. This will include the following:  environmental and social monitoring checklists filled by the PIUs and EFPs,  visit reports with photographs prepared by the Environment Specialist,  training reports to be prepared by EFPs and Environment Specialist and Social Specialist,  quarterly reports on overall ESMF implementation of the project, to be prepared by the EFPs,  annual third party monitoring reports,  project completion report on overall ESMF implementation during the entire duration of the project – to be prepared by EFPs. The EFPs will be overall responsible for the above documentation and reporting. 7.8 ESMF Disclosure Requirements Once finalized, the ESMF as well the Urdu and Sindhi translations will be disclosed on the official websites of GoSindh, Agriculture Department, and Livestock Department. These documents will also be maintained in the PMUs and PIUs. In addition, the ESMF will be disclosed on WB InfoShop. 7.9 ESMF Implementation Budget The cost estimates to implement ESMF is provided in Table 7.11 below. This cost is included in the overall project cost. Additional costs could be included in the sub-project specific ESMPs. Table 7.11: ESMF Implementation Budget Description Cost (million PKR) Notes/basis Environment Specialist 2.88 Two weeks per month for first year and then one week per month for the remaining project duration; PKR 40,000 per week; 72 weeks Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-21 Environmental and Social Management Framework Description Cost (million PKR) Notes/basis Social Specialist 2.88 Two weeks per month for first year and then one week per month for the remaining project duration; PKR 40,000 per week; 72 weeks Third party validation 7.50 1.5 m per year × 5 years Capacity Building 14.4 Two trainings per month for first year and then one training per month for the remaining project duration; PKR 200,000 per training; 72 trainings ESMP Preparation 2.5 Expected ten @ PKR 500,000 each Development of HSE 5.0 1.0 m per crop Protocols and training Miscellaneous expenses 6.00 PKR 1.2 m per year × 5 years Total (for 5 years) 41.16 (about USD 400,000) Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project 7-22 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex A. National Environmental Quality Standards The National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS), promulgated under the PEPA 1997, specify the following standards:  Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in gaseous emissions from industrial sources,  Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in municipal and liquid industrial effluents discharged to inland waters, sewage treatment and sea (three separate set of numbers).  Maximum allowable emissions from motor vehicles.  Ambient air quality standards.  Drinking water standards  Noise standards. The above NEQS’s are presented in Tables A.1 to A.6 below. Only a few of these standards will be applicable to the gaseous emissions and liquid effluents discharged to the environment from the activities under the proposed project. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project A-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table A.1: Selected NEQS for Waste Effluents Parameter Unit Standards (maximum allowable limit) Temperature increase C <3 pH value (acidity/basicity) pH 6-9 5-day biochemical oxygen demand mg/l 80 (BOD) at 20 C Chemical oxygen demand (COD) mg/l 150 Total suspended solids mg/l 200 Total dissolved solids mg/l 3,500 Grease and oil mg/l 10 Phenolic compounds (as phenol) mg/l 0.1 Chloride (as Cl) mg/l 1,000 Fluoride (as F) mg/l 10 Sulfate (SO4) mg/l 600 Sulfide (S) mg/l 1.0 Ammonia (NH3) mg/l 40 Cadmium mg/l 0.1 Chromium (trivalent and hexavalent) mg/l 1.0 Copper mg/l 1.0 Lead mg/l 0.5 Mercury mg/l 0.01 Selenium mg/l 0.5 Nickel mg/l 1.0 Silver mg/l 1.0 Total toxic metals mg/l 2.0 Zinc mg/l 5 Arsenic mg/l 1.0 Barium mg/l 1.5 Iron mg/l 8.0 Manganese mg/l 1.5 Boron mg/l 6.0 Chlorine mg/l 1.0 Notes: 1. The standard assumes that dilution of 1:10 on discharge is available. That is, for each cubic meter of treated effluent, the recipient water body should have 10 m3 of water for dilution of this effluent. 2. Toxic metals include cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury, selenium, nickel and silver. The effluent should meet the individual standards for these metals as well as the standard for total toxic metal concentration. Source: Government of Pakistan (2000) (SRO 549 (I)/2000). Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project A-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table A.2: NEQS for Industrial Gaseous Emissions mg/Nm3 unless otherwise stated Standards Parameter Source of Emission (maximum allowable limit) Smoke Smoke opacity not to exceed 40% or 2 Ringlemann Scale or equivalent smoke number Particulate matter 1 (a) Boilers and furnaces: i. Oil fired 300 ii. Coal fired 500 iii. Cement Kilns 300 (b) Grinding, crushing, clinker 500 coolers and related processes, metallurgical processes, converters, blast furnaces and cupolas Hydrogen Chloride Any 400 Chlorine Any 150 Hydrogen fluoride Any 150 Hydrogen sulphide Any 10 Sulphur Oxides 2, 3 Sulfuric acid/Sulphonic acid plants 5,000 Other Plants except power Plants 1,700 operating on oil and coal Carbon Monoxide Any 800 Lead Any 50 Mercury Any 10 Cadmium Any 20 Arsenic Any 20 Copper Any 50 Antimony Any 20 Zinc Any 200 Oxides of Nitrogen 3 Nitric acid manufacturing unit 3,000 Other plants except power plants operating on oil or coal: i. Gas fired 400 ii. Oil fired 600 iii. Coal fired 1,200 Explanations: 1. Based on the assumption that the size of the particulate is 10 micron or more. 2. Based on 1% sulphur content in fuel oil. Higher content of sulphur will cause standards to be pro-rated. 3. In respect of emissions of sulphur dioxide and nitrogen oxides, the power plants operating on oil and coal as fuel shall in addition to NEQS specified above, comply with the standards provided separately. Source: Government of Pakistan (2000) (SRO 549 (I)/2000). Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project A-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table A.3: National Environmental Quality Standards for Ambient Air 24 Time- Concentration in Ambient Air Pollutants weighted Effective from Effective from Method of Measurement st st Average 1 July 2010 1 January 2013 3 3 Sulfur Annual 80 µg/m 80 µg/m Ultraviolet Fluorescence Dioxide Average* (SO2) 24 hours** 120 µg/m 3 120 µg/m 3 3 3 Oxides of Annual 40 µg/m 40 µg/m Gas Phase Chemiluminescence Nitrogen as Average* 3 3 (NO) 24 hours** 40 µg/m 40 µg/m 3 3 Oxides of Annual 40 µg/m 40 µg/m Gas Phase Chemiluminescence Nitrogen as Average* 3 3 (NO2) 24 hours** 80 µg/m 80 µg/m 3 3 Ozone (O3) 1 hour 180 µg/m 130 µg/m Non dispersive UV absorption 3 3 Suspended Annual 400 µg/m 360 µg/m High Volume Sampling, Particulate Average* (Average flow rate not less 3 Matter 3 3 than1.1 m /minute). 24 hours** 550 µg/m 500 µg/m (SPM) 3 3 Respirable Annual 200 µg/m 120 µg/m β Ray absorption Particulate Average* 3 3 Matter. PM10 24 hours** 250 µg/m 150 µg/m 3 3 Respirable Annual 25 µg/m 15 µg/m β Ray absorption Particulate Average* 3 3 Matter. PM2.5 24 hours** 40 µg/m 35 µg/m 3 3 1 hour 25 µg/m 15 µg/m 3 3 Lead (Pb) Annual 1.5 µg/m 1.0 µg/m ASS Method after sampling Average* using EPM 2000 or equivalent 3 3 Filter paper 24 hours** 2.0 µg/m 1.5 µg/m 3 3 Carbon 8 hours** 5 mg/m 5 mg/m Non Dispersive Infra Red Monoxide (NDIR) (CO) 3 3 1 hour 10 mg/m 10 mg/m *Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval. ** 24 hourly /8 hourly values should be met 98% of the in a year. 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on two consecutive days. Source: Government of Pakistan (2010) (SRO 1062 (I)/2010). 24 Full text of the Standards is available at the Pak-EPA website: (http://www.environment.gov.pk/info.htm). Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project A-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table A.4: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise 25 (i) For In-use Vehicles Standard Parameter (Maximum Measuring Method Applicability Permissible Limit) 1 Smoke 40% or 2 on the To be compared with Immediate effect Ringlemann Scale Ringlemann Chart at a during engine distance 6 or more. r acceleration mode. 2 Carbon 6% Under idling Monoxide conditions: Non- dispersive infrared detection through gas analyzer. 3 Noise 85 db (A). Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the source. (ii) For new Vehicles Emission Standards for Diesel Vehicles (a) For Passenger Cars and Light Commercial Vehicles (g/Km) Type of HC+ Measuring Category/Class Tiers CO PM Applicability Vehicle NOx Method Passenger M 1: with Pak-II IDI 1.0 0.70 0.08 NEDC i. All Cars reference mass 0 (ECE 15+ imported (RW) upto 2500 EUDCL) and local kg. Cars with manufacture RW over 2500 1.0 d diesel Pak-II DI 0.90 0.10 kg to meet NI 0 vehicles with category effect from standards. 01-07-2012 Light NI-I (RW<1250 Pak-II IDI 1.00 0.70 0.08 Commercial kg) Pak-II DI 1.00 0.90 0.10 Vehicles NI-II (1250 kg< Pak-II IDI 1.25 1.00 0.12 RW <1700 kg0 Pak-II DI 1.25 1.30 0.14 NI-III (RW>1700 Pak-II IDI 1.50 1.20 0.17 kg) Pak-II DI 1.50 1.60 0.20 Parameter Standard (maximum permissible limit) Measuring Method Noise 85 db (A) Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the source. 25 Full text of the NEQS is available at the Pak-EPA website: (http://www.environment.gov.pk/info.htm). Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project A-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework (b) For Heavy Duty Diesel Engines and Large Goods Vehicles (g/Kwh) Type of Category / Measuring Tiers CO HC NOx PM Applicability Vehicle Class Method Heavy Duty Trucks and Pak-II 4.0 1.1 7.0 0.15 ECE-R-49 All Imported Diesel Buses and local Engines manufactured diesel vehicles with the effect 1-7-2012 Large goods N2 (2000 and Pak-II 4.0 7.0 1.10 0.15 EDC Vehicles up Parameter Standard (maximum permissible limit) Measuring Method Noise 85 db (A) Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the source. Emission Standards for Petrol Vehicles (g/km) Type of HC+ Measuring Category / Class Tiers CO Applicability Vehicle NOx Method Passenger M 1: With reference Pak-II 2.20 0.50 NEDC (ECE All imported and mass (RW) upto 15 + new models* 2500 kg. Cars with EUDCL) locally RW over 2500 kg. to manufactured meet N1 category petrol vehicles with st standards effect from 1 July, Light N1-I (RW<1250 kg) Pak-II 2.20 0.50 2009** Commercial Vehicles N1-II (1250 kg>RW Pak-II 4.00 0.65 <1700 kg) N1-III (RW>1700 kg) Pak-II 5.00 0.80 Motor 2.4 strokes <150 cc Pak-II 5.50 1.50 ECER 40 Rickshaws & motor Cycles 2.4 strokes>150 cc Pak-II 5.50 1.30 Parameters Standard (maximum permissible limit) Measuring Method Noise 85 db (A) Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the source Explanations: DI: Direct Injection IDI: Indirect Injection EUDCL: Extra Urban Driving Cycle NEDC: New Urban Driving Cycle Vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of passengers and comprising no M: more than eight seats in addition to the driver's seat N: Motorvehicles with at least four wheels designed and constructed for the carriage of goods. * New model means both model and engine type change The existing models of petrol driven vehicles locally manufacturedwill immediately switch ever to ** Pak-II emission standards but not later than 30th June, 2012 Source: Government of Pakistan (2009) (SRO 72 (KE)/2009). Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project A-6 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table A.5: National Standards for Drinking Water Quality26 Properties/Parameters Standard Values for Pakistan Bacterial All water intended for drinking (e.Coli or Must not be detectable in any 100 ml samples Thermotolerant Coliform bacteria) Treated water entering the distribution system Must not be detectable in any 100 ml samples (E.Coli orthermotolerant coliform and total coliform bacteria) Treated water in the distribution system (E.Coli Must not be detectable in any 100 ml samples orthermo tolerant coliform and total coliform In case of large supplies, where sufficient samples bacteria) are examined, must not be present in 95% of the samples taken throughout any 12- month period. Physical Color ≤15 TCU Taste Non objectionable/Accept able Odor Non objectionable/Accept able Turbidity < 5 NTU Total hardness as CaCO3 < 500 mg/l TDS < 1000 pH 6.5 – 8.5 Chemical Essential Inorganic mg/Litre Aluminum (Al) ≤0.2 Antimony (Sb) ≤0.005 (P) Arsenic (As) ≤ 0.05 (P) Barium (Ba) 0.7 Boron (B) 0.3 Cadmium (Cd) 0.01 Chloride (Cl) <250 Chromium (Cr) ≤0.05 Copper (Cu) 2 Toxic Inorganic mg/Litre Cyanide (Cn) ≤0.05 Fluoride (F)* ≤1.5 Lead (Pb) ≤0.05 Manganese (Mn) ≤ 0.5 Mercury (Hg) ≤0.001 Nickel (Ni) ≤0.02 26 Full text of the Standards is available at the Pak-EPA website: (http://www.environment.gov.pk/info.htm). Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project A-7 Environmental and Social Management Framework Properties/Parameters Standard Values for Pakistan Nitrate (NO3)* ≤50 Nitrite (NO2)* ≤3 (P) Selenium (Se) 0.01 (P) Residual chlorine 0.2-0.5 at consumer end; 0.5-1.5 at source Zinc (Zn) 5.0 Organic Pesticides mg/l PSQCA No. 4639-2004, Page No. 4 Table No. 3 Serial No. 20- 58 may be consulted.** Phenolic compound (as phenols) mg/l WHO standards: ≤ 0.002 Polynuclear Aromatic hydrocarbon (as PAH) g/L WHO standards: ≤ 0.01v(by GC/MS method) Radioactive Alpha Emitters bq/L or pCi 0.1 Beta Emitters 1 * indicates priority health related inorganic constituents which need regular monitoring. ** PSQCA: Pakistan Standards Quality Control Authority. Source: Government of Pakistan (2010) (SRO 1063(I)/2010). Table A.6: National Environmental Quality Standards for Noise 27 Limit in dB(A) Leq * st st Category of Effective from 1 July 2010 Effective from 1 July 2012 Area/Zone Day time Night time Day time Night time Residential area 65 50 55 45 Commercial area 70 60 65 55 Industrial area 80 75 75 65 Silence zone 55 45 50 45 Notes: 1. Day time hours: 6:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m. 2. Night time hours: 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. 3. Silence zone::Zones that are declared as such by the competent authority. An area comprising not less than 100 m around the hospitals, educational institutions, and courts. 4. Mixed categories of areas may be declared as one of the four above-listed categories by the competent authority. * dB(A) Leq: Time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels on Scale A which is relatable to human hearing. Source: Government of Pakistan (2010) (SRO 1064(I)/2010). 27 Full text of the Standards is available at the Pak-EPA website: (http://www.environment.gov.pk/info.htm). Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project A-8 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex B. List of Institutional Stakeholders Consulted Name Designation Organization 1. Mr. Hidayatullah Director General Agri. Ext. Agriculture Extension Chhajaro (In Chair) 2. Mr. Bashir Ahmed Director Plant Protection Agriculture Extension Kerio 3. Mr. Nazir Ahmed General Manager Sindh Irrigation & Drainage Irsani Transition Authority (SIDA) 4. Mr. Ismail Kumbhar Assistant Professor Sindh Agriculture University Tando Jam 5. Dr. Abdul Sattar Consultant, Productivity World Bank Assisted SOFWM Buriro Enhancement Project 6. Mr. Ali Asghar Deputy Director Sindh Irrigation & Drainage Mahesar Environment Management Authority (SIDA) Unit (EMU) 7. Mr. Mir Hajan Talpur Technical Officer D.G. Ext. Agriculture Extension 8. Mr. Masroor Ahmed Institutional Specialist Sindh Irrigation & Drainage Shahwani Authority (SIDA) 9. Mr. Lal Chand Agriculture Officer / Focal Agriculture Extension Person IPM 10. Mr. Nadeem Ahmed Agriculture Officer Agriculture Extension Korai 11. Mr. Waheed Jamali Coordinator SAFWCO 12. Mr. Zahoor Ahmed Micro Biologist Environment Protection Agency Sindh Hyd. 13. Mr. A.Rauf Qureshi Assistant Director Environment Protection Agency Sindh Hyd. 14. Mr. Shahjahan Project Manager SAFWCO Hashmi 15. Dr. Noor Ahmed Disease Investigation Livestock Department Officer 16. Mr. Zulfiqar PPC SDF Haleopoto 17. Mr. Maqbool Dal Executive Director VCDO 18. Mr. Abass Khoso Executive Director IRADO 19. Mr. Jabbar Bhatti Executive Director Institute for Social Change 20. Mr. Ghulam Mustafa Regional Head SPO Baloch 21. Mr. Jai Kolhi Executive Member Development Awareness & Management of Natural Resources (DAMAN) 22. Ms. Umbreen Rafia Managing Director Indus Future Foundation 23. Mr. Farhan Ali Project Coordinator Sindh Hari Porhiat Council Abbasi 24. Mr. Shams u ddin RCM NRSP 25. Mr. Azam Solangi Deputy Director Agriculture Research Sindh 26. Mr. Taj Marri - Bhandhar Sangat Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project B-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex C. Questionnaire for Stakeholder Consultation Questionnaire Project Design 1. What are your observations about the stated project objectives? 2. What further objectives can be added to increase project utility? 3. What objectives have parallels to any activities going on under your purview? Are there any redundancies? 4. Are there any areas where project activities can be used to support ongoing work under your purview? 5. Do you think the interventions identified are adequate to address the project objectives? Which interventions can be added to the list? Which are redundant and should be removed? Project Environmental Impacts 6. Of the project interventions identified, do you see any potential environmental impacts emerging which need to be identified? 7. Are there any potential adverse impacts on the project area flora? 8. Are there any potential adverse impacts on the project area fauna? 9. Are there any potential adverse impacts on the project area water resources? 10. Are there any potential physiographical impacts or impacts to soils, especially in cultivated areas? 11. Are there any health/safety hazards associated with the project activities? 12. What mitigation measures should be taken to ensure that project activities in general do not lead to adverse environmental impacts including impacts on flora, fauna, water resources, soil and air? 13. Any environmental enhancement measures that could be added to the project? 14. Any other suggestions? Project Social Impacts 15. In terms of land ownership patterns in the province, do you have any suggestions to ensure the projects benefits are inclusive? 16. Does the project adequately target all social groups? 17. Are there any marginalized social groups that need to be especially targeted? How can project objectives be amended to include such groups in the impact area? 18. Do the project benefits adequate reach women and children and what actions can be taken to ensure that? 19. What would be the appropriate range of beneficiary contributions (percentage) for the project? Is 30% beneficiary contribution a realistic expectation? 20. Are there any potential social accountability issues? How can these be addressed? 21. What are the best possible mechanisms for grievance redressal and participatory monitoring on the project? Do you have a mechanism in place which can be adopted for project usage? Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project C-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework 22. What are the key areas where capacity building would be needed in the province? What should capacity building for beneficiaries focus on? What should capacity building for stakeholders and implementing agencies focus on? Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project C-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex D. Summary and Written Responses Please see the following pages. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-6 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-7 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-8 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-9 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-10 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-11 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-12 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project D-13 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex E. Rapid Assessment Checklist Screening Questions Yes No Remarks A. Project Siting Is the Project area adjacent to or within any of the following environmentally sensitive areas?  Cultural heritage site  Protected Area  Wetland  Mangrove  Estuarine  Buffer zone of protected area  Special area for protecting biodiversity B. Potential Environmental Impacts Will the Project cause:  ecological disturbances arising from the establishment of a plant or facility complex in or near sensitive habitats?  loss of precious ecological values (e.g. result of encroachment into forests/swamplands or historical/cultural buildings/areas, disruption of hydrology of natural waterways, regional flooding, and drainage hazards)?  eventual degradation of water bodies due to discharge of wastes and other effluents from plant or facility complex?  serious contamination of soil and groundwater?  aggravation of solid waste problems in the area?  public health risks from discharge of wastes and poor air Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project E-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks quality; noise and foul odor from plant emissions?  short-term construction impacts (e.g. soil erosion, deterioration of water and air quality, noise and vibration from construction equipment?  dislocation or involuntary resettlement of people  social conflicts arising from the influx of laborers from other areas?  environmental degradation (e.g. erosion, soil and water contamination, loss of soil fertility, disruption of wildlife habitat) from intensification of agricultural land use to supply raw materials for plant operation; and modification of natural species diversity as a result of the transformation to monoculture practices?  water pollution from discharge of liquid effluents?  air pollution from all plant operations?  gaseous and odor emissions to the atmosphere from processing operations?  accidental release of potentially hazardous solvents, acidic and alkaline materials?  uncontrolled in-migration with opening of roads to forest area and overloading of social infrastructure?  occupational health hazards due to fugitive dust, materials handling, noise, or other process operations?  disruption of transit patterns, creation of noise and congestion, and pedestrian hazards aggravated by heavy trucks?  disease transmission from inadequate waste disposal?  impediments to movements of Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project E-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks people and animals?  disproportionate impacts on the poor, women and children, Indigenous Peoples or other vulnerable groups?  potential social conflicts arising from land tenure and land use issues?  noise from construction and plant equipment?  soil pollution, polluted farm runoff and groundwater, and public health risks due to excessive application of fertilizers and pesticides?  risks to community health and safety due to the transport, storage, and use and/or disposal of materials such as explosives, fuel and other chemicals during construction and operation? C. Potential Social Impacts  Does the subproject require land?  If yes, will the subproject cost be shared between the project and landowner? (Complete documentation will be maintained for land procurement or donation.)  Will the private land be obtained through land cost paid by the community through willing buyer- willing seller arrangement? (Complete documentation will be maintained for land procurement).  Will the land be obtained through private voluntary donations, provided the donation will have minimal livelihood impact on the concerned person (less than 10 percent)? (Complete documentation will be maintained for land donation.) Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project E-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex F. Methodology and Structure of Environmental and Social Management Plans Suggested Methodology The subproject-specific ESMPs will be prepared using the standard methodology, as briefly listed below (ADB’s Rapid Environmental Assessment Checklist given in Annex E and FAO’s Environmental Guidelines given in Annex L will also be used for ESMP preparation).  Scoping – studying the subproject details and preparing long list of potential issues and concerns  Site survey and data collection – recording the key environmental and social aspects of the area, identifying any environmental/social hot spots or key concerns, carrying out consultations with the community.  Screening – on the basis of the above, short listing the key concerns and potential impacts of the subproject on environment and people.  impact assessment – assessing the significance of each potential impact and identifying appropriate mitigation measures. Assessment of cumulative impacts of a cluster of subprojects.  ESMP compilation – documenting the process and outcome of the study. The ESMP structure is discussed below. Suggested ESMP Structure The ESMP will follow the standard structure as given below.  Introduction, including background, a brief description of the SAGP, an overview of the relevant legal and policy framework  A simplified description of the subproject, including its layout and location, resource requirements, wastes to be generated, manpower requirement, a brief description of construction activities, and a brief description of operation and maintenance activities.  Baseline description, primarily describing the proposed site and its immediate surrounding aided with maps, photographs and schematics, key environmental and social aspects/resources of the surroundings such as land form and land use, land ownership, water resources, settlements, any critical habitat or protected area, any cultural heritage sites or graveyards, any sensitive receptor such as schools and hospitals, access routes, and other relevant details.  Stakeholder consultations, recording the key concerns and suggestions of the community regarding the subproject and its potential impacts, and a description of the way these concerns will be addressed.  Mitigation plans, listing all the impacts, their mitigation measures, assigning responsibility of implementing these measures, and also assigning responsibility for monitoring. Also identifying cumulative impacts if applicable.  Monitoring plan, describing the monitoring requirements, frequency, and responsibility of conducting the monitoring. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project F-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework  Training plan, describing the training requirements, contents, frequency, training recipients, and responsibility of conducting these trainings.  Documentation and reporting, describing the requirement, frequency, and responsibility of documentation and reporting.  ESMP implementation budget, providing the cost estimate of its implementation. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project F-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex G. ESMP for Artificial Insemination Training Center (Sample Only – To be Completed during SAGP Implementation) Introduction The Department of Livestock and Fisheries plans to establish the Artificial Insemination Training Center (AITC) within the premises of the Agriculture University Tando Jam, under the World Bank financed Sindh Agriculture Growth Project (SAGP). The present Environmental and Social Management Plan (ESMP) has been prepared to address the potentially adverse environmental and or social impact of this facility, in accordance with the requirements laid down in Environmental and Social Management Framework (ESMF) that has been prepared for the SAGP. SAGP Overview The Government of Pakistan (GoPak) and Government of Sindh (GoSindh) have both highlighted commercial agriculture and market linkages as priority investments for the sector. GoSindh has also prioritized investments in support of small and medium farmers and in value chains that will positively impact women. This project also responds to the Country Partnership Strategy (CPS) (FY2010-13) which states that the Bank will engage in providing technical assistance to help Pakistan in its agricultural policy analysis and design with a view to increasing agricultural competitiveness and expanding rural livelihoods. The project will improve marketing infrastructure and facilitate reform in local marketing regulations and policies to enhance competitiveness. The project consists of three components: Component A comprises capacity building of producers, modernization of extension services and agricultural research, and strategic planning for the agricultural sector; Component B comprises horticulture value chains, post-harvest loss management, livestock value chains, and demand driven investment fund; and Component C comprises project management, monitoring and evaluation. Further project details are presented later in the document. Regulatory and Policy Overview The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act, 1997 (the Act) is the basic legislative tool empowering the government to frame regulations for the protection of the environment. The Act is applicable to a broad range of issues and extends to socioeconomic aspects, land acquisition, air, water, soil, marine and noise pollution, as well as the handling of hazardous waste. The discharge or emission of any effluent, waste, air pollutant or noise in an amount, concentration or level in excess of the National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) specified by the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency (Pak- EPA) has been prohibited under the Act, and penalties have been prescribed for those contravening the provisions of the Act. The powers of the federal and provincial Environmental Protection Agencies (EPAs), established under the Pakistan Environmental Protection Ordinance 1983,have also been considerably enhanced under this legislation and they have been given the power to conduct inquiries into possible breaches of environmental law either of their own accord, or upon the registration of a complaint. This Act will be applicable to the proposed AITC to be established under the SAGP. The World Bank’s Operation Policy 4.01 (OP 4.01) requires environmental assessment (EA) of projects proposed for Bank financing to help ensure that they are Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework environmentally sound and sustainable, and thus to improve decision making. The OP defines the EA process and various types of the EA instruments. Other WB operational policies include OP 4.04 for natural habitat, OP 4.36 for forestry, OP 4.09 for pest management, OP 4.37 for safety of dams, OP 7.50 for projects in international waterways, OP 4.11 for physical cultural property, OP 4.10 for indigenous people, OP 7.60 for projects in disputed areas, OP 4.12 for involuntary resettlement, and policy on access to information. Of these policies, the OP 4.01, OP 4.09 and policy on access to information will be applicable to the AITC subproject. Subproject Description (to be completed during SAGP implementation) The AITC will be established within the premises of the Agriculture University at Tando Jam. The University is located on the highway connecting Hyderabad and Mirpurkhas (see Figure 1). The land proposed for this facility belongs to the University and is currently lying vacant as can be seen in the Figure 1. The facility is likely to provide training facility and will also house about ten animals. (To be included here: facility description; facility layout (map); construction details; facility utilization; activities during facility operation; water requirements; requirement of any other materials; any toxic material to be used or disposed; waste generation and disposal; …….) Baseline Conditions The generic baseline conditions of the entire project area for SAGP (ie, entire province of Sindh) have been described in the ESMF of the SAGP, the specific site-specific baseline description for the AITC subproject is presented below. The proposed site is a flat tract of land as shown in the photographs provided at the end of this ESMP. The land is owned by the Agriculture University, as mentioned earlier, and some occasional cultivation is carried out here by the University employees. Some trees also exist here. There are no water bodies in the immediate vicinity of the site, nor do any settlements exist in the vicinity except the University buildings and facilities as can be seen in Figure 1. No wildlife protected area or site of cultural, archeological, religious or historical importance exist in the vicinity. No sensitive receptors exist in the area except the University facilities and buildings. Stakeholder Consultations (To be added by the Project.) Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Figure 1: Location of the Proposed AITC28 28 Source: Google Maps accessed on 4 June 2013. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening and Assessment The potential environmental and social impact of the AITC subproject have been screened and assessed below (this will be reviewed once more information on AITC design and operation is available). Screening Questions Yes No Remarks A. Project Siting Is the Project area adjacent to or within any of the following environmentally sensitive areas?  Cultural heritage site ✔  Protected Area ✔  Wetland ✔  Mangrove ✔  Estuarine ✔  Buffer zone of protected area ✔  Special area for protecting ✔ biodiversity B. Potential Environmental Impacts Will the Project cause:  ecological disturbances arising ✔ No sensitive habitat exists in the from the establishment of a plant vicinity of the proposed site. or facility complex in or near sensitive habitats?  loss of precious ecological ✔ The immediate surroundings of the values (e.g. result of proposed site do not have any encroachment into precious ecological value. The area forests/swamplands or has already been modified to historical/cultural establish the Agriculture Universities buildings/areas, disruption of decades ago. Also, the establishment hydrology of natural waterways, of the proposed facility will not alter regional flooding, and drainage the ecological stetting of the area in hazards)? general.  eventual degradation of water ✔ No untreated wastes will be released bodies due to discharge of wastes to the environment. Sewage from and other effluents from plant or the facility will be treated in a septic facility complex? tank and soaking pit. The animal wastes will mostly be used as fertilizer in the cultivation fields within the University. During construction phase, good housekeeping practice will be Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks implemented to forestall any release of untreated effluents to the environment.  serious contamination of soil and ✔ Same as above. groundwater?  aggravation of solid waste ✔ During the construction phase, the problems in the area? contractor will be required to responsibly dispose solid waste generated by the construction activities. During the facility operation, domestic solid waste will be disposed along with other such waste being generated in the University. The animal waste (cow dung) will be used as fertilizer in the cultivation fields within the University, as described earlier.  public health risks from Possibly During the facility operation, foul discharge of wastes and poor air odor from the animal screeta may be quality; noise and foul odor from a cause of concern. The facility plant emissions? design will ensure that the animal shed is constructed away from any sensitive receptor (eg, residences and class rooms). Regular removal of animal screeta will be ensured during facility operation.  short-term construction impacts Possibly No soil erosion is likely in view of (e.g. soil erosion, deterioration of the flat nature of the site. water and air quality, noise and Deterioration of air and water quality vibration from construction is likely to take place if appropriate equipment? measures are not implemented. Similarly, construction activities are likely to cause some localized noise. The contractor will be required to implement appropriate mitigation measures to reduce the above impacts and follow the applicable standards (such as NEQS) for noise, air quality and other impacts. The contractor will also be required to maintain liaison with the relevant University officials.  dislocation or involuntary ✔ The site is lying vacant. resettlement of people  social conflicts arising from the ✔ Local contractors are likely to be influx of laborers from other engaged for the construction works. areas? They are likely to engage local construction workers. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks  environmental degradation (e.g. ✔ Not applicable. erosion, soil and water contamination, loss of soil fertility, disruption of wildlife habitat) from intensification of agricultural land use to supply raw materials for plant operation; and modification of natural species diversity as a result of the transformation to monoculture practices?  water pollution from discharge ✔ As described above, no untreated of liquid effluents? effluents will be released to environment.  air pollution from all plant ✔ No plant or machinery operation is operations? involved. The facility may have a diesel generator, which will cause some localized air pollution.  gaseous and odor emissions to Possibly Foul odor from animal screeta may the atmosphere from processing be a cause of concern as described operations? earlier also. The facility design will ensure that the animal shed is constructed away from any sensitive receptor (eg, residences and class rooms). Regular removal of animal screeta will be ensured during facility operation.  accidental release of potentially ? ? To be assessed once more hazardous solvents, acidic and information is available about alkaline materials? facility operation.  uncontrolled in-migration with ✔ Not applicable. The area is already opening of roads to forest area significantly modified to establish and overloading of social the University decades ago. infrastructure?  occupational health hazards due Possibly Construction Phase: Occupational to fugitive dust, materials health hazards are likely to exist handling, noise, or other process during construction phase and will operations? be addressed with the help of appropriate OHS practices (eg, use of PPEs, safety protocols, fire fighting, first aide, and others). Operation phase may pose bio-safety hazards. Implementation of appropriate bio-safety and bio- security protocols will forestall these risks. (to be expanded once more subproject information is available)  disruption of transit patterns, ✔ Not applicable since no intensive creation of noise and congestion, heavy vehicular movement is and pedestrian hazards envisaged for the subproject. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-6 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks aggravated by heavy trucks?  disease transmission from Possibly Appropriate waste disposal inadequate waste disposal? arrangements will have to be implemented to forestall any disease transmission. Similarly, bio-safety protocols will need to be implemented to avoid any disease transmission from (and among) the animals.  impediments to movements of ✔ Unlikely since the site is not used for people and animals? animal or people movement.  disproportionate impacts on the ✔ The subproject is unlikely to cause poor, women and children, any impact on poor, women or Indigenous Peoples or other children since it is located away vulnerable groups? from communities and the facility will have no interaction with these vulnerable groups. No Indigenous People (as defined under the OP 4.10) are known to exist in the Province.  potential social conflicts arising ✔ The land is owned by the University from land tenure and land use and currently lying mostly vacant issues? (except for some cultivation by University employees).  noise from construction and Possibly Some noise is expected from plant equipment? construction operation. The contractor will be required to implement appropriate mitigation measures.  soil pollution, polluted farm ✔ Not applicable since the subproject runoff and groundwater, and does not involve usage of fertilizers public health risks due to or pesticides. excessive application of fertilizers and pesticides?  risks to community health and ✔ No hazardous materials will be used safety due to the transport, at the site (to be confirmed). storage, and use and/or disposal Bio-safety protocols will be of materials such as explosives, implemented at the facility. fuel and other chemicals during construction and operation? C. Potential Social Impacts  Does the subproject require ✔ land?  If yes, will the subproject cost be Not applicable, since the land is shared between the project and already owned by the University (ie, landowner? Government owned land). (Complete documentation will be maintained for land procurement or donation.) Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-7 Environmental and Social Management Framework Screening Questions Yes No Remarks  Will the private land be obtained ✔ through land cost paid by the community through willing buyer- willing seller arrangement? (Complete documentation will be maintained for land procurement).  Will the land be obtained through ✔ private voluntary donations, provided the donation will have minimal livelihood impact on the concerned person (less than 10 percent)? (Complete documentation will be maintained for land donation.) Mitigation Plan The mitigation plan is presented in Table 1. This will be reviewed and updated as needed once more information on the AITC is available during SAGP implementation. Monitoring Plan During the construction phase, ESMP monitoring will be carried out at three levels. At the PMU level, the EFPs with the help of environment and social specialists will carry out ESMP monitoring to ensure that the mitigation plan is being effectively implemented, and will conduct field visits on a regular basis. At the field level, more frequent ESMP monitoring will be carried out by the PIU staff, under the guidance and supervision of EFPs and Environment Specialist. Monitoring checklists will be prepared on the basis of the mitigation plan (Table 1). Finally, the SAGP will engage specialists/firms to conduct external monitoring as third party validation on an annual basis. During the operation phase, the environmental management and monitoring will be carried out the AITC staff themselves, under the leadership of the AITC In-charge. Documentation and Reporting Complete documentation will be maintained for the entire ESMP implementation process. This will include the following:  environmental and social monitoring checklists filled by the PIUs and EFPs,  visit reports with photographs prepared by the Environment Specialist,  quarterly reports on overall ESMP implementation of the project, to be prepared by the EFPs,  annual third party monitoring reports,  subproject completion report on overall ESMP implementation – to be prepared by EFPs. The EFPs will be overall responsible for the above documentation and reporting. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-8 Environmental and Social Management Framework Table 1: Mitigation Plan (this will be reviewed once more information on AITC design and operation is available) Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring 1 Subproject Siting  A memo of understanding will be signed between the SAGP and University PIU and EFPs During design (Land Use, authorities regarding the establishment of the facility and its ownership. AITC stage of AITC Landform, and design  Consultations will be carried out before establishing the AITC facility. Land Take); team  It will be ensured that the local routes are not blocked by AITC facility. Ecological  It will be ensured that natural drainage paths are not blocked by the Disturbances and establishment of AITC facility. Loss of Precious  Trees may need to be felled to construct the facility (see photographs at the Ecological Values end of this ESMP). Compensatory tree plantation will be carried out to mitigate this impact. Trees thus planted will be at least five times the number of trees felled for establishing the AITC facility.  The ‘chance find’29 procedures will be included in the construction contract document. 2 Soil and Water  The AITC will be designed employing technologies that are least polluting PIU and EFPs During design Contamination, and  Fuel, oil and other chemicals will be handled and stored at the AITC AITC and O&M Degradation of design stages of facilities following the standard operating procedures, avoiding any leakage Water Bodies team; AITC caused by and spillage, and minimizing contamination of soil and water. In-charge Discharge of  Appropriate effluent treatment arrangements will be included in the design of AITC Wastes of the AITC. This will include septic tank and soaking pit for sewage treatment.  Settling/retaining tanks will be constructed at the site as appropriate to minimize contaminants leaving the AITC. 29 ‘Chance find’ procedure: In case any artifact or site of archeological, cultural, historical, or religious significance are discovered during activities such as excavation of water ponds, the works will be stopped, and the Archeological Department will be informed. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-9 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring  The animal wastes will mostly be used as fertilizer in the cultivation fields within the University.  During construction phase, good housekeeping practice will be implemented to forestall any release of untreated effluents to the environment.  Recycling of waste effluents will be carried out as far as possible and practical.  It will be ensured that the waste effluents leaving the facility comply with the NEQS.  Any other waste?? (to be assessed once more information is available) 3 Aggravation of  During the construction phase, the contractor will be required to PIU and EFPs During design Solid Waste responsibly dispose solid waste generated by the construction activities. AITC and O&M Problems Domestic solid waste will be disposed along with similar waste generated design stages of in the University; scrap and excess construction material will be removed team; AITC from site; reusable and recycle-able waste will be sold. In-charge of AITC  During the facility operation, domestic solid waste will be disposed along with other such waste being generated in the University. The animal waste (cow dung) will be used as fertilizer in the cultivation fields within the University, as described earlier.  Any other waste?? (to be assessed once more information is available) 4 Public Health  During the facility operation, foul odor from the animal screeta may AITC EFPs During design Issues be a cause of concern. The facility design will ensure that the animal design and O&M shed is constructed away from any sensitive receptor (eg, residences team; stages of and class rooms). In-charge AITC of AITC  Regular removal of animal screeta will be ensured during facility Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-10 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring operation.  It will be ensured that the emissions and noise from the AITC comply with NEQS and other relevant standards (eg, WHO guidelines where NEQS do not prescribe standards).  Consultations will be carried out as part of the AITC design activities.  Grievance redress mechanism will be established in the area to address the public complaints regarding issues such as noise and odor from the subproject facilities.  Any other issue?? (to be assessed once more information is available) 5 Construction  Spoils and excess soil if generated will be disposed appropriately. Contractor PIUs and Construction related Issues  Untreated waste effluents from the AITC construction site will not be EFPs phase released to environment. Appropriate effluent treatment arrangements such as settling tanks will be made at the site. It will be ensured that the effluents comply with NEQS.  Construction machinery, generators, and vehicles will be kept in good working condition, minimizing exhaust emissions. It will be ensured that exhausts from these equipment and vehicles comply with relevant NEQS.  It will be ensured that noise generated from the construction activities comply with relevant NEQS.  All safety precautions will be taken to address safety hazards for the nearby community/offices/classrooms. These precautions may include safety/warning signage, safety barrier around the construction site, and safe driving practices.  Consultations will be carried out before commencing the construction activities, informing the nearby population regarding the construction Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-11 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring activities and possible impacts such as noise and additional vehicular traffic.  Grievance redress mechanism (GRM) will be established in the area to address the public complaints regarding issues such as noise from the construction sites.  WB Group’s Environment, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines (attached at the end of this document) will be implemented  The construction contracts will include appropriate clauses to protect environment and public health. The present ESMP will be included in the bidding document. 8 Occupational  Occupational health hazards during construction phase will be AITCdesig EFPs During design Health and Safety addressed with the help of appropriate OHS practices (eg, use of n team; In- and O&M Hazards PPEs, safety protocols, fire fighting, first aide, and others). charge of stages of AITC AITC  Operation phase of AITC may pose bio-safety hazards. Implementation of appropriate bio-safety and bio-security protocols will forestall these risks. (to be expanded once more subproject information is available)  The design of the facilities will comply with all relevant and applicable technical standards and safety codes to minimize occupational health and safety risks.  Standard operating procedures will be developed and implemented at the AITC facility. These procedures will address the OHS aspects as well.  Fire alarm and fire fighting arrangements will be provided, as appropriate  The facility workers will be appropriately trained in OHS aspects.  Use of appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) will be mandatory Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-12 Environmental and Social Management Framework Environmental Responsibility /Social Mitigation Actions Timing Impact/Issue Execution Monitoring at the facility.  WB Group’s EHS Guidelines will be implemented as appropriate. 9 Vehicular Traffic  The contractor will be asked to use the routes designated by the University Contractor EFPs During officials construction In-charge and O&M  Consultations will be carried out before the AITC establishment. of AITC stages of  Safety signage will be erected at appropriate places. AITC  Safe driving practices will be promoted among the drivers.  GRM will be put in place. 10 Influx of Workers  Preference will be given to the local contractors, workers, and laborers. Contractor EFPs During and Employment  GRM will be put in place to amicably resolve any disputes or conflicts construction In-charge and O&M related to employment and service provision. of AITC stages of AITC Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-13 Environmental and Social Management Framework ESMP Implementation Budget The ESMP implementation budget is provided below. It will be reviewed once more information is available on the AITC subproject and the present ESMP is finalized. Table 2: ESMP Implementation Budget Description Cost (million PKR) Notes/basis Environment Specialist - Included in the overall SAGP budget Social Specialist - Included in the overall SAGP budget Third party validation - Included in the overall SAGP budget Capacity Building - Included in the overall SAGP budget ESMP Preparation 0.5 This may be needed to revise and finalize the present ESMP Development of HSE - Included in the overall SAGP Protocols and training budget Miscellaneous expenses 0.5 Total 1.0 Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-14 Environmental and Social Management Framework Site Photographs Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-15 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-16 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-17 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-18 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-19 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-20 Environmental and Social Management Framework Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project G-21 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex H. Involuntary Resettlement Screening Checklist Name of Enumerator:_____________________________ Date: __________________________ Province:___________ District:_______________ Project:_____________ Sector:____________ Project Categorization: A B C SECTION 1 Yes No Expected Remarks Does the project require land acquisition? Yes/No If yes, then describe the type of land being acquired from the categories below: Land (Quantify and describe types of land being acquired in “remarks column”. Government or state owned land free of occupation (agriculture or settlement) Private land  Residential  Commercial  Agricultural  Communal  Others (specify in “remarks”).  Name of owner/owners and type of ownership document if available. If land is being acquired, describe any structures constructed on it Land-based assets:  Residential structures  Commercial structures (specify in “remarks”)  Community structures (specify in “remarks”)  Agriculture structures (specify in “remarks”)  Public utilities (specify in “remarks”)  Others (specify in “remarks”) If agricultural land is being acquired, specify the following: Agriculture related impacts  Crops and vegetables (specify types and cropping area in “remarks).  Trees (specify number and types in “remarks”).  Others (specify in “remarks”). Affected Persons (DPs) Will any people be displaced from the land when acquired? Yes/No  Number of DPs  Males  Females  Titled land owners  Tenants and sharecroppers  Leaseholders  Agriculture wage laborers  Encroachers and squatters (specify in remarks column) Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project H-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework  Vulnerable DPs (e.g. women headed households, minors and aged, orphans, disabled persons and those below the poverty line). Specify the number and vulnerability in “remarks”.  Others (specify in “remarks”)  How will people be affected? Section 2 Will land be donated voluntarily? Yes/No If yes, does the owner been made aware of VLD nature and procedure? Has the landowner agreed to sign the VLD documents? Can the owner produce land title deeds/documents of ownership? Are there any tenants on the land? If yes, describe number of tenants, gender and type of tenancy and length of residence. If yes, are tenants willing to move? Will there be adverse impacts on tenants? Describe in remarks column Are there people using the land for livelihoods, cultural activities? Yes/No If yes, how many people? Gender? Type of activity? How will voluntary land donation effect people using the land? Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project H-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex I. Format to Document Contribution of Assets The following agreement has been made on............................ day of...................…………….……. between...............................................resident of .................................. .......................(the Owner) and ……………………………………………….(the Recipient). 1. That the Owner holds the transferable right of ........................………………………hectares of land/structure/asset in.........……………………………………………………………………. 2. That the Owner testifies that the land/structure is free of squatters or encroachers and not subject to other claims. 3. That, to the best of his knowledge, there are no other lawful claimants to the property 4. That he/she does not have tenants on the property. 5. That the Owner hereby grants to the Recipient this asset for the construction and development of ............................................for the benefit of the villagers and the public at large. (Either, in case of donation): 6. That the Owner will not claim any compensation against the grant of this asset. (Or, in case of compensation): 7. That the Recipient shall construct and develop the……………...……and take all possible precautions to avoid damage to adjacent land/structure/other assets. 8. That both the parties agree that the………………………so constructed/developed shall be public premises. 9. That the provisions of this agreement will come into force from the date of signing of this deed. 10. That the owner gives up all claims to the land donated and the title to the land will be transferred to the recipient through notary public. ___________________ _____________________ Signature of the Owner Signature of the Recipient Witnesses: 1. __________________Village or Tribal Head___________ 2. _________________Government Employee____________ 3. -----------------------------------------Adjacent land owner ______________ (Signature, name and address) Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project I-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex J. Checklist for Scheme Siting Sr.# Issues Yes No Don’t Know Mitigation Measures 1 Does the subproject require land acquisition? [Note: Fill in the land acquisition form if YES] 2 Will the subproject negatively impact livelihoods [Note: Describe separately if YES] 3 Is the subproject located on land with contested ownership? 4 Does the owner know that the land will be donated voluntarily? 5 Are there people currently living on this land? 6 Is the subproject located on land reclaimed from floods ( the ownership here may be contested) 7 Is the subproject located in an area with designated natural reserves? 8 Is the subproject located in an area with unique natural features? 9 Is the subproject located in an area with endangered or conservation-worthy ecosystems, fauna or flora? 10 Is the subproject located in an area falling within 500 meters of national forests, protected areas, wilderness areas, wetlands, biodiversity, critical habitats, or sites of historical or cultural importance? 11 Is the subproject located in an area which would create a barrier for the movement of conservation-worthy wildlife or livestock? 12 Is the subproject located close to groundwater sources, surface water bodies, water courses or wetlands? 13 Is the subproject located in an area with designated cultural properties such as archaeological, historical and/or religious sites? 14 Is the subproject in an area with religious monuments, structures and/or cemeteries? 15 Is the subproject located in an area from where people have been displaced? 16 Is the subproject located in an area where IDPs are temporarily settled? Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project J-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework Sr.# Issues Yes No Don’t Know Mitigation Measures 17 Is the subproject located in a politically sensitive area? 18 Is the subproject located in a polluted or contaminated area? 19 Is the subproject located in an area of high visual and landscape quality? 20 Is the subproject located in an area susceptible to landslides or erosion? 21 Is the subproject located in an area of seismic faults? 22 Is the subproject located in a densely populated area? 23 Is the subproject located on a prime agricultural land? 24 Is the subproject located in an area of tourist importance? 25 Is the subproject located near a waste dump? 26 Does the subproject have access to potable water? 27 Is the subproject located far (1-2 km) from accessible roads? 28 Is the subproject located in an area with a wastewater network? 29 Is the subproject located in the urban plan of the city? 30 Is the subproject located outside the land use plan? Checklist filled by (Name, designation, and signature): Date: Checklist reviewed by (Name, designation, and signature): Date: Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project J-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex K. Safeguards Procedures for Inclusion in the Technical Specifications of Contracts I. General 1. The Contractor and his employees shall adhere to the mitigation measures set down and take all other measures required by the Engineer to prevent harm, and to minimize the impact of his operations on the environment. 2. The Contractor shall not be permitted to unnecessarily strip clear the right of way. The Contractor shall only clear the minimum width for construction and diversion roads should not be constructed alongside the existing road. 3. Remedial actions which cannot be effectively carried out during construction should be carried out on completion of each Section of the road (earthworks, pavement and drainage) and before issuance of the Taking Over Certificate: (a) these sections should be landscaped and any necessary remedial works should be undertaken without delay, including grassing and reforestation; (b) water courses should be cleared of debris and drains and culverts checked for clear flow paths; and (c) borrow pits should be dressed as fish ponds, or drained and made safe, as agreed with the land owner. 4. The Contractor shall limit construction works to between 6 am and 7 pm if it is to be carried out in or near residential areas. 5. The Contractor shall avoid the use of heavy or noisy equipment in specified areas at night, or in sensitive areas such as near a hospital. 6. To prevent dust pollution during dry periods, the Contractor shall carry out regular watering of earth and gravel haul roads and shall cover material haulage trucks with tarpaulins to prevent spillage. II. Transport 7. The Contractor shall use selected routes to the project site, as agreed with the Engineer, and appropriately sized vehicles suitable to the class of road, and shall restrict loads to prevent damage to roads and bridges used for transportation purposes. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage caused to the roads and bridges due to the transportation of excessive loads, and shall be required to repair such damage to the approval of the Engineer. 8. The Contractor shall not use any vehicles, either on or off road with grossly excessive, exhaust or noise emissions. In any built up areas, noise mufflers shall be installed and maintained in good condition on all motorized equipment under the control of the Contractor. 9. Adequate traffic control measures shall be maintained by the Contractor throughout the duration of the Contract and such measures shall be subject to prior approval of the Engineer. III. Workforce 10. The Contractor should whenever possible locally recruit the majority of the workforce and shall provide appropriate training as necessary. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project K-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework 11. The Contractor shall install and maintain a temporary septic tank system for any residential labor camp and without causing pollution of nearby watercourses. 12. The Contractor shall establish a method and system for storing and disposing of all solid wastes generated by the labor camp and/or base camp. 13. The Contractor shall not allow the use of fuel wood for cooking or heating in any labor camp or base camp and provide alternate facilities using other fuels. 14. The Contractor shall ensure that site offices, depots, asphalt plants and workshops are located in appropriate areas as approved by the Engineer and not within 500 meters of existing residential settlements and not within 1,000 meters for asphalt plants. 15. The Contractor shall ensure that site offices, depots and particularly storage areas for diesel fuel and bitumen and asphalt plants are not located within 500 meters of watercourses, and are operated so that no pollutants enter watercourses, either overland or through groundwater seepage, especially during periods of rain. This will require lubricants to be recycled and a ditch to be constructed around the area with an approved settling pond/oil trap at the outlet. 16. The contractor shall not use fuel wood as a means of heating during the processing or preparation of any materials forming part of the Works. IV. Quarries and Borrow Pits 17. Operations of a new borrow area, on land, in a river, or in an existing area, shall be subject to prior approval of the Engineer, and the operation shall cease if so instructed by the Engineer. Borrow pits shall be prohibited where they might interfere with the natural or designed drainage patterns. River locations shall be prohibited if they might undermine or damage the river banks, or carry too much fine material downstream. 18. The Contractor shall ensure that all borrow pits used are left in a trim and tidy condition with stable side slopes, and are drained ensuring that no stagnant water bodies are created which could breed mosquitoes. 19. Rock or gravel taken from a river shall be far enough removed to limit the depth of material removed to one-tenth of the width of the river at any one location, and not to disrupt the river flow, or damage or undermine the river banks. 20. The location of crushing plants shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer, and not be close to environmentally sensitive areas or to existing residential settlements, and shall be operated with approved fitted dust control devices. V. Earthworks 21. Earthworks shall be properly controlled, especially during the rainy season. 22. The Contractor shall maintain stable cut and fill slopes at all times and cause the least possible disturbance to areas outside the prescribed limits of the work. 23. The Contractor shall complete cut and fill operations to final cross-sections at any one location as soon as possible and preferably in one continuous operation to avoid partially completed earthworks, especially during the rainy season. 24. In order to protect any cut or fill slopes from erosion, in accordance with the drawings, cut off drains and toe-drains shall be provided at the top and bottom of slopes and be planted with grass or other plant cover. Cut off drains should be provided above high cuts to minimize water runoff and slope erosion. 25. Any excavated cut or unsuitable material shall be disposed of in designated tipping areas as agreed to by the Engineer. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project K-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework 26. Tips should not be located where they can cause future slides, interfere with agricultural land or any other properties, or cause soil from the dump to be washed into any watercourse. Drains may need to be dug within and around the tips, as directed by the Engineer. VII. Disposal of Construction and Vehicle Waste 27. Debris generated due to the dismantling of the existing structures shall be suitably reused, to the extent feasible, in the proposed construction (e.g. as fill material for embankments). The disposal of remaining debris shall be carried out only at sites identified and approved by the project engineer. The contractor should ensure that these sites (a) are not located within designated forest areas; (b) do not impact natural drainage courses; and (c) do not impact endangered/rare flora. Under no circumstances shall the contractor dispose of any material in environmentally sensitive areas. 28. In the event any debris or silt from the sites is deposited on adjacent land, the Contractor shall immediately remove such, debris or silt and restore the affected area to its original state to the satisfaction of the Supervisor/Engineer. 29. Bentonite slurry or similar debris generated from pile driving or other construction activities shall be disposed off to avoid overflow into the surface water bodies or form mud puddles in the area. 30. All arrangements for transportation during construction including provision, maintenance, dismantling and clearing debris, where necessary, will be considered incidental to the work and should be planned and implemented by the contractor as approved and directed by the Engineer. 31. Vehicle/machinery and equipment operations, maintenance and refueling shall be carried out to avoid spillage of fuels and lubricants and ground contamination. An 'oil interceptor" will be provided for wash down and refueling areas. Fuel storage shall be located in proper banded areas. 32. All spills and collected petroleum products shall be disposed off in accordance with standard environmental procedures/guidelines. Fuel storage and refilling areas shall be located at least 300m from all cross drainage structures and important water bodies or as directed by the Engineer. VIII.HIV/AIDS Education 33. The Contractor shall ensure that detection screening of sexually transmitted diseases, especially with regard to HIV/AIDS, amongst laborers is actually carried out and will submit a certificate of compliance. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project K-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex L. Environmental Guidelines30 Agriculture The project is likely to:  Be formulated with a good understanding of the local biophysical and socio- economical and socio-cultural environment.  Use sustainable agricultural practices/approaches/technologies.  Promote the sustainable management and use of biological processes (as agricultural inputs).  Follow the ecosystem approach for sustainable agriculture production and management.  Contribute to protection or conservation of significant areas of land.  Conserve genetic resources/diversity, especially agricultural genetic resources/diversity.  Promote a balanced production system between crops and livestock.  Reduce top-soil losses from erosion and the reduction in soil fertility/soil life.  Induce conservation and efficient use of water.  Reduce misuse of agrochemicals, contributing to a reduction of toxic substances in soil and water.  Introduce techniques for plant nutrition (e.g. IPNS) and plant protection (e.g. IPM).  Induce low energy consumption technologies or promote bioenergy sources.  Involve use of purchased inputs for greater productivity.  Benefit or involve targeted groups (landless farmers, women’s groups, indigenous peoples), taking into consideration farmers’ rights, as appropriate.  Consider the free, prior and informed consent of local stakeholders.  Increase agro-processing capacity.  Protect critical ecosystems or reduce pressure on protected areas.  Secure conservation, sound husbandry of land resources.  Maintain current land management practices.  Promote awareness on the need for mitigation of greenhouse gases and adaptation to climate change.  Recognize climate change trends together with opportunities for mitigation and adaptation.  Be formulated within the framework of national or local sustainable development plans. 30 Source: Environmental Impact Assessment – Guidelines for FAO Field Projects. Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations, Rome, 2011. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project L-1 Environmental and Social Management Framework  Be compatible with principles and obligations of international agricultural conventions (e.g. IT-PGRFA, IPPC).  Avoid changes in water quality and supply downstream of the project area. Links: http://www.fao.org/ag/ca Livestock and animal husbandry The project is likely to:  Maintain forested areas and protect wild-life (particularly for tsetse fly eradication).  Avoid competing land uses or affect prevailing land rights.  Preserve local environment, in particular, as regards disease prevention and habitat impacts.  Avoid stocking rates exceeding the livestock carrying capacity of land and rangeland degradation.  Avoid the dissociation of animal husbandry from mixed farming.  Preserve the loss of traditional practices that conform with sustainable management practices.  Avoid the introduction of new livestock types that do not fit with local farming systems.  Avoid losses of animal genetic resources.  Take into account rotational grazing systems or combined animal husbandry.  Preserve hilly areas or limit soil erosion and compaction problems, such as near waterways.  Avoid untested strains of forage plants.  Avoid unsustainable manure management practices that can result in soil and water contamination.  Avoid risk of disease transmission to other animal species, wildlife and to humans.  Avoid greenhouse gas emissions from the animal food chain.  Avoid risk of disease transmission through poor quarantine and trans-boundary movements.  Be compatible with principles and obligations of international agricultural conventions (e.g. CBD, UN-CCD, Global Plan of Action for Animal Genetic Resources) Links: http://www.fao.org/ag/againfo/resources/en/publications.html http://www.fao.org/ag/againfo/programmes/en/A5.html http://www.fao.org/ag/againfo/themes/en/Environment.html Fertilizers The project is likely to: Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project L-2 Environmental and Social Management Framework  Encourage integrated plant nutrition systems by combining mineral fertilizers with organic inputs such as farmyard or green manure.  Increase the efficiency of fertilizer use while limiting environmental pollution.  Limit fertilizer applications to maximum effective rates taking into account the predominant cropping system, soil conditions, and other intensification factors.  Protect areas or critical aquifers or water bodies (aquifers, sources of freshwater for urban centers).  Promote use of biological nitrogen fixation or other processes that might reduce fertilizer requirements.  Be planned with prior consultation with farmers, indigenous peoples or other local populations.  Create planned environmental benefits as a result of its cumulative effects with other projects.  Encourage crop rotations that recycle nutrients in crop by-products (e.g, straw, haulms), particularly from legumes.  Avoid a shift in cropping pattern as a result of fertilizer introduction.  Avoid the accumulation of excess nutrients in soils, causing the leaching of nutrients into groundwater, and excessive nutrient loading of water surface bodies and wetlands.  Avoid significant changes in land use and water extraction patterns. Links: http://www.fao.org/ag/agl/agll/ipnis/index.asp http://www.fao.org/agriculture/crops/core-themes/theme/spi/plantnutrition/en Pesticides The project is likely to:  Be within provisions of the Rotterdam Convention and national or trans-boundary pest control strategies.  Apply integrated pest management (IPM) techniques and best practices, including use of biological methods, timing of crop sowing, use of pest-resistant varieties etc.  Apply best practice guidelines and standards for safe use and disposal of used pesticides containers and outdated stocks8.  Protect surface and ground water quality, livestock, human health, fish stock, aquatic habitat and wildlife, in particular where run-off is likely to occur.  Promote natural enemies of pests and avoid an increase in pest incidence or creation of new pests.  Take into account beneficial soil micro-organisms and enhance micro-zoo genetic populations.  Ensure conditions by which the application of pesticides is well targeted.  Limit the intense application of systemic chemical pesticides.  Limit handling of chemicals by inexperienced farmers. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project L-3 Environmental and Social Management Framework  Require involvement or strengthening of extension services consultation of affected farmers.  Be designed with prior consultation and participation of affected populations.  Decrease reliance on non-renewable sources of energy.  Create planned environmental benefits as a result of its cumulative effects with other projects.  Require disposal of obsolete pesticides. Links: http://www.fao.org/agriculture/crops/core-themes/theme/pests/pm/en http://www.fao.org/waicent/faoinfo/agricult/agp/agpp/pesticid/disposal/en/103194/index. html http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/ad487e/ad487e00.htm http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2765E/Y2765E00.HTM http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2753E/Y2753E00.HTM http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2757E/Y2757E00.HTM http://www.fao.org/docrep/007/y5774e/y5774e00.htm http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2752E/Y2752E00.HTM http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2751E/Y2751E00.HTM http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2683E/Y2683E00.HTM http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2685E/Y2685E00.HTM http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2686E/Y2686E00.HTM http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2767E/Y2767E00.HTM http://www.fao.org/docrep/006/Y2766E/Y2766E00.HTM Socio-economic dimensions The project is likely to:  Contribute to alleviating poverty for a significant portion of the rural poor population.  Create stable employment or generate new income in agriculture, forestry or fisheries.  Create opportunities for payments for environmental services such as carbon storage.  Facilitate participation, including women, in decision-making that directly or indirectly affects them.  Enhance food security in terms of self-reliance and self-sufficiency.  Ensure rural equity, gender equity, and inter-generational equity.  Be designed and implemented with prior consultation, consent and participation of affected populations.  Introduce new and/or adapted technologies that are environmentally, economically and socially sound.  Introduce preventive measures that reduce degradation of natural resources, protect natural ecosystems and biodiversity, and reduce human risk. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project L-4 Environmental and Social Management Framework  Not establish new institutional mechanisms (policy, legislation, regulations, and institutions).  Increase local and national understanding and knowledge of sustainable development processes.  Develop new models of sustainable management.  Improve local management and technical capabilities.  Catalyze formation of self-reliant local groups.  Build upon experience of settlers in particular ecosystems, farming activities or technologies.  Provide for training, extension and economic incentives to aid settlers in new environments and economic settings.  Consider land rights schemes and existing systems of land use rights. Gender considerations The project is likely to:  Create opportunities for the empowerment of women.  Promote women’s participation in decision-making and ensure that women benefit from the project along with men.  Safeguard the rights and needs of vulnerable or marginalized populations, including women, youth, the elderly or disabled.  Contribute to the equal distribution of resources (land, labour, fertilizer, credit, technology, extension, markets) between men and women.  Draw on the distinct knowledge and skills of men and women.  Take into account the different vulnerabilities of men and women, due to differences in access to resources and different constraints.  Target both men’s and women’s roles and tasks (such as in what animals t hey rear or which crops they grow)so that both men and women are included.  Identify any gender biases in institutions regarding who should receive technology, information and extension services and ensure that both men and women are supported.  Account for the differential impacts of migration on men and women. Links: http://www.fao.org/sd/Seaga/downloads/En/projecten.pdf ftp://ftp.fao.org/docrep/fao/012/i1240e/i1240e00.pdf http://www.fao.org/sd/2001/PE0602a_en.htm http://worldbank.org/genderinag ftp://ftp.fao.org/docrep/fao/012/i1243e/i1243e00.pdf Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project L-5 Environmental and Social Management Framework Annex M. EHS Guidelines The World Bank Group’s EHS Guidelines are presented in the following pages. Pakistan - Sindh Agriculture Growth Project M-1 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION WORLD BANK GROUP Environmental, Health, and Safety General Guidelines Introduction based on the professional opinion of qualified and experienced persons. When host country regulations differ from the levels and The Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines are measures presented in the EHS Guidelines, projects are expected technical reference documents with general and industry-specific to achieve whichever is more stringent. If less stringent levels or examples of Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) 1. When measures than those provided in these EHS Guidelines are one or more members of the World Bank Group are involved in a appropriate, in view of specific project circumstances, a full and project, these EHS Guidelines are applied as required by their detailed justification for any proposed alternatives is needed as part respective policies and standards. These General EHS Guidelines of the site-specific environmental assessment. This justification are designed to be used together with the relevant Industry Sector should demonstrate that the choice for any alternate performance EHS Guidelines which provide guidance to users on EHS issues in levels is protective of human health and the environment. specific industry sectors. For complex projects, use of multiple industry-sector guidelines may be necessary. A complete list of The General EHS Guidelines are organized as follows: industry-sector guidelines can be found at: 1. Environmental 3 www.ifc.org/ifcext/enviro.nsf/Content/EnvironmentalGuidelines 1.1 Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality 3 1.2 Energy Conservation 17 The EHS Guidelines contain the performance levels and measures 1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality 24 1.4 Water Conservation 32 that are generally considered to be achievable in new facilities by 1.5 Hazardous Materials Management 35 1.6 Waste Management 45 existing technology at reasonable costs. Application of the EHS 1.7 Noise 51 Guidelines to existing facilities may involve the establishment of 1.8 Contaminated Land 53 2. Occupational Health and Safety 59 site-specific targets, with an appropriate timetable for achieving 2.1 General Facility Design and Operation 60 2.2 Communication and Training 62 them. The applicability of the EHS Guidelines should be tailored to 2.3 Physical Hazards 64 the hazards and risks established for each project on the basis of 2.4 Chemical Hazards 68 2.5 Biological Hazards 70 the results of an environmental assessment2 in which site-specific 2.6 Radiological Hazards 72 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 72 variables, such as host country context, assimilative capacity of the 2.8 Special Hazard Environments 73 environment, and other project factors, are taken into account. The 2.9 Monitoring 74 3. Community Health and Safety 77 applicability of specific technical recommendations should be 3.1 Water Quality and Availability 77 3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure 78 3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) 79 3.4 Traffic Safety 82 1 Defined as the exercise of professional skill, diligence, prudence and foresight that 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials 82 would be reasonably expected from skilled and experienced professionals engaged 3.6 Disease Prevention 85 in the same type of undertaking under the same or similar circumstances globally. 3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response 86 The circumstances that skilled and experienced professionals may find when 4. Construction and Decommissioning 89 evaluating the range of pollution prevention and control techniques available to a project may include, but are not limited to, varying levels of environmental 4.1 Environment 89 degradation and environmental assimilative capacity as well as varying levels of 4.2 Occupational Health & Safety 92 financial and technical feasibility. 4.3 Community Health & Safety 94 2 For IFC, such assessment is carried out consistent with Performance Standard 1, References and Additional Sources* 96 and for the World Bank, with Operational Policy 4.01. APRIL 30, 2007 1 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: INTRODUCTION WORLD BANK GROUP General Approach to the Management people or to the environmental resources on which they depend. of EHS Issues at the Facility or Project Level • Prioritizing risk management strategies with the objective of achieving an overall reduction of risk to human health and the Effective management of environmental, health, and safety (EHS) environment, focusing on the prevention of irreversible and / or issues entails the inclusion of EHS considerations into corporate- significant impacts. and facility-level business processes in an organized, hierarchical approach that includes the following steps: • Favoring strategies that eliminate the cause of the hazard at its source, for example, by selecting less hazardous materials • Identifying EHS project hazards3 and associated risks4 as or processes that avoid the need for EHS controls. early as possible in the facility development or project cycle, including the incorporation of EHS considerations into the site • When impact avoidance is not feasible, incorporating selection process, product design process, engineering engineering and management controls to reduce or minimize planning process for capital requests, engineering work the possibility and magnitude of undesired consequences, for orders, facility modification authorizations, or layout and example, with the application of pollution controls to reduce process change plans. the levels of emitted contaminants to workers or environments. • Involving EHS professionals, who have the experience, • Preparing workers and nearby communities to respond to competence, and training necessary to assess and manage accidents, including providing technical and financial EHS impacts and risks, and carry out specialized resources to effectively and safely control such events, and environmental management functions including the restoring workplace and community environments to a safe preparation of project or activity-specific plans and procedures and healthy condition. that incorporate the technical recommendations presented in • Improving EHS performance through a combination of ongoing this document that are relevant to the project. monitoring of facility performance and effective accountability. • Understanding the likelihood and magnitude of EHS risks, based on: o The nature of the project activities, such as whether the project will generate significant quantities of emissions or effluents, or involve hazardous materials or processes; o The potential consequences to workers, communities, or the environment if hazards are not adequately managed, which may depend on the proximity of project activities to 3 Defined as “threats to humans and what they value” (Kates, et al., 1985). 4 Defined as “quantitative measures of hazard consequences, usually expressed as conditional probabilities of experiencing harm” (Kates, et. al., 1985) APRIL 30, 2007 2 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP 1.0 Environmental 1.1 Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality the spatial characteristic of the source including point sources, Applicability and Approach ...............................................3 fugitive sources, and mobile sources and, further, by process, Ambient Air Quality ..........................................................4 such as combustion, materials storage, or other industry sector- General Approach....................................................4 specific processes. Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or Ecologically Sensitive Areas........................................................5 Point Sources ..................................................................5 Where possible, facilities and projects should avoid, minimize, and Stack Height.............................................................5 control adverse impacts to human health, safety, and the Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines ....6 Fugitive Sources ..............................................................8 environment from emissions to air. Where this is not possible, the Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs)........................8 generation and release of emissions of any type should be Particulate Matter (PM).............................................8 managed through a combination of: Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) .........................9 Mobile Sources – Land-based ..........................................9 Greenhouse Gases (GHGs).............................................9 • Energy use efficiency Monitoring......................................................................10 • Process modification Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions...11 • Selection of fuels or other materials, the processing of which may result in less polluting emissions • Application of emissions control techniques Applicability and Approach This guideline applies to facilities or projects that generate The selected prevention and control techniques may include one emissions to air at any stage of the project life-cycle. It or more methods of treatment depending on: complements the industry-specific emissions guidance presented in the Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) • Regulatory requirements Guidelines by providing information about common techniques for • Significance of the source emissions management that may be applied to a range of industry • Location of the emitting facility relative to other sources sectors. This guideline provides an approach to the management • Location of sensitive receptors of significant sources of emissions, including specific guidance for • Existing ambient air quality, and potential for degradation of assessment and monitoring of impacts. It is also intended to the airshed from a proposed project provide additional information on approaches to emissions • Technical feasibility and cost effectiveness of the available management in projects located in areas of poor air quality, where options for prevention, control, and release of emissions it may be necessary to establish project-specific emissions standards. Emissions of air pollutants can occur from a wide variety of activities during the construction, operation, and decommissioning phases of a project. These activities can be categorized based on APRIL 30, 2007 3 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP Ambient Air Quality additional, future sustainable development in the same airshed. 12 General Approach At facility level, impacts should be estimated through qualitative or Projects with significant5,6 sources of air emissions, and potential quantitative assessments by the use of baseline air quality for significant impacts to ambient air quality, should prevent or assessments and atmospheric dispersion models to assess minimize impacts by ensuring that: potential ground level concentrations. Local atmospheric, climatic, • Emissions do not result in pollutant concentrations that reach and air quality data should be applied when modeling dispersion, or exceed relevant ambient quality guidelines and standards9 protection against atmospheric downwash, wakes, or eddy effects by applying national legislated standards, or in their absence, of the source, nearby13 structures, and terrain features. The the current WHO Air Quality Guidelines10 (see Table 1.1.1), dispersion model applied should be internationally recognized, or or other internationally recognized sources11; comparable. Examples of acceptable emission estimation and • Emissions do not contribute a significant portion to the dispersion modeling approaches for point and fugitive sources are attainment of relevant ambient air quality guidelines or standards. As a general rule, this Guideline suggests 25 Table 1.1.1: WHO Ambient Air Quality Guidelines 7,8 percent of the applicable air quality standards to allow Averaging Guideline value in Period µ g/m3 Sulfur dioxide (SO2) 24-hour 125 (Interim target-1) 50 (Interim target-2) 20 (guideline) 10 minute 500 (guideline) 5 Significant sources of point and fugitive emissions are considered to be general Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) 1-year 40 (guideline) 1-hour 200 (guideline) sources which, for example, can contribute a net emissions increase of one or more of the following pollutants within a given airshed: PM10: 50 tons per year Particulate Matter 1-year 70 (Interim target-1) (tpy); NOx: 500 tpy; SO2: 500 tpy; or as established through national legislation; PM10 50 (Interim target-2) and combustion sources with an equivalent heat input of 50 MWth or greater. The 30 (Interim target-3) significance of emissions of inorganic and organic pollutants should be established 20 (guideline) on a project-specific basis taking into account toxic and other properties of the pollutant. 24-hour 150 (Interim target-1) 6 United States Environmental Protection Agency, Prevention of Significant 100 (Interim target-2) Deterioration of Air Quality, 40 CFR Ch. 1 Part 52.21. Other references for 75 (Interim target-3) establishing significant emissions include the European Commission. 2000. 50 (guideline) “Guidance Document for EPER implementation.” Particulate Matter 1-year 35 (Interim target-1) http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm ; and Australian Government. 2004. “National Pollutant Inventory Guide.” PM2.5 25 (Interim target-2) http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf 15 (Interim target-3) 7 World Health Organization (WHO). Air Quality Guidelines Global Update, 2005. 10 (guideline) PM 24-hour value is the 99th percentile. 8 Interim targets are provided in recognition of the need for a staged approach to 24-hour 75 (Interim target-1) 50 (Interim target-2) achieving the recommended guidelines. 9 Ambient air quality standards are ambient air quality levels established and 37.5 (Interim target-3) 25 (guideline) published through national legislative and regulatory processes, and ambient Ozone 8-hour daily 160 (Interim target-1) quality guidelines refer to ambient quality levels primarily developed through clinical, toxicological, and epidemiological evidence (such as those published by maximum 100 (guideline) the World Health Organization). 10 Available at World Health Organization (WHO). http://www.who.int/en 12 US EPA Prevention of Significant Deterioration Increments Limits applicable to 11 For example the United States National Ambient Air Quality Standards non-degraded airsheds. (NAAQS) (http://www.epa.gov/air/criteria.html) and the relevant European Council Directives (Council Directive 1999/30/EC of 22 April 1999 / Council Directive 2002/3/EC of February 12 2002). APRIL 30, 2007 4 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP included in Annex 1.1.1. These approaches include screening Point Sources models for single source evaluations (SCREEN3 or AIRSCREEN), Point sources are discrete, stationary, identifiable sources of as well as more complex and refined models (AERMOD OR emissions that release pollutants to the atmosphere. They are ADMS). Model selection is dependent on the complexity and geo- typically located in manufacturing or production plants. Within a morphology of the project site (e.g. mountainous terrain, urban or given point source, there may be several individual ‘emission rural area). points’ that comprise the point source.15 Projects Located in Degraded Airsheds or Point sources are characterized by the release of air pollutants Ecologically Sensitive Areas typically associated with the combustion of fossil fuels, such as Facilities or projects located within poor quality airsheds14, and nitrogen oxides (NOx), sulfur dioxide (SO2), carbon monoxide within or next to areas established as ecologically sensitive (e.g. (CO), and particulate matter (PM), as well as other air pollutants national parks), should ensure that any increase in pollution levels including certain volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and metals is as small as feasible, and amounts to a fraction of the applicable that may also be associated with a wide range of industrial short-term and annual average air quality guidelines or standards activities. as established in the project-specific environmental assessment. Emissions from point sources should be avoided and controlled Suitable mitigation measures may also include the relocation of according to good international industry practice (GIIP) applicable significant sources of emissions outside the airshed in question, to the relevant industry sector, depending on ambient conditions, use of cleaner fuels or technologies, application of comprehensive through the combined application of process modifications and pollution control measures, offset activities at installations emissions controls, examples of which are provided in Annex controlled by the project sponsor or other facilities within the same 1.1.2. Additional recommendations regarding stack height and airshed, and buy-down of emissions within the same airshed. emissions from small combustion facilities are provided below. Specific provisions for minimizing emissions and their impacts in Stack Height poor air quality or ecologically sensitive airsheds should be The stack height for all point sources of emissions, whether established on a project-by-project or industry-specific basis. ‘significant’ or not, should be designed according to GIIP (see Offset provisions outside the immediate control of the project Annex 1.1.3) to avoid excessive ground level concentrations due sponsor or buy-downs should be monitored and enforced by the to downwash, wakes, and eddy effects, and to ensure reasonable local agency responsible for granting and monitoring emission diffusion to minimize impacts. For projects where there are permits. Such provisions should be in place prior to final multiple sources of emissions, stack heights should be established commissioning of the facility / project. with due consideration to emissions from all other project sources, both point and fugitive. Non-significant sources of emissions, 13 “Nearby” generally considers an area within a radius of up to 20 times the stack 15 Emission points refer to a specific stack, vent, or other discrete point of pollution height. release. This term should not be confused with point source, which is a regulatory 14 An airshed should be considered as having poor air quality if nationally distinction from area and mobile sources. The characterization of point sources into multiple emissions points is useful for allowing more detailed reporting of legislated air quality standards or WHO Air Quality Guidelines are exceeded emissions information. significantly. APRIL 30, 2007 5 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP including small combustion sources,16 should also use GIIP in stack design. Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines Small combustion processes are systems designed to deliver electrical or mechanical power, steam, heat, or any combination of these, regardless of the fuel type, with a total, rated heat input capacity of between three Megawatt thermal (MWth) and 50 MWth. The emissions guidelines in Table 1.1.2 are applicable to small combustion process installations operating more than 500 hours per year, and those with an annual capacity utilization of more than 30 percent. Plants firing a mixture of fuels should compare emissions performance with these guidelines based on the sum of the relative contribution of each applied fuel17. Lower emission values may apply if the proposed facility is located in an ecologically sensitive airshed, or airshed with poor air quality, in order to address potential cumulative impacts from the installation of more than one small combustion plant as part of a distributed generation project. 16 Small combustion sources are those with a total rated heat input capacity of 50MWth or less. 17 The contribution of a fuel is the percentage of heat input (LHV) provided by this fuel multiplied by its limit value. APRIL 30, 2007 6 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP Table 1.1.2 - Small Combustion Facilities Emissions Guidelines (3MWth – 50MWth) – (in mg/Nm3 or as indicated) Combustion Technology / Dry Gas, Excess Particulate Matter (PM) Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) Fuel O2 Content (%) Engine 200 (Spark Ignition) Gas N/A N/A 400 (Dual Fuel) 15 1,600 (Compression Ignition) 1.5 percent Sulfur or up to 3.0 percent Sulfur if 50 or up to 100 if justified by project specific If bore size diameter [mm] < 400: 1460 justified by project specific considerations (e.g. considerations (e.g. Economic feasibility of (or up to 1,600 if justified to maintain high Economic feasibility of using lower S content fuel, Liquid using lower ash content fuel, or adding energy efficiency.) 15 or adding secondary treatment to meet levels of secondary treatment to meet 50, and using 1.5 percent Sulfur, and available available environmental capacity of the site) If bore size diameter [mm] > or = 400: 1,850 environmental capacity of the site) Turbine Natural Gas 42 ppm (Electric generation) N/A N/A 15 =3MWth to < 15MWth 100 ppm (Mechanical drive) Natural Gas N/A N/A 25 ppm 15 =15MWth to < 50MWth 0.5 percent Sulfur or lower percent Sulfur (e.g. 0.2 Fuels other than Natural Gas 96 ppm (Electric generation) N/A percent Sulfur) if commercially available without 15 =3MWth to < 15MWth 150 ppm (Mechanical drive) significant excess fuel cost Fuels other than Natural Gas 0.5% S or lower % S (0.2%S) if commercially N/A 74 ppm 15 =15MWth to < 50MWth available without significant excess fuel cost Boiler Gas N/A N/A 320 3 50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental Liquid 2000 460 3 assessment 50 or up to 150 if justified by environmental Solid 2000 650 6 assessment Notes: -N/A/ - no emissions guideline; Higher performance levels than these in the Table should be applicable to facilities located in urban / industrial areas with degraded airsheds or close to ecologically sensitive areas where more stringent emissions controls may be needed.; MWth is heat input on HHV basis; Solid fuels include biomass; Nm 3 is at one atmosphere pressure, 0°C.; MWth category is to apply to the entire facility consisting of multiple units that are reasonably considered to be emitted from a common stack except for NOx and PM limits for turbines and boilers. Guidelines values apply to facilities operating more than 500 hours per year with an annual capacity utilization factor of more than 30 percent. APRIL 30, 2007 7 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP • Implementing a leak detection and repair (LDAR) program Fugitive Sources that controls fugitive emissions by regularly monitoring to Fugitive source air emissions refer to emissions that are detect leaks, and implementing repairs within a predefined distributed spatially over a wide area and not confined to a specific time period.18 discharge point. They originate in operations where exhausts are For VOC emissions associated with handling of chemicals in open not captured and passed through a stack. Fugitive emissions have vats and mixing processes, the recommended prevention and the potential for much greater ground-level impacts per unit than control techniques include: stationary source emissions, since they are discharged and dispersed close to the ground. The two main types of fugitive • Substitution of less volatile substances, such as aqueous emissions are Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) and solvents; particulate matter (PM). Other contaminants (NOx, SO2 and CO) • Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent are mainly associated with combustion processes, as described treatment of gas stream by removing VOCs with control above. Projects with potentially significant fugitive sources of devices such as condensers or activated carbon absorption; emissions should establish the need for ambient quality • Collection of vapors through air extractors and subsequent assessment and monitoring practices. treatment with destructive control devices such as: o Catalytic Incinerators: Used to reduce VOCs from Open burning of solid wastes, whether hazardous or non- process exhaust gases exiting paint spray booths, hazardous, is not considered good practice and should be ovens, and other process operations avoided, as the generation of polluting emissions from this type of o Thermal Incinerators: Used to control VOC levels in a source cannot be controlled effectively. gas stream by passing the stream through a combustion chamber where the VOCs are burned in air at Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) temperatures between 700º C to 1,300º C The most common sources of fugitive VOC emissions are o Enclosed Oxidizing Flares: Used to convert VOCs into associated with industrial activities that produce, store, and use CO2 and H2O by way of direct combustion VOC-containing liquids or gases where the material is under pressure, exposed to a lower vapor pressure, or displaced from an • Use of floating roofs on storage tanks to reduce the enclosed space. Typical sources include equipment leaks, open opportunity for volatilization by eliminating the headspace vats and mixing tanks, storage tanks, unit operations in present in conventional storage tanks. wastewater treatment systems, and accidental releases. Particulate Matter (PM) Equipment leaks include valves, fittings, and elbows which are The most common pollutant involved in fugitive emissions is dust subject to leaks under pressure. The recommended prevention or particulate matter (PM). This is released during certain and control techniques for VOC emissions associated with operations, such as transport and open storage of solid materials, equipment leaks include: and from exposed soil surfaces, including unpaved roads. • Equipment modifications, examples of which are presented in Annex 1.1.4; 18 For more information, see Leak Detection and Repair Program (LDAR), at: http://www.ldar.net APRIL 30, 2007 8 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP Recommended prevention and control of these emissions sources programs. In the absence of these, the following approach should include: be considered: • Use of dust control methods, such as covers, water • Regardless of the size or type of vehicle, fleet owners / suppression, or increased moisture content for open operators should implement the manufacturer recommended materials storage piles, or controls, including air extraction engine maintenance programs; and treatment through a baghouse or cyclone for material • Drivers should be instructed on the benefits of driving handling sources, such as conveyors and bins; practices that reduce both the risk of accidents and fuel • Use of water suppression for control of loose materials on consumption, including measured acceleration and driving paved or unpaved road surfaces. Oil and oil by-products is within safe speed limits; not a recommended method to control road dust. Examples • Operators with fleets of 120 or more units of heavy duty of additional control options for unpaved roads include those vehicles (buses and trucks), or 540 or more light duty summarized in Annex 1.1.5. vehicles21 (cars and light trucks) within an airshed should consider additional ways to reduce potential impacts Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) including: Several chemicals are classified as ozone depleting substances o Replacing older vehicles with newer, more fuel efficient (ODSs) and are scheduled for phase-out under the Montreal alternatives Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer.19 No new o Converting high-use vehicles to cleaner fuels, where systems or processes should be installed using CFCs, halons, feasible 1,1,1-trichloroethane, carbon tetrachloride, methyl bromide or o Installing and maintaining emissions control devices, HBFCs. HCFCs should only be considered as interim / bridging such as catalytic converters alternatives as determined by the host country commitments and o Implementing a regular vehicle maintenance and repair regulations.20 program Mobile Sources – Land-based Greenhouse Gases (GHGs) Similar to other combustion processes, emissions from vehicles Sectors that may have potentially significant emissions of include CO, NOx, SO2, PM and VOCs. Emissions from on-road greenhouse gases (GHGs)22 include energy, transport, heavy and off-road vehicles should comply with national or regional industry (e.g. cement production, iron / steel manufacturing, aluminum smelting, petrochemical industries, petroleum refining, fertilizer manufacturing), agriculture, forestry and waste 19 Examples include: chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs); halons; 1,1,1-trichloroethane management. GHGs may be generated from direct emissions (methyl chloroform); carbon tetrachloride; hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs); hydrobromofluorocarbons (HBFCs); and methyl bromide. They are currently used in a variety of applications including: domestic, commercial, and process refrigeration (CFCs and HCFCs); domestic, commercial, and motor vehicle air 21 The selected fleet size thresholds are assumed to represent potentially conditioning (CFCs and HCFCs); for manufacturing foam products (CFCs); for significant sources of emissions based on individual vehicles traveling 100,000 km solvent cleaning applications (CFCs, HCFCs, methyl chloroform, and carbon / yr using average emission factors. tetrachloride); as aerosol propellants (CFCs); in fire protection systems (halons 22 The six greenhouse gases that form part of the Kyoto Protocol to the United and HBFCs); and as crop fumigants (methyl bromide). Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change include carbon dioxide (C02); 20 Additional information is available through the Montreal Protocol Secretariat methane (CH4); nitrous oxide (N 2O); hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs); perfluorocarbons web site available at: http://ozone.unep.org/ (PFCs); and sulfur hexafluoride (SF 6). APRIL 30, 2007 9 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP from facilities within the physical project boundary and indirect decisions to be made based on the data and the consequences of emissions associated with the off-site production of power used by making an incorrect decision, the time and geographic the project. boundaries, and the quality of data needed to make a correct decision.25 The air quality monitoring program should consider Recommendations for reduction and control of greenhouse gases include: the following elements: • Carbon financing;23 • Monitoring parameters: The monitoring parameters selected should reflect the pollutants of concern associated with • Enhancement of energy efficiency (see section on project processes. For combustion processes, indicator ‘Energy Conservation’); parameters typically include the quality of inputs, such as the • Protection and enhancement of sinks and reservoirs of sulfur content of fuel. greenhouse gases; • Promotion of sustainable forms of agriculture and • Baseline calculations: Before a project is developed, baseline forestry; air quality monitoring at and in the vicinity of the site should • Promotion, development and increased use of be undertaken to assess background levels of key pollutants, renewable forms of energy; in order to differentiate between existing ambient conditions • Carbon capture and storage technologies;24 and project-related impacts. • Limitation and / or reduction of methane emissions • Monitoring type and frequency: Data on emissions and through recovery and use in waste management, as well ambient air quality generated through the monitoring program as in the production, transport and distribution of energy should be representative of the emissions discharged by the (coal, oil, and gas). project over time. Examples of time-dependent variations in the manufacturing process include batch process Monitoring manufacturing and seasonal process variations. Emissions Emissions and air quality monitoring programs provide information from highly variable processes may need to be sampled that can be used to assess the effectiveness of emissions more frequently or through composite methods. Emissions management strategies. A systematic planning process is monitoring frequency and duration may also range from recommended to ensure that the data collected are adequate for continuous for some combustion process operating their intended purposes (and to avoid collecting unnecessary parameters or inputs (e.g. the quality of fuel) to less frequent, data). This process, sometimes referred to as a data quality monthly, quarterly or yearly stack tests. objectives process, defines the purpose of collecting the data, the • Monitoring locations: Ambient air quality monitoring may 23 Carbon financing as a carbon emissions reduction strategy may include the host consists of off-site or fence line monitoring either by the government-endorsed Clean Development Mechanism or Joint Implementation of project sponsor, the competent government agency, or by the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change. 24 Carbon dioxide capture and storage (CCS) is a process consisting of the collaboration between both. The location of ambient air separation of CO2 from industrial and energy-related sources; transport to a storage location; and long-term isolation from the atmosphere, for example in geological formations, in the ocean, or in mineral carbonates (reaction of CO2 with metal oxides in silicate minerals to produce stable carbonates). It is the object of 25 See, for example, United States Environmental Protection Agency, Guidance on intensive research worldwide (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change Systematic Planning Using the Data Quality Objectives Process EPA QA/G-4, (IPCC), Special Report, Carbon Dioxide Capture and Storage (2006). EPA/240/B-06/001 February 2006. APRIL 30, 2007 10 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP quality monitoring stations should be established based on o If Annual Stack Emission Testing demonstrates results the results of scientific methods and mathematical models to consistently and significantly better than the required estimate potential impact to the receiving airshed from an levels, frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can emissions source taking into consideration such aspects as be reduced from annual to every two or three years. the location of potentially affected communities and o Emission Monitoring: None prevailing wind directions. Boilers with capacities between =20 MWth and < 50 MWth • Sampling and analysis methods : Monitoring programs should o Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For apply national or international methods for sample collection gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be and analysis, such as those published by the International calculated based on fuel quality certification (if no SO2 Organization for Standardization,26 the European Committee control equipment is used) for Standardization,27 or the U.S. Environmental Protection o Emission Monitoring: SO2. Plants with SO2 control Agency.28 Sampling should be conducted by, or under, the equipment: Continuous. NOx: Continuous monitoring of supervision of trained individuals. Analysis should be either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using conducted by entities permitted or certified for this purpose. combustion parameters. PM: Continuous monitoring of Sampling and analysis Quality Assurance / Quality Control either PM emissions, opacity, or indicative PM (QA/QC) plans should be applied and documented to ensure emissions using combustion parameters / visual that data quality is adequate for the intended data use (e.g., monitoring. method detection limits are below levels of concern). • Additional recommended monitoring approaches for Monitoring reports should include QA/QC documentation. turbines : o Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx and SO2 (NOx Monitoring of Small Combustion Plants Emissions only for gaseous fuel-fired turbines). • Additional recommended monitoring approaches for boilers : o If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show Boilers with capacities between =3 MWth and < 20 MWth: constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g. o Annual Stack Emission Testing: SO2, NOx and PM. For less than 75 percent) better than the required levels, gaseous fuel-fired boilers, only NOx. SO2 can be frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be calculated based on fuel quality certification if no SO2 reduced from annual to every two or three years. control equipment is used. o Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using 26 An on-line catalogue of ISO standards relating to the environment, health combustion parameters.SO2: Continuous monitoring if protection, and safety is available at: SO2 control equipment is used. http://www.iso.org/iso/en/CatalogueListPage.CatalogueList?ICS1=13&ICS2=&ICS 3=&scopelist= • Additional recommended monitoring approaches for 27 An on-line catalogue of European Standards is available at: http://www.cen.eu/catweb/cwen.htm . engines: 28 The National Environmental Methods Index provides a searchable o Annual Stack Emission Testing: NOx ,SO2 and PM (NOx clearinghouse of U.S. methods and procedures for both regulatory and non- regulatory monitoring purposes for water, sediment, air and tissues, and is only for gaseous fuel-fired diesel engines). available at http://www.nemi.gov/. APRIL 30, 2007 11 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP o If Annual Stack Emission Testing results show constantly (3 consecutive years) and significantly (e.g. less than 75 percent) better than the required levels, frequency of Annual Stack Emission Testing can be reduced from annual to every two or three years. o Emission Monitoring: NOx: Continuous monitoring of either NOx emissions or indicative NOx emissions using combustion parameters. SO2: Continuous monitoring if SO2 control equipment is used. PM: Continuous monitoring of either PM emissions or indicative PM emissions using operating parameters. APRIL 30, 2007 12 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP Annex 1.1.1 – Air Emissions Estimation and Dispersion Modeling Methods The following is a partial list of documents to aid in the estimation of air emissions from various processes and air dispersion models: Australian Emission Estimation Technique Manuals http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/ Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook, UN / ECE / EMEP and the European Environment Agency http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm Emission factors and emission estimation methods, US EPA Office of Air Quality Planning & Standards http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief Guidelines on Air Quality Models (Revised), US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 2005 http://www.epa.gov/scram001/guidance/guide/appw_05.pdf Frequently Asked Questions, Air Quality Modeling and Assessment Unit (AQMAU), UK Environment Agency http://www.environment- agency.gov.uk/subjects/airquality/236092/?version=1&lang=_e OECD Database on Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals http://www.olis.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf/ APRIL 30, 2007 13 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP Annex 1.1.2 – Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies Principal Sources and Issues General Prevention / Process Reduction Gas Control Options Comments Modification Approach Efficiency (%) Condition Particulate Matter (PM) Main sources are the combustion of fossil Fuel switching (e.g. selection of lower sulfur Fabric Filters 99 - 99.7% Dry gas, temp Applicability depends on flue gas properties including temperature, chemical fuels and numerous manufacturing processes fuels) or reducing the amount of fine <400F properties, abrasion and load. Typical air to cloth ratio range of 2.0 to 3.5 cfm/ft2 that collect PM through air extraction and particulates added to a process. ventilation systems. Volcanoes, ocean spray, Achievable outlet concentrations of 23 mg/Nm 3 forest fires and blowing dust (most prevalent in dry and semiarid climates) contribute to Electrostatic 97 – 99% Varies Precondition gas to remove large particles. Efficiency dependent on resistivity of background levels. Precipitator (ESP) depending of particle. Achievable outlet concentration of 23 mg/Nm3 particle type Cyclone 74 – 95% None Most efficient for large particles. Achievable outlet concentrations of 30 - 40 mg/Nm 3 Wet Scrubber 93 – 95% None Wet sludge may be a disposal problem depending on local infrastructure. Achievable outlet concentrations of 30 - 40 mg/Nm3 Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) Mainly produced by the combustion of fuels Control system selection is heavily Fuel Switching >90% Alternate fuels may include low sulfur coal, light diesel or natural gas with such as oil and coal and as a by-product from dependent on the inlet concentration. For consequent reduction in particulate emissions related to sulfur in the fuel. Fuel some chemical production or wastewater SO2 concentrations in excess of 10%, the cleaning or beneficiation of fuels prior to combustion is another viable option but treatment processes. stream is passed through an acid plant not may have economic consequences. only to lower the SO2 emissions but also to generate high grade sulfur for sale. Levels Sorbent Injection 30% - 70% Calcium or lime is injected into the flue gas and the SO2 is adsorbed onto the below 10% are not rich enough for this sorbent process and should therefore utilize absorption or ‘scrubbing,’ where SO2 Dry Flue Gas 70%-90% Can be regenerable or throwaway. molecules are captured into a liquid phase Desulfurization or adsorption, where SO2 molecules are captured on the surface of a solid Wet Flue Gas >90% Produces gypsum as a by-product adsorbent. Desulfurization APRIL 30, 2007 14 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP Annex 1.1.2: Illustrative Point Source Air Emissions Prevention and Control Technologies (continued) Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) Percent Reduction by Fuel Type Comments Combustion modification Associated with combustion of fuel. Coal Oil Gas These modifications are capable of reducing NOx emissions by 50 (Illustrative of boilers) May occur in several forms of nitrogen to 95%. The method of combustion control used depends on the oxide; namely nitric oxide (NO), Low-excess-air firing 10–30 10–30 10–30 type of boiler and the method of firing fuel. nitrogen dioxide (NO2) and nitrous oxide (N2O), which is also a Staged Combustion 20–50 20–50 20–50 greenhouse gas. The term NOx Flue Gas Recirculation N/A 20–50 20–50 serves as a composite between NO and NO2 and emissions are usually Water/Steam Injection N/A 10–50 N/A. reported as NOx. Here the NO is multiplied by the ratio of molecular Low-NOx Burners 30–40 30–40 30–40 weights of NO2 to NO and added to Flue Gas Treatment Coal Oil Gas the NO2 emissions. Flue gas treatment is more effective in reducing NOx emissions than are combustion controls. Techniques can be classified as Means of reducing NOx emissions are SCR, SNCR, and adsorption. SCR involves the injection of based on the modification of operating Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) 60–90 60–90 60–90 ammonia as a reducing agent to convert NOx to nitrogen in the conditions such as minimizing the presence of a catalyst in a converter upstream of the air heater. resident time at peak temperatures, Selective Non-Catalytic Reduction N/A 30–70 30–70 Generally, some ammonia slips through and is part of the reducing the peak temperatures by (SNCR) emissions. SNCR also involves the injection of ammonia or urea increasing heat transfer rates or based products without the presence of a catalyst. minimizing the availability of oxygen. Note: Compiled by IFC based on inputs from technical experts. APRIL 30, 2007 15 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP Annex 1.1.3 - Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) Annex 1.1.4 - Examples of VOC Emissions Controls Stack Height (Based on United States 40 CFR, part 51.100 (ii)). Approximate HG = H + 1.5L; where Control Equipment Type Modification Efficiency HG = GEP stack height measured from the ground level (%) elevation at the base of the stack Seal-less design 10029 H = Height of nearby structure(s) above the base of the stack. Closed-vent system 9030 Pumps L = Lesser dimension, height (h) or width (w), of nearby Dual mechanical seal with barrier fluid structures maintained at a higher 100 “Nearby structures” = Structures within/touching a radius pressure than the pumped fluid of 5L but less than 800 m. Closed-vent system 90 Dual mechanical seal Compressors with barrier fluid maintained at a higher 100 Projected width (w) pressure than the Stack compressed gas Closed-vent system Variable31 Pressure Relief Devices Rupture disk assembly 100 Valves Seal-less design 100 Connectors Weld together 100 1.5*L HG Blind, cap, plug, or Open-ended Lines 100 second valve h Sampling Connections Closed-loop sampling 100 H Note: Examples of technologies are provided for illustrative purposes. The availability and applicability of any particular technology will vary Maximum 5*L depending on manufacturer specifications. 29 Seal-less equipment can be a large source of emissions in the event of equipment failure. 30 Actual efficiency of a closed-vent system depends on percentage of vapors collected and efficiency of control device to which the vapors are routed. 31 Control efficiency of closed vent-systems installed on a pressure relief device may be lower than other closed-vent systems. APRIL 30, 2007 16 Environmental, Health, and Safety Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL AIR EMISSIONS AND AMBIENT AIR QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP Annex 1.1.5 - Fugitive PM Emissions Controls Control Control Type Efficiency Chemical Stabilization 0% - 98% Hygroscopic salts 60% - 96% Bitumens/adhesives Surfactants 0% - 68% Wet Suppression – Watering 12% - 98% Speed Reduction 0% - 80% Traffic Reduction Not quantified Paving (Asphalt / Concrete) 85% - 99% Covering with Gravel, Slag, or "Road 30% - 50% Carpet" Vacuum Sweeping 0% - 58% Water Flushing/Broom Sweeping 0% - 96% APRIL 30, 2007 17 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP 1.2 Energy Conservation should also evaluate energy conservation opportunities arising Applicability and Approach .............................................18 from manufacturing process modifications. Energy Management Programs...............................18 Energy Efficiency....................................................18 Process Heating.............................................................19 Energy Management Programs Heating Load Reduction .........................................19 Energy management programs should include the following Heat Distribution Systems.......................................19 elements: Energy Conversion System Efficiency Improvements20 Process Cooling.............................................................20 • Identification, and regular measurement and reporting of Load Reduction......................................................21 principal energy flows within a facility at unit process level Energy Conversion.................................................21 Refrigerant Compression Efficiency ........................23 • Preparation of mass and energy balance; Refrigeration System Auxiliaries..............................23 • Definition and regular review of energy performance Compressed Air Systems...............................................24 targets, which are adjusted to account for changes in major Load reduction .......................................................24 Distribution.............................................................24 influencing factors on energy use • Regular comparison and monitoring of energy flows with Applicability and Approach performance targets to identify where action should be taken to reduce energy use This guideline applies to facilities or projects that consume energy in process heating and cooling; process and auxiliary • Regular review of targets, which may include comparison with benchmark data, to confirm that targets are set at systems, such as motors, pumps, and fans; compressed air appropriate levels systems and heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems (HVAC); and lighting systems. It complements the industry- Energy Efficiency specific emissions guidance presented in the Industry Sector For any energy-using system, a systematic analysis of energy Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines by efficiency improvements and cost reduction opportunities should providing information about common techniques for energy include a hierarchical examination of opportunities to : conservation that may be applied to a range of industry sectors. • Demand/Load Side Management by reducing loads on the Energy management at the facility level should be viewed in the energy system context of overall consumption patterns, including those • Supply Side Management by: associated with production processes and supporting utilities, as o Reduce losses in energy distribution well as overall impacts associated with emissions from power o Improve energy conversion efficiency sources. The following section provides guidance on energy o Exploit energy purchasing opportunities management with a focus on common utility systems often o Use lower-carbon fuels representing technical and financially feasible opportunities for improvement in energy conservation. However, operations APRIL 30, 2007 18 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP Common opportunities in each of these areas are summarized • Review opportunities to schedule work flow to limit the below.32 need for process reheating between stages • Operate furnaces/ovens at slight positive pressure, and Process Heating maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the heated Process heating is vital to many manufacturing processes, system, thereby reducing the energy required to heat including heating for fluids, calcining, drying, heat treating, metal unnecessary air to system operating temperature heating, melting, melting agglomeration, curing, and forming33. • Reduce radiant heat losses by sealing structural openings and keep viewing ports closed when not in use In process heating systems, a system heat and mass balance • Where possible, use the system for long runs close to or at will show how much of the system’s energy input provides true operating capacity process heating, and quantify fuel used to satisfy energy losses • Consider use of high emissivity coatings of high caused by excessive parasitic loads, distribution, or conversion temperature insulation, and consequent reduction in losses. Examination of savings opportunities should be directed process temperature by the results of the heat and mass balance, though the • Near net weight and shape heat designs following techniques are often valuable and cost-effective. • Robust Quality assurance on input material • Robust Scheduled maintenance programs Heating Load Reduction • Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat losses through Heat Distribution Systems furnace/oven etc. structure Heat distribution in process heating applications typically takes • Recover heat from hot process or exhaust streams to place through steam, hot water, or thermal fluid systems. reduce system loads Losses can be reduced through the following actions: • In intermittently-heated systems, consider use of low thermal mass insulation to reduce energy required to heat • Promptly repair distribution system leaks the system structure to operating temperature • Avoid steam leaks despite a perceived need to get steam • Control process temperature and other parameters through the turbine. Electricity purchase is usually cheaper accurately to avoid, for example, overheating or overdrying overall, especially when the cost to treat turbine-quality • Examine opportunities to use low weight and/or low boiler feed water is included. If the heat-power ratio of the thermal mass product carriers, such as heated shapers, distribution process is less than that of power systems, kiln cars etc. opportunities should be considered to increase the ratio; for example, by using low-pressure steam to drive absorption cooling systems rather than using electrically-driven vapor- 32 Additional guidance on energy efficiency is available from sources such as Natural Resources Canada (NRCAN compression systems. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/new- buildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20); the European Union (EUROPA. • Regularly verify correct operation of steam traps in steam http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm ), and United States Department of Energy (US DOE, systems, and ensure that traps are not bypassed. Since http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html). 33 US DOE. http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html APRIL 30, 2007 19 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP steam traps typically last approximately 5 years, 20% • Maintain clean heat transfer surfaces; in steam boilers, flue should be replaced or repaired annually gases should be no more than 20 K above steam • Insulate distribution system vessels, such as hot wells and temperature) de-aerators, in steam systems and thermal fluid or hot • In steam boiler systems, use economizers to recover heat water storage tanks from flue gases to pre-heat boiler feed water or combustion • Insulate all steam, condensate, hot water and thermal fluid air distribution pipework, down to and including 1” (25 mm) • Consider reverse osmosis or electrodialysis feed water diameter pipe, in addition to insulating all hot valves and treatment to minimize the requirement for boiler blowdown flanges • Adopt automatic (continuous) boiler blowdown • In steam systems, return condensate to the boiler house • Recover heat from blowdown systems through flash steam for re-use, since condensate is expensive boiler-quality recovery or feed-water preheat water and valuable beyond its heat content alone • Do not supply excessive quantities of steam to the de- • Use flash steam recovery systems to reduce losses due to aerator evaporation of high-pressure condensate • With fired heaters, consider opportunities to recover heat to • Consider steam expansion through a back-pressure turbine combustion air through the use of recuperative or rather than reducing valve stations regenerative burner systems • Eliminate distribution system losses by adopting point-of- • For systems operating for extended periods (> 6000 use heating systems hours/year), cogeneration of electrical power, heat and /or cooling can be cost effective Energy Conversion System Efficiency • Oxy Fuel burners Improvements • Oxygen enrichment/injection The following efficiency opportunities should be examined for • Use of turbolators in boilers process furnaces or ovens, and utility systems, such as boilers • Sizing design and use of multiple boilers for different load and fluid heaters: configurations • Regularly monitor CO, oxygen or CO2 content of flue • Fuel quality control/fuel blending gases to verify that combustion systems are using the minimum practical excess air volumes Process Cooling • Consider combustion automation using oxygen-trim The general methodology outlined above should be applied to controls process cooling systems. Commonly used and cost-effective • Minimize the number of boilers or heaters used to meet measures to improve process cooling efficiency are described loads. It is typically more efficient to run one boiler at 90% below. of capacity than two at 45%. Minimize the number of boilers kept at hot–standby • Use flue dampers to eliminate ventilation losses from hot boilers held at standby APRIL 30, 2007 20 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP Load Reduction o Planting trees as thermal shields around buildings • Ensure adequate insulation to reduce heat gains through o Installing timers and/or thermostats and/or cooling system structure and to below-ambient temperature enthalpy-based control systems refrigerant pipes and vessels o Installing ventilation heat recovery systems34 • Control process temperature accurately to avoid overcooling Energy Conversion The efficiency of refrigeration service provision is normally • Operate cooling tunnels at slight positive pressure and discussed in terms of Coefficient of Performance (“COP”), which maintain air seals to reduce air in-leakage into the cooled is the ratio of cooling duty divided by input power. COP is system, thus reducing the energy required to cool this maximized by effective refrigeration system design and unnecessary air to system operating temperature increased refrigerant compression efficiency, as well as • Examine opportunities to pre-cool using heat recovery to a minimization of the temperature difference through which the process stream requiring heating, or by using a higher system works and of auxiliary loads (i.e. those in addition to temperature cooling utility compressor power demand) used to operate the refrigeration • In cold and chill stores, minimize heat gains to the cooled system. space by use of air curtains, entrance vestibules, or rapidly opening/closing doors. Where conveyors carry products System Design into chilled areas, minimize the area of transfer openings, • If process temperatures are above ambient for all, or part, for example, by using strip curtains of the year, use of ambient cooling systems, such as • Quantify and minimize “incidental” cooling loads, for provided by cooling towers or dry air coolers, may be example, those due to evaporator fans, other machinery, appropriate, perhaps supplemented by refrigeration in defrost systems and lighting in cooled spaces, circulation summer conditions. fans in cooling tunnels, or secondary refrigerant pumps • Most refrigeration systems are electric-motor driven vapor (e.g. chilled water, brines, glycols) compression systems using positive displacement or • Do not use refrigeration for auxiliary cooling duties, such as centrifugal compressors. The remainder of this guideline compressor cylinder head or oil cooling relates primarily to vapor-compression systems. However, • While not a thermal load, ensure there is no gas bypass of when a cheap or free heat source is available (e.g. waste the expansion valve since this imposes compressor load heat from an engine-driven generator—low-pressure steam while providing little effective cooling • In the case of air conditioning applications, energy 34 More information on HVAC energy efficiency can be found at the British efficiency techniques include: Columbia Building Corporation (Woolliams, 2002. http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategi o Placing air intakes and air-conditioning units in cool, es_guide.pdf), NRCAN’s EnerGuide (http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N) shaded locations and NRCAN’s Energy Star Programs (http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&pri o Improving building insulation including seals, vents, ntview=N#AC ), and the US Energy Star Program windows, and doors (http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines). APRIL 30, 2007 21 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP that has passed through a back-pressure turbine), temperature is indicative of an appropriately sized absorption refrigeration may be appropriate. evaporator. When cooling liquids, 2K between leaving • Exploit high cooling temperature range: precooling by liquid and evaporating temperatures can be achieved, ambient and/or ‘high temperature’ refrigeration before final though a 4K difference is generally indicative of a cooling can reduce refrigeration capital and running costs. generously-sized evaporator. High cooling temperature range also provides an • Keep the evaporator clean. When cooling air, ensure opportunity for countercurrent (cascade) cooling, which correct defrost operation. In liquid cooling, monitor reduces refrigerant flow needs. refrigerant/process temperature differences and compare • Keep ‘hot’ and ‘cold’ fluids separate, for example, do not with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger mix water leaving the chiller with water returning from contamination by scale or oil. cooling circuits. • Ensure oil is regularly removed from the evaporator, and • In low-temperature systems where high temperature that oil additions and removals balance. differences are inevitable, consider two-stage or compound • Avoid the use of back-pressure valves. compression, or economized screw compressors, rather • Adjust expansion valves to minimize suction superheat than single-stage compression. consistent with avoidance of liquid carry-over to compressors. Minimizing Temperature Differences • Ensure that an appropriate refrigerant charge volume is A vapor-compression refrigeration system raises the present. temperature of the refrigerant from somewhat below the lowest process temperature (the evaporating temperature) to provide Reducing Condensing Temperature process cooling, to a higher temperature (the condensing • Consider whether to use air-cooled or evaporation-based temperature), somewhat above ambient, to facilitate heat cooling (e.g. evaporative or water cooled condensers and rejection to the air or cooling water systems. Increasing cooling towers). Air-cooled evaporators usually have evaporating temperature typically increases compressor cooling higher condensing temperatures, hence higher compressor capacity without greatly affecting power consumption. Reducing energy use, and auxiliary power consumption, especially in condensing temperature increases evaporator cooling capacity low humidity climates. If a wet system is used, ensure and substantially reduces compressor power consumption. adequate treatment to prevent growth of legionella bacteria. Elevating Evaporating Temperature • Whichever basic system is chosen, select a relatively large • Select a large evaporator to permit relatively low condenser to minimize differences between condensing temperature differences between process and evaporating and the heat sink temperatures. Condensing temperatures temperatures. Ensure that energy use of auxiliaries (e.g. with air cooled or evaporative condensers should not be evaporator fans) does not outweigh compression savings. more than 10K above design ambient condition, and a 4K In air-cooling applications, a design temperature difference approach in a liquid-cooled condenser is possible. of 6-10 K between leaving air temperature and evaporating APRIL 30, 2007 22 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP • Avoid accumulation of non-condensable gases in the Refrigerant Compression Efficiency condenser system. Consider the installation of refrigerated • Some refrigerant compressors and chillers are more non-condensable purgers, particularly for systems efficient than others offered for the same duty. Before operating below atmospheric pressure. purchase, identify the operating conditions under which the • Keep condensers clean and free from scale. Monitor compressor or chiller is likely to operate for substantial refrigerant/ambient temperature differences and compare parts of its annual cycle. Check operating efficiency under with design expectations to be alert to heat exchanger these conditions, and ask for estimates of annual running contamination. cost. Note that refrigeration and HVAC systems rarely run • Avoid liquid backup, which restricts heat transfer area in for extended periods at design conditions, which are condensers. This can be caused by installation errors such deliberately extreme. Operational efficiency under the most as concentric reducers in horizontal liquid refrigerant pipes, commonly occurring off-design conditions is likely to be or “up and over” liquid lines leading from condensers. most important. • In multiple condenser applications, refrigerant liquid lines • Compressors lose efficiency when unloaded. Avoid should be connected via drop-leg traps to the main liquid operation of multiple compressors at part-load conditions. refrigerant line to ensure that hot gases flow to all Note that package chillers can gain coefficient of condensers. performance (COP) when slightly unloaded, as loss of • Avoid head pressure control to the extent possible. Head compressor efficiency can be outweighed by the benefits of pressure control maintains condensing temperature at, or reduced condensing and elevated evaporating near, design levels. It therefore prevents reduction in temperature. However, it is unlikely to be energy efficient compressor power consumption, which accompanies to operate a single compressor-chiller at less than 50% of reduced condensing temperature, by restricting condenser capacity. capacity (usually by switching off the condenser, or cooling • Consider turndown efficiency when specifying chillers. tower fans, or restricting cooling water flow) under Variable speed control or multiple compressor chillers can conditions of less severe than design load or ambient be highly efficient at part loads. temperature conditions. Head pressure is often kept higher • Use of thermal storage systems (e.g., ice storage) can than necessary to facilitate hot gas defrost or adequate avoid the need for close load-tracking and, hence, can liquid refrigerant circulation. Use of electronic rather than avoid part-loaded compressor operation. thermostatic expansion valves, and liquid refrigerant pumps can permit effective refrigerant circulation at much Refrigeration System Auxiliaries reduced condensing temperatures. Many refrigeration system auxiliaries (e.g. evaporator fans and • Site condensers and cooling towers with adequate spacing chilled water pumps) contribute to refrigeration system load, so so as to prevent recirculation of hot air into the tower. reductions in their energy use have a double benefit. General energy saving techniques for pumps and fans, listed in the next section of these guidelines, should be applied to refrigeration auxiliaries. APRIL 30, 2007 23 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL ENERGY CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP Additionally, auxiliary use can be reduced by avoidance of part- o Implement systems for systematic identification and load operation and in plant selection (e.g. axial fan evaporative repair of leaks condensers generally use less energy than equivalent o All condensate drain points should be trapped. Do not centrifugal fan towers). leave drain valves continuously ‘cracked open’ o Train workers never to direct compressed air against Under extreme off-design conditions, reduction in duty of cooling their bodies or clothing to dust or cool themselves system fans and pumps can be worthwhile, usually when the down. lowest possible condensing pressure has been achieved. Distribution Compressed Air Systems • Monitor pressure losses in filters and replace as Compressed air is the most commonly found utility service in appropriate industry, yet in many compressed air systems, the energy • Use adequately sized distribution pipework designed to contained in compressed air delivered to the user is often 10% minimize pressure losses or less of energy used in air compression. Savings are often possible through the following techniques: Load reduction • Examine each true user of compressed air to identify the air volume needed and the pressure at which this should be delivered. • Do not mix high volume low pressure and low volume high pressure loads. Decentralize low volume high-pressure applications or provide dedicated low-pressure utilities, for example, by using fans rather than compressed air. • Review air use reduction opportunities, for example: o Use air amplifier nozzles rather than simple open-pipe compressed air jets o Consider whether compressed air is needed at all o Where air jets are required intermittently (e.g. to propel product), consider operating the jet via a process-related solenoid valve, which opens only when air is required o Use manual or automatically operated valves to isolate air supply to individual machines or zones that are not in continuous use APRIL 30, 2007 24 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP 1.3 Wastewater and Ambient Water Quality • Understand the quality, quantity, frequency and sources of Applicability and Approach......................................25 liquid effluents in its installations. This includes knowledge General Liquid Effluent Quality.......................................26 about the locations, routes and integrity of internal drainage Discharge to Surface Water....................................26 Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems.....................26 systems and discharge points Land Application of Treated Effluent........................27 • Plan and implement the segregation of liquid effluents Septic Systems ......................................................27 principally along industrial, utility, sanitary, and stormwater Wastewater Management...............................................27 Industrial Wastewater .............................................27 categories, in order to limit the volume of water requiring Sanitary Wastewater ..............................................29 specialized treatment. Characteristics of individual streams Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations .30 may also be used for source segregation. Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations..30 Occupational Health and Safety Issues in Wastewater • Identify opportunities to prevent or reduce wastewater Treatment Operations.............................................30 pollution through such measures as recycle/reuse within their Monitoring......................................................................30 facility, input substitution, or process modification (e.g. change of technology or operating conditions/modes). Applicability and Approach • Assess compliance of their wastewater discharges with the This guideline applies to projects that have either direct or indirect applicable: (i) discharge standard (if the wastewater is discharge of process wastewater, wastewater from utility discharged to a surface water or sewer), and (ii) water quality operations or stormwater to the environment. These guidelines standard for a specific reuse (e.g. if the wastewater is reused are also applicable to industrial discharges to sanitary sewers that for irrigation). discharge to the environment without any treatment. Process wastewater may include contaminated wastewater from utility Additionally, the generation and discharge of wastewater of any operations, stormwater, and sanitary sewage. It provides type should be managed through a combination of: information on common techniques for wastewater management, • Water use efficiency to reduce the amount of wastewater water conservation, and reuse that can be applied to a wide range generation of industry sectors. This guideline is meant to be complemented • Process modification, including waste minimization, and by the industry-specific effluent guidelines presented in the reducing the use of hazardous materials to reduce the load of Industry Sector Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) pollutants requiring treatment Guidelines. Projects with the potential to generate process • If needed, application of wastewater treatment techniques to wastewater, sanitary (domestic) sewage, or stormwater should further reduce the load of contaminants prior to discharge, incorporate the necessary precautions to avoid, minimize, and taking into consideration potential impacts of cross-media control adverse impacts to human health, safety, or the transfer of contaminants during treatment (e.g., from water to environment. air or land) In the context of their overall ESHS management system, facilities should: APRIL 30, 2007 25 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP When wastewater treatment is required prior to discharge, the the receiving water into consideration, should also influence the level of treatment should be based on: acceptable pollution loadings and effluent discharge quality. Additional considerations that should be included in the setting of • Whether wastewater is being discharged to a sanitary sewer project-specific performance levels for wastewater effluents system, or to surface waters include: • National and local standards as reflected in permit requirements and sewer system capacity to convey and treat • Process wastewater treatment standards consistent with wastewater if discharge is to sanitary sewer applicable Industry Sector EHS Guidelines. Projects for • Assimilative capacity of the receiving water for the load of which there are no industry-specific guidelines should contaminant being discharged wastewater if discharge is to reference the effluent quality guidelines of an industry sector surface water with suitably analogous processes and effluents; • Intended use of the receiving water body (e.g. as a source of • Compliance with national or local standards for sanitary drinking water, recreation, irrigation, navigation, or other) wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the indicative • Presence of sensitive receptors (e.g., endangered species) guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater or habitats discharges shown in Table 1.3.1 below ; • Good International Industry Practice (GIIP) for the relevant • Temperature of wastewater prior to discharge does not result industry sector in an increase greater than 3°C of ambient temperature at the edge of a scientifically established mixing zone which General Liquid Effluent Quality takes into account ambient water quality, receiving water use and assimilative capacity among other considerations. Discharge to Surface Water Discharges of process wastewater, sanitary wastewater, Discharge to Sanitary Sewer Systems wastewater from utility operations or stormwater to surface water Discharges of industrial wastewater, sanitary wastewater, should not result in contaminant concentrations in excess of local wastewater from utility operations or stormwater into public or ambient water quality criteria or, in the absence of local criteria, private wastewater treatment systems should: other sources of ambient water quality.35 Receiving water use36 and assimilative capacity37, taking other sources of discharges to • Meet the pretreatment and monitoring requirements of the sewer treatment system into which it discharges. 35 An example is the US EPA National Recommended Water Quality Criteria • Not interfere, directly or indirectly, with the operation and http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/criteria/wqcriteria.html maintenance of the collection and treatment systems, or 36 Examples of receiving water uses as may be designated by local authorities pose a risk to worker health and safety, or adversely impact include: drinking water (with some level of treatment), recreation, aquaculture, irrigation, general aquatic life, ornamental, and navigation. Examples of health- based guideline values for receiving waters include World Health Organization (WHO) guidelines for recreational use (http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/guidelines/en/index.html) the area or region. A seasonally representative baseline assessment of ambient 37 The assimilative capacity of the receiving water body depends on numerous water quality may be required for use with established scientific methods and mathematical models to estimate potential impact to the receiving water from an factors including, but not limited to, the total volume of water, flow rate, flushing effluent source. rate of the water body and the loading of pollutants from other effluent sources in APRIL 30, 2007 26 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP characteristics of residuals from wastewater treatment • Properly designed and installed in accordance with local operations. regulations and guidance to prevent any hazard to public • Be discharged into municipal or centralized wastewater health or contamination of land, surface or groundwater. treatment systems that have adequate capacity to meet local • Well maintained to allow effective operation. regulatory requirements for treatment of wastewater • Installed in areas with sufficient soil percolation for the design generated from the project. Pretreatment of wastewater to wastewater loading rate. meet regulatory requirements before discharge from the • Installed in areas of stable soils that are nearly level, well project site is required if the municipal or centralized drained, and permeable, with enough separation between the wastewater treatment system receiving wastewater from the drain field and the groundwater table or other receiving project does not have adequate capacity to maintain waters. regulatory compliance. Wastewater Management Land Application of Treated Effluent Wastewater management includes water conservation, The quality of treated process wastewater, wastewater from utility wastewater treatment, stormwater management, and wastewater operations or stormwater discharged on land, including wetlands, and water quality monitoring. should be established based on local regulatory requirements. . Where land is used as part of the treatment system and the Industrial Wastewater ultimate receptor is surface water, water quality guidelines for Industrial wastewater generated from industrial operations surface water discharges specific to the industry sector process includes process wastewater, wastewater from utility operations,, should apply.38 Potential impact on soil, groundwater, and surface runoff from process and materials staging areas, and water, in the context of protection, conservation and long term miscellaneous activities including wastewater from laboratories, sustainability of water and land resources should be assessed equipment maintenance shops, etc.. The pollutants in an industrial when land is used as part of any wastewater treatment system. wastewater may include acids or bases (exhibited as low or high pH), soluble organic chemicals causing depletion of dissolved Septic Systems oxygen, suspended solids, nutrients (phosphorus, nitrogen), Septic systems are commonly used for treatment and disposal of heavy metals (e.g. cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury, domestic sanitary sewage in areas with no sewerage collection nickel, zinc), cyanide, toxic organic chemicals, oily materials, and networks, Septic systems should only be used for treatment of volatile materials. , as well as from thermal characteristics of the sanitary sewage, and unsuitable for industrial wastewater discharge (e.g., elevated temperature). Transfer of pollutants to treatment. When septic systems are the selected form of another phase, such as air, soil, or the sub-surface, should be wastewater disposal and treatment, they should be: minimized through process and engineering controls. 38 Additional guidance on water quality considerations for land application is Process Wastewater – – Examples of treatment approaches available in the WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and Greywater. Volume 2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture typically used in the treatment of industrial wastewater are http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html summarized in Annex 1.3.1. While the choice of treatment APRIL 30, 2007 27 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP technology is driven by wastewater characteristics, the actual account ambient water quality, receiving water use, potential performance of this technology depends largely on the adequacy receptors and assimilative capacity among other of its design, equipment selection, as well as operation and considerations; maintenance of its installed facilities. Adequate resources are • Minimizing use of antifouling and corrosion inhibiting required for proper operation and maintenance of a treatment chemicals by ensuring appropriate depth of water intake and facility, and performance is strongly dependent on the technical use of screens. Least hazardous alternatives should be used ability and training of its operational staff. One or more treatment with regards to toxicity, biodegradability, bioavailability, and technologies may be used to achieve the desired discharge bioaccumulation potential. Dose applied should accord with quality and to maintain consistent compliance with regulatory local regulatory requirements and manufacturer requirements. The design and operation of the selected recommendations; wastewater treatment technologies should avoid uncontrolled air • Testing for residual biocides and other pollutants of concern emissions of volatile chemicals from wastewaters. Residuals from should be conducted to determine the need for dose industrial wastewater treatment operations should be disposed in adjustments or treatment of cooling water prior to discharge. compliance with local regulatory requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be consistent with protection of public health Stormwater Management - Stormwater includes any surface and safety, and conservation and long term sustainability of water runoff and flows resulting from precipitation, drainage or other and land resources. sources. Typically stormwater runoff contains suspended sediments, metals, petroleum hydrocarbons, Polycyclic Aromatic Wastewater from Utilities Operations - Utility operations such Hydrocarbons (PAHs), coliform, etc. Rapid runoff, even of as cooling towers and demineralization systems may result in high uncontaminated stormwater, also degrades the quality of the rates of water consumption, as well as the potential release of receiving water by eroding stream beds and banks. In order to high temperature water containing high dissolved solids, residues reduce the need for stormwater treatment, the following principles of biocides, residues of other cooling system anti-fouling agents, should be applied: etc. Recommended water management strategies for utility operations include: • Stormwater should be separated from process and sanitary wastewater streams in order to reduce the volume of • Adoption of water conservation opportunities for facility wastewater to be treated prior to discharge cooling systems as provided in the Water Conservation • Surface runoff from process areas or potential sources of section below; contamination should be prevented • Use of heat recovery methods (also energy efficiency • Where this approach is not practical, runoff from process and improvements) or other cooling methods to reduce the storage areas should be segregated from potentially less temperature of heated water prior to discharge to ensure the contaminated runoff discharge water temperature does not result in an increase • Runoff from areas without potential sources of contamination greater than 3°C of ambient temperature at the edge of a should be minimized (e.g. by minimizing the area of scientifically established mixing zone which takes into impermeable surfaces) and the peak discharge rate should APRIL 30, 2007 28 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP be reduced (e.g. by using vegetated swales and retention medical infirmaries, water softening etc. may also be discharged ponds); to the sanitary wastewater treatment system. Recommended • Where stormwater treatment is deemed necessary to protect sanitary wastewater management strategies include: the quality of receiving water bodies, priority should be given to managing and treating the first flush of stormwater runoff • Segregation of wastewater streams to ensure compatibility with selected treatment option (e.g. septic system which can where the majority of potential contaminants tend to be only accept domestic sewage); present; • Segregation and pretreatment of oil and grease containing • When water quality criteria allow, stormwater should be effluents (e.g. use of a grease trap) prior to discharge into managed as a resource, either for groundwater recharge or sewer systems; for meeting water needs at the facility; • If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to • Oil water separators and grease traps should be installed surface water, treatment to meet national or local standards and maintained as appropriate at refueling facilities, for sanitary wastewater discharges or, in their absence, the workshops, parking areas, fuel storage and containment indicative guideline values applicable to sanitary wastewater areas. discharges shown in Table 1.3.1; • Sludge from stormwater catchments or collection and • If sewage from the industrial facility is to be discharged to treatment systems may contain elevated levels of pollutants either a septic system, or where land is used as part of the and should be disposed in compliance with local regulatory requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be treatment system, treatment to meet applicable national or local standards for sanitary wastewater discharges is consistent with protection of public health and safety, and required. conservation and long term sustainability of water and land resources. • Sludge from sanitary wastewater treatment systems should be disposed in compliance with local regulatory Sanitary Wastewater requirements, in the absence of which disposal has to be Sanitary wastewater from industrial facilities may include effluents consistent with protection of public health and safety, and from domestic sewage, food service, and laundry facilities serving conservation and long term sustainability of water and land site employees. Miscellaneous wastewater from laboratories, resources. APRIL 30, 2007 29 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP or a non-hazardous waste and managed accordingly as described Table 1.3.1 Indicative Values for Treated in the Waste Management section of this document. Sanitary Sewage Discharges a Pollutants Units Guideline Value Occupational Health and Safety Issues in pH pH 6 –9 Wastewater Treatment Operations Wastewater treatment facility operators may be exposed to BOD mg/l 30 physical, chemical, and biological hazards depending on the COD mg/l 125 design of the facilities and the types of wastewater effluents Total nitrogen mg/l 10 managed. Examples of these hazards include the potential for Total phosphorus mg/l 2 trips and falls into tanks, confined space entries for maintenance Oil and grease mg/l 10 operations, and inhalation of VOCs, bioaerosols, and methane, contact with pathogens and vectors, and use of potentially Total suspended solids mg/l 50 hazardous chemicals, including chlorine, sodium and calcium Total coliform bacteria MPN b / 100 ml 400a hypochlorite, and ammonia. Detailed recommendations for the Notes: a Not applicable to centralized, municipal, wastewater treatment systems management of occupational health and safety issues are which are included in EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation. b MPN = Most Probable Number presented in the relevant section of this document. Additional guidance specifically applicable to wastewater treatment systems Emissions from Wastewater Treatment Operations is provided in the EHS Guidelines for Water and Sanitation. Air emissions from wastewater treatment operations may include hydrogen sulfide, methane, ozone (in the case of ozone Monitoring disinfection), volatile organic compounds (e.g., chloroform A wastewater and water quality monitoring program with adequate generated from chlorination activities and other volatile organic resources and management oversight should be developed and compounds (VOCs) from industrial wastewater), gaseous or implemented to meet the objective(s) of the monitoring program. volatile chemicals used for disinfection processes (e.g., chlorine The wastewater and water quality monitoring program should and ammonia), and bioaerosols. Odors from treatment facilities consider the following elements: can also be a nuisance to workers and the surrounding community. Recommendations for the management of emissions • Monitoring parameters: The parameters selected for are presented in the Air Emissions and Ambient Air Quality monitoring should be indicative of the pollutants of concern section of this document and in the EHS Guidelines for Water and from the process, and should include parameters that are Sanitation. regulated under compliance requirements; Residuals from Wastewater Treatment Operations • Monitoring type and frequency: Wastewater monitoring Sludge from a waste treatment plant needs to be evaluated on a should take into consideration the discharge characteristics case-by-case basis to establish whether it constitutes a hazardous from the process over time. Monitoring of discharges from processes with batch manufacturing or seasonal process variations should take into consideration of time-dependent APRIL 30, 2007 30 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP variations in discharges and, therefore, is more complex than monitoring of continuous discharges. Effluents from highly variable processes may need to be sampled more frequently or through composite methods. Grab samples or, if automated equipment permits, composite samples may offer more insight on average concentrations of pollutants over a 24-hour period. Composite samplers may not be appropriate where analytes of concern are short-lived (e.g., quickly degraded or volatile). • Monitoring locations: The monitoring location should be selected with the objective of providing representative monitoring data. Effluent sampling stations may be located at the final discharge, as well as at strategic upstream points prior to merging of different discharges. Process discharges should not be diluted prior or after treatment with the objective of meeting the discharge or ambient water quality standards. • Data quality : Monitoring programs should apply internationally approved methods for sample collection, preservation and analysis. Sampling should be conducted by or under the supervision of trained individuals. Analysis should be conducted by entities permitted or certified for this purpose. Sampling and Analysis Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) plans should be prepared and, implemented. QA/QC documentation should be included in monitoring reports. APRIL 30, 2007 31 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTEWATER AND AMBIENT WATER QUALITY WORLD BANK GROUP Annex 1.3.1 - Examples of Industrial Wastewater Treatment Approaches Pollutant/Parameter Control Options / Principle Common End of Pipe Control Technology pH Chemical, Equalization Acid/Base addition, Flow equalization Oil and Grease / TPH Phase separation Dissolved Air Floatation, oil water separator, grease trap TSS - Settleable Settling, Size Exclusion Sedimentation basin, clarifier, centrifuge, screens Floatation, Filtration - traditional and Dissolved air floatation, Multimedia filter, sand filter, fabric filter, TSS - Non-Settleable tangential ultrafiltration, microfiltration Hi - BOD (> 2 Kg/m3) Biological - Anaerobic Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid Lo - BOD (< 2 Kg/m3) Biological - Aerobic, Facultative Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid Oxidation, Adsorption, Size COD - Non-Biodegradable Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Membranes Exclusion Metals - Particulate and Coagulation, flocculation, Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential Soluble precipitation, size exclusion Coagulation, flocculation, Flash mix with settling, filtration - traditional and tangential, Chemical Inorganics / Non-metals precipitation, size exclusion, oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Reverse Osmosis, Oxidation, Adsorption Evaporation Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic, Biological : Suspended growth, attached growth, hybrid; Chemical Organics - VOCs and SVOCs Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon Emissions – Odors and Capture – Active or Passive; Biological : Attached growth; Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, VOCs Biological; Adsorption, Oxidation Activated Carbon Biological Nutrient Removal, Aerobic/Anoxic biological treatment, chemical hydrolysis and air Nutrients Chemical, Physical, Adsorption stripping, chlorination, ion exchange Biological - Aerobic, Anaerobic, Color Biological Aerobic, Chemical oxidation, Activated Carbon Facultative; Adsorption, Oxidation Temperature Evaporative Cooling Surface Aerators, Flow Equalization TDS Concentration, Size Exclusion Evaporation, crystallization, Reverse Osmosis Active Ingredients/Emerging Adsorption, Oxidation, Size Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Ion Contaminants Exclusion, Concentration Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization Adsorption,Size Exclusion, Radionuclides Ion Exchange, Reverse Osmosis, Evaporation, Crystallization Concentration Pathogens Disinfection, Sterilization Chlorine, Ozone, Peroxide, UV, Thermal Adsorption, Oxidation, Size Chemical oxidation, Thermal oxidation, Activated Carbon, Evaporation, Toxicity Exclusion, Concentration crystallization, Reverse Osmosis APRIL 30, 2007 32 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WATER CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP 1.4 Water Conservation Applicability and Approach .............................................33 Water Monitoring and Management Water Monitoring and Management................................33 Process Water Reuse and Recycling..............................33 The essential elements of a water management program Building Facility Operations ............................................34 involve: Cooling Systems............................................................34 Heating Systems............................................................34 • Identification, regular measurement, and recording of principal flows within a facility; Applicability and Approach • Definition and regular review of performance targets, which Water conservation programs should be implemented are adjusted to account for changes in major factors commensurate with the magnitude and cost of water use. affecting water use (e.g. industrial production rate); These programs should promote the continuous reduction in • Regular comparison of water flows with performance water consumption and achieve savings in the water targets to identify where action should be taken to reduce pumping, treatment and disposal costs. Water conservation water use. measures may include water monitoring/management Water measurement (metering) should emphasize areas of techniques; process and cooling/heating water recycling, greatest water use. Based on review of metering data, reuse, and other techniques; and sanitary water conservation ‘unaccounted’ use–indicating major leaks at industrial facilities– techniques. could be identified. General recommendations include: Process Water Reuse and Recycling • Storm/Rainwater harvesting and use Opportunities for water savings in industrial processes are • Zero discharge design/Use of treated waste water to be highly industry-specific. However, the following techniques have included in project design processes all been used successfully, and should be considered in • Use of localized recirculation systems in conjunction with the development of the metering system plant/facility/shops (as opposed to centralized described above. recirculation system), with provision only for makeup • Washing Machines: Many washing machines use large water quantities of hot water. Use can increase as nozzles • Use of dry process technologies e.g. dry quenching become enlarged due to repeated cleaning and /or wear. • Process water system pressure management Monitor machine water use, compare with specification, • Project design to have measures for adequate water and replace nozzles when water and heat use reaches collection, spill control and leakage control system levels warranting such work. • Water reuse: Common water reuse applications include countercurrent rinsing, for example in multi-stage washing APRIL 30, 2007 33 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WATER CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP and rinsing processes, or reusing waste water from one the facility, whether sanitary or including other activities process for another with less exacting water such as showering or catering requirements. For example, using bleaching rinse water • Regularly maintain plumbing, and identify and repair leaks for textile washing, or bottle-washer rinse water for • Shut off water to unused areas bottle crate washing, or even washing the floor. More • Install self-closing taps, automatic shut-off valves, spray sophisticated reuse projects requiring treatment of water nozzles, pressure reducing valves, and water conserving before reuse are also sometimes practical. fixtures (e.g. low flow shower heads, faucets, toilets, • Water jets/sprays: If processes use water jets or sprays urinals; and spring loaded or sensored faucets) (e.g. to keep conveyors clean or to cool product) review • Operate dishwashers and laundries on full loads, and only the accuracy of the spray pattern to prevent when needed unnecessary water loss. • Install water-saving equipment in lavatories, such as low- flow toilets • Flow control optimization: Industrial processes sometimes require the use of tanks, which are refilled to Cooling Systems control losses. It is often possible to reduce the rate of Water conservation opportunities in cooling systems include: water supply to such tanks, and sometimes to reduce tank levels to reduce spillage. If the process uses water • Use of closed circuit cooling systems with cooling cooling sprays, it may be possible to reduce flow while towers rather than once-through cooling systems maintaining cooling performance. Testing can • Limiting condenser or cooling tower blowdown to the determine the optimum balance. minimum required to prevent unacceptable accumulation of dissolved solids o If hoses are used in cleaning, use flow controls to • Use of air cooling rather than evaporative cooling, restrict wasteful water flow although this may increase electricity use in the o Consider the use of high pressure, low volume cooling system cleaning systems rather than using large volumes • Use of treated waste water for cooling towers of water sprayed from hosepipes • Reusing/recycling cooling tower blowdown o Using flow timers and limit switches to control water use Heating Systems o Using ‘clean-up’ practices rather than hosing down Heating systems based on the circulation of low or medium pressure hot water (which do not consume water) should be Building Facility Operations closed. If they do consume water, regular maintenance should Consumption of building and sanitary water is typically less be conducted to check for leaks. However, large quantities of than that used in industrial processes. However, savings can water may be used by steam systems, and this can be reduced readily be identified, as outlined below: by the following measures: • Compare daily water use per employee to existing benchmarks taking into consideration the primary use at APRIL 30, 2007 34 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WATER CONSERVATION WORLD BANK GROUP • Repair of steam and condensate leaks, and repair of all failed steam traps • Return of condensate to the boilerhouse, and use of heat exchangers (with condensate return) rather than direct steam injection where process permits • Flash steam recovery • Minimizing boiler blowdown consistent with maintaining acceptably low dissolved solids in boiler water. Use of reverse osmosis boiler feed water treatment substantially reduces the need for boiler blowdown • Minimizing deaerator heating APRIL 30, 2007 35 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP 1.5 Hazardous Materials Management When a hazardous material is no longer usable for its original Applicability and Approach .............................................36 purpose and is intended for disposal, but still has hazardous General Hazardous Materials Management....................37 properties, it is considered a hazardous waste (see Section 1.4). Hazard Assessment ...............................................37 Management Actions..............................................37 This guidance is intended to be applied in conjunction with Release Prevention and Control Planning ............38 Occupational Health and Safety ...........................38 traditional occupational health and safety and emergency Process Knowledge and Documentation ..............39 preparedness programs which are included in Section 2.0 on Preventive Measures..............................................39 Hazardous Materials Transfer..............................39 Occupational Health and Safety Management, and Section 3.7 on Overfill Protection................................................39 Emergency Preparedness and Response. Guidance on the Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention.............40 Control Measures...................................................40 Transport of Hazardous Materials is provided in Section 3.5. Secondary Containment (Liquids) ........................40 Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection..............41 This section is divided into two main subsections: Underground Storage Tanks (USTs) ....................41 Management of Major Hazards.......................................42 General Hazardous Materials Management: Guidance applicable Management Actions..............................................42 Preventive Measures..............................................43 to all projects or facilities that handle or store any quantity of Emergency Preparedness and Response ...............44 hazardous materials. Community Involvement and Awareness.................44 Management of Major Hazards: Additional guidance for projects or facilities that store or handle hazardous materials at, or above, Applicability and Approach threshold quantities39, and thus require special treatment to These guidelines apply to projects that use, store, or handle any prevent accidents such as fire, explosions, leaks or spills, and to quantity of hazardous materials (Hazmats), defined as materials prepare and respond to emergencies. that represent a risk to human health, property, or the environment due to their physical or chemical characteristics. Hazmats can be The overall objective of hazardous materials management is to classified according to the hazard as explosives; compressed avoid or, when avoidance is not feasible, minimize uncontrolled gases, including toxic or flammable gases; flammable liquids; releases of hazardous materials or accidents (including explosion flammable solids; oxidizing substances; toxic materials; and fire) during their production, handling, storage and use. This radioactive material; and corrosive substances. Guidance on the objective can be achieved by: transport of hazardous materials is covered in Section 3 of this document. 39 For examples, threshold quantities should be those established for emergency planning purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection of Environment (Title Threshold quantities are provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 68, 112, and 355). APRIL 30, 2007 36 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP • Establishing hazardous materials management priorities • The types and amounts of hazardous materials present in the based on hazard analysis of risky operations identified project. This information should be recorded and should through Social and Environmental Assessment; include a summary table with the following information: • Where practicable, avoiding or minimizing the use of o Name and description (e.g. composition of a mixture) of hazardous materials. For example, non-hazardous materials the Hazmat have been found to substitute asbestos in building materials, o Classification (e.g. code, class or division) of the PCBs in electrical equipment, persistent organic pollutants Hazmat (POPs) in pesticides formulations, and ozone depleting o Internationally accepted regulatory reporting threshold substances in refrigeration systems; quantity or national equivalent40 of the Hazmat • Preventing uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials to o Quantity of Hazmat used per month the environment or uncontrolled reactions that might result in o Characteristic(s) that make(s) the Hazmat hazardous fire or explosion; (e.g. flammability, toxicity) • Using engineering controls (containment, automatic alarms, • Analysis of potential spill and release scenarios using and shut-off systems) commensurate with the nature of available industry statistics on spills and accidents where hazard; available • Implementing management controls (procedures, • Analysis of the potential for uncontrolled reactions such as inspections, communications, training, and drills) to address fire and explosions residual risks that have not been prevented or controlled • Analysis of potential consequences based on the physical- through engineering measures. geographical characteristics of the project site, including aspects such as its distance to settlements, water resources, General Hazardous Materials Management and other environmentally sensitive areas Projects which manufacture, handle, use, or store hazardous materials should establish management programs that are Hazard assessment should be performed by specialized commensurate with the potential risks present. The main professionals using internationally-accepted methodologies such objectives of projects involving hazardous materials should be the as Hazardous Operations Analysis (HAZOP), Failure Mode and protection of the workforce and the prevention and control of Effects Analysis (FMEA), and Hazard Identification (HAZID). releases and accidents. These objectives should be addressed by integrating prevention and control measures, management actions, and procedures into day-to-day business activities. Management Actions Potentially applicable elements of a management program include The management actions to be included in a Hazardous Materials the following: Management Plan should be commensurate with the level of Hazard Assessment The level of risk should be established through an on-going 40 Threshold quantities are provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. assessment process based on: Protection of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 68, 112, and 355). APRIL 30, 2007 37 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP potential risks associated with the production, handling, storage, external resources for equipment and personnel, if and use of hazardous materials. necessary, to supplement internal resources • Description of response activities in the event of a spill, Release Prevention and Control Planning release, or other chemical emergency including: Where there is risk of a spill of uncontrolled hazardous materials, o Internal and external notification procedures facilities should prepare a spill control, prevention, and o Specific responsibilities of individuals or groups countermeasure plan as a specific component of their Emergency o Decision process for assessing severity of the release, Preparedness and Response Plan (described in more detail in and determining appropriate actions Section 3.7). The plan should be tailored to the hazards o Facility evacuation routes associated with the project, and include: o Post-event activities such as clean-up and disposal, incident investigation, employee re-entry, and • Training of operators on release prevention, including drills restoration of spill response equipment. specific to hazardous materials as part of emergency preparedness response training Occupational Health and Safety • Implementation of inspection programs to maintain the The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should address mechanical integrity and operability of pressure vessels, applicable, essential elements of occupational health and safety tanks, piping systems, relief and vent valve systems, management as described in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health containment infrastructure, emergency shutdown systems, and Safety, including: controls and pumps, and associated process equipment • Preparation of written Standard Operating Procedures • Job safety analysis to identify specific potential occupational (SOPs) for filling USTs, ASTs or other containers or hazards and industrial hygiene surveys, as appropriate, to equipment as well as for transfer operations by personnel monitor and verify chemical exposure levels, and compare trained in the safe transfer and filling of the hazardous with applicable occupational exposure standards41 material, and in spill prevention and response • Hazard communication and training programs to prepare • SOPs for the management of secondary containment workers to recognize and respond to workplace chemical structures, specifically the removal of any accumulated fluid, hazards. Programs should include aspects of hazard such as rainfall, to ensure that the intent of the system is not identification, safe operating and materials handling accidentally or willfully defeated procedures, safe work practices, basic emergency • Identification of locations of hazardous materials and procedures, and special hazards unique to their jobs. associated activities on an emergency plan site map • Documentation of availability of specific personal protective 41 Including: Threshold Limit Value (TLV®) occupational exposure guidelines and Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs®), American Conference of Governmental equipment and training needed to respond to an emergency Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), http://www.acgih.org/TLV/; U.S. National Institute for Occupational Health and Safety (NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/npg/; • Documentation of availability of spill response equipment Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs), U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), sufficient to handle at least initial stages of a spill and a list of http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STANDARD S&p_id=9992; Indicative Occupational Exposure Limit Values, European Union, http://europe.osha.eu.int/good_practice/risks/ds/oel/; and other similar sources. APRIL 30, 2007 38 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP Training should incorporate information from Material Safety Preventive Measures Data Sheets42 (MSDSs) for hazardous materials being Hazardous Materials Transfer handled. MSDSs should be readily accessible to employees Uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials may result from in their local language. small cumulative events, or from more significant equipment • Definition and implementation of permitted maintenance failure associated with events such as manual or mechanical activities, such as hot work or confined space entries transfer between storage systems or process equipment. • Provision of suitable personal protection equipment (PPE) Recommended practices to prevent hazardous material releases (footwear, masks, protective clothing and goggles in from processes include: appropriate areas), emergency eyewash and shower • Use of dedicated fittings, pipes, and hoses specific to stations, ventilation systems, and sanitary facilities materials in tanks (e.g., all acids use one type of connection, • Monitoring and record-keeping activities, including audit all caustics use another), and maintaining procedures to procedures designed to verify and record the effectiveness of prevent addition of hazardous materials to incorrect tanks prevention and control of exposure to occupational hazards, • Use of transfer equipment that is compatible and suitable for and maintaining accident and incident investigation reports the characteristics of the materials transferred and designed on file for a period of at least five years to ensure safe transfer Process Knowledge and Documentation • Regular inspection, maintenance and repair of fittings, pipes The Hazardous Materials Management Plan should be and hoses incorporated into, and consistent with, the other elements of the • Provision of secondary containment, drip trays or other facility ES/OHS MS and include: overflow and drip containment measures, for hazardous materials containers at connection points or other possible • Written process safety parameters (i.e., hazards of the overflow points. chemical substances, safety equipment specifications, safe operation ranges for temperature, pressure, and other Overfill Protection applicable parameters, evaluation of the consequences of Overfills of vessels and tanks should be prevented as they are deviations, etc.) among the most common causes of spills resulting in soil and • Written operating procedures water contamination, and among the easiest to prevent. • Compliance audit procedures Recommended overfill protection measures include: • Prepare written procedures for transfer operations that includes a checklist of measures to follow during filling operations and the use of filling operators trained in these procedures • Installation of gauges on tanks to measure volume inside 42 MSDSs are produced by the manufacturer, but might not be prepared for • Use of dripless hose connections for vehicle tank and fixed chemical intermediates that are not distributed in commerce. In these cases, employers still need to provide workers with equivalent information. connections with storage tanks APRIL 30, 2007 39 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP • Provision of automatic fill shutoff valves on storage tanks to • Prohibition of all sources of ignition from areas near prevent overfilling flammable storage tanks • Use of a catch basin around the fill pipe to collect spills • Use of piping connections with automatic overfill protection Control Measures (float valve) Secondary Containment (Liquids) • Pumping less volume than available capacity into the tank or A critical aspect for controlling accidental releases of liquid vessel by ordering less material than its available capacity hazardous materials during storage and transfer is the provision of • Provision of overfill or over pressure vents that allow secondary containment. It is not necessary for secondary controlled release to a capture point containment methods to meet long term material compatibility as with primary storage and piping, but their design and construction Reaction, Fire, and Explosion Prevention should hold released materials effectively until they can be Reactive, flammable, and explosive materials should also be detected and safely recovered. Appropriate secondary managed to avoid uncontrolled reactions or conditions resulting in containment structures consist of berms, dikes, or walls capable of fire or explosion. Recommended prevention practices include: containing the larger of 110 percent of the largest tank or 25% percent of the combined tank volumes in areas with above-ground • Storage of incompatible materials (acids, bases, flammables, tanks with a total storage volume equal or greater than 1,000 liters oxidizers, reactive chemicals) in separate areas, and with and will be made of impervious, chemically resistant material. containment facilities separating material storage areas Secondary containment design should also consider means to • Provision of material-specific storage for extremely prevent contact between incompatible materials in the event of a hazardous or reactive materials release. • Use of flame arresting devices on vents from flammable storage containers Other secondary containment measures that should be applied • Provision of grounding and lightning protection for tank depending on site-specific conditions include: farms, transfer stations, and other equipment that handles • Transfer of hazardous materials from vehicle tanks to storage flammable materials in areas with surfaces sufficiently impervious to avoid loss to • Selection of materials of construction compatible with the environment and sloped to a collection or a containment products stored for all parts of storage and delivery systems, structure not connected to municipal wastewater/stormwater and avoiding reuse of tanks for different products without collection system checking material compatibility • Where it is not practical to provide permanent, dedicated • Storage of hazardous materials in an area of the facility containment structures for transfer operations, one or more separated from the main production works. Where proximity alternative forms of spill containment should be provided, is unavoidable, physical separation should be provided using such as portable drain covers (which can be deployed for the structures designed to prevent fire, explosion, spill, and other duration of the operations), automatic shut-off valves on emergency situations from affecting facility operations storm water basins, or shut off valves in drainage or sewer facilities, combined with oil-water separators APRIL 30, 2007 40 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP • Storage of drummed hazardous materials with a total volume Underground Storage Tanks (USTs)45 equal or greater than 1,000 liters in areas with impervious Although there are many environmental and safety advantages of surfaces that are sloped or bermed to contain a minimum of underground storage of hazardous materials, including reduced 25 percent of the total storage volume risk of fire or explosion, and lower vapor losses into the • Provision of secondary containment for components (tanks, atmosphere, leaks of hazardous materials can go undetected for pipes) of the hazardous material storage system, to the long periods of time with potential for soil and groundwater extent feasible contamination. Examples of techniques to manage these risks • Conducting periodic (e.g. daily or weekly) reconciliation of include: tank contents, and inspection of visible portions of tanks and • Avoiding use of USTs for storage of highly soluble organic piping for leaks; materials • Use of double-walled, composite, or specially coated storage • Assessing local soil corrosion potential, and installing and and piping systems particularly in the use of underground maintaining cathodic protection (or equivalent rust protection) storage tanks (USTs) and underground piping. If double- for steel tanks walled systems are used, they should provide a means of • For new installations, installing impermeable liners or detecting leaks between the two walls. structures (e.g., concrete vaults) under and around tanks and lines that direct any leaked product to monitoring ports at the Storage Tank and Piping Leak Detection lowest point of the liner or structure Leak detection may be used in conjunction with secondary • Monitoring the surface above any tank for indications of soil containment, particularly in high-risk locations43. Leak detection is movement especially important in situations where secondary containment is • Reconciling tank contents by measuring the volume in store not feasible or practicable, such as in long pipe runs. Acceptable with the expected volume, given the stored quantity at last leak detection methods include: stocking, and deliveries to and withdrawals from the store • Use of automatic pressure loss detectors on pressurized or • Testing integrity by volumetric, vacuum, acoustic, tracers, or long distance piping other means on all tanks at regular intervals • Use of approved or certified integrity testing methods on • Considering the monitoring groundwater of quality down piping or tank systems, at regular intervals gradient of locations where multiple USTs are in use • Considering the use of SCADA 44 if financially feasible • Evaluating the risk of existing UST in newly acquired facilities to determine if upgrades are required for USTs that will be continued to be used, including replacement with new systems or permanent closure of abandoned USTs. 43 High-risk locations are places where the release of product from the storage system could result in the contamination of drinking water source or those located Ensuring that new USTs are sited away from wells, in water resource protection areas as designated by local authorities. 44 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 45 Additional details on the management of USTs is provided in the EHS Guidelines for Retail Petroleum Stations. APRIL 30, 2007 41 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP reservoirs and other source water protection areas and the prevention measures (see below) should be conducted at floodplains, and maintained so as to prevent corrosion. least every three years and should include: o Preparation of a report of the findings Management of Major Hazards o Determination and documentation of the appropriate In addition to the application of the above-referenced guidance on response to each finding prevention and control of releases of hazardous materials, o Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected projects involving production, handling, and storage of hazardous • Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable materials at or above threshold limits46 should prepare a information about site hazards and the steps needed to Hazardous Materials Risk Management Plan, in the context of its prevent accidental releases. An incident investigation overall ES/OHS MS, containing all of the elements presented mechanism should include procedures for: below.47 The objective of this guidance is the prevention and o Initiation of the investigation promptly control of catastrophic releases of toxic, reactive, flammable, or o Summarizing the investigation in a report explosive chemicals that may result in toxic, fire, or explosion o Addressing the report findings and recommendations hazards.48 o A review of the report with staff and contractors Management Actions • Employee Participation: A written plan of action should • Management of Change: These procedures should address: describe an active employee participation program for the o The technical basis for changes in processes and prevention of accidents. operations • Contractors: There should be a mechanism for contractor o The impact of changes on health and safety control which should include a requirement for them to o Modification to operating procedures develop hazard materials management procedures that meet o Authorization requirements the requirements of the hazardous materials management o Employees affected plan. Their procedures should be consistent with those of o Training needs the contracting company and the contractor workforce should • Compliance Audit: A compliance audit is a way to evaluate undergo the same training. Additionally, procedures should compliance with the prevention program requirements for require that contractors are: each process. A compliance audit covering each element of o Provided with safety performance procedures and safety and hazard information o Observe safety practices 46 Threshold quantities should be those established for emergency planning purposes such as provided in the US Environmental Protection Agency. Protection o Act responsibly of Environment (Title 40 CFR Parts 300-399 and 700 to 789). o Have access to appropriate training for their employees 47 For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Risk Management Manual. Washington, o Ensure that their employees know process hazards and D.C. December 2000. 48 The approach to the management of major hazards is largely based on an applicable emergency actions approach to Process Safety Management developed by the American Institute of Chemical Engineers. APRIL 30, 2007 42 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP o Prepare and submit training records for their employees initial startup, normal operations, temporary operations, to the contracting company emergency shutdown, emergency operations, normal o Inform their employees about the hazards presented by shutdown, and start-up following a normal or emergency their work shutdown or major change). These SOPs should include o Assess trends of repeated similar incidents special considerations for Mazmats used in the process or o Develop and implement procedures to manage repeated operations (e.g. temperature control to prevent emissions of similar incidents a volatile hazardous chemical; diversion of gaseous discharges of hazardous pollutants from the process to a • Training: Project employees should be provided training on temporary storage tank in case of emergency). Hazmat management. The training program should include: o A list of employees to be trained Other procedures to be developed include impacts of o Specific training objectives deviations, steps to avoid deviations, prevention of chemical o Mechanisms to achieve the objectives (i.e., hands-on exposure, exposure control measures, and equipment workshops, videos, etc.) inspections. o The means to determine whether the training program is Mechanical Integrity of process equipment, piping and effective instrumentation: Inspection and maintenance procedures o Training procedures for new hires and refresher courses should be developed and documented to ensure mechanical for existing employees integrity of equipment, piping, and instrumentation and prevent uncontrolled releases of hazardous materials from Preventive Measures the project. These procedures should be included as part of The purpose of preventive measures is to ensure that safety- the project SOPs. The specific process components of major related aspects of the process and equipment are considered, interest include pressure vessels and storage tanks, piping limits to be placed on the operations are well known, and systems, relief and vent systems and devices, emergency accepted standards and codes are adopted, where they apply. shutdown systems, controls, and pumps. Recommended • Process Safety Information: Procedures should be prepared aspects of the inspection and maintenance program include: for each hazardous materials and include: o Developing inspection and maintenance procedures o Compilation of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) o Establishing a quality assurance plan for equipment, o Identification of maximum intended inventories and safe maintenance materials, and spare parts upper/lower parameters o Conducting employee training on the inspection and o Documentation of equipment specifications and of maintenance procedures codes and standards used to design, build and operate o Conducting equipment, piping, and instrumentation the process inspections and maintenance o Identifying and correcting identified deficiencies • Operating Procedures: SOPs should be prepared for each step of all processes or operations within the project (e.g. APRIL 30, 2007 43 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP o Evaluating the inspection and maintenance results and, incorporated into and consistent with, the facility’s overall ES/OHS if necessary, updating the inspection and maintenance MS, should be prepared to cover the following:49 procedures • Planning Coordination: Procedures should be prepared for: o Reporting the results to management. o Informing the public and emergency response agencies o Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment • Hot Work Permit: Hot work operations – such as brazing, o Taking emergency response actions torch-cutting, grinding, soldering, and welding – are o Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan associated with potential health, safety, and property hazards to reflect changes, and ensuring that employees are resulting from the fumes, gases, sparks, and hot metal and informed of such changes radiant energy produced during hot work. Hot work permit is required for any operation involving open flames or producing • Emergency Equipment: Procedures should be prepared for heat and/or sparks. The section of SOPs on hot work should using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining the emergency include the responsibility for hot work permitting, personal response equipment. protection equipment (PPE), hot work procedures, personnel • Training: Employees and contractors should be trained on training, and recordkeeping. emergency response procedures. • Pre-Start Review: Procedures should be prepared to carry out pre-start reviews when a modification is significant Community Involvement and Awareness enough to require a change in safety information under the When hazardous materials are in use above threshold quantities, management of change procedure. The procedures should: the management plan should include a system for community o Confirm that the new or modified construction and/or awareness, notification and involvement that should be equipment meet design specifications commensurate with the potential risks identified for the project o Ensure that procedures for safety, operation, during the hazard assessment studies. This should include maintenance, and emergency are adequate mechanisms for sharing the results of hazard and risk assessment o Include a process hazard assessment, and resolve or studies in a timely, understandable and culturally sensitive manner implement recommendations for new process with potentially affected communities that provides a means for o Ensure that training for all affected employees is being public feedback. Community involvement activities should include: conducted • Availability of general information to the potentially affected community on the nature and extent of project operations, Emergency Preparedness and Response and the prevention and control measures in place to ensure When handling hazardous materials, procedures and practices no effects to human health should be developed allowing for quick and efficient responses to accidents that could result in human injury or damage to the 49 For a comprehensive treatment of the development of emergency response environment. An Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan, plans in conjunction with communities refer to the Awareness and Preparedness for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines available at: http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html APRIL 30, 2007 44 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP • The potential for off-site effects to human health or the environment following an accident at planned or existing hazardous installations • Specific and timely information on appropriate behavior and safety measures to be adopted in the event of an accident including practice drills in locations with higher risks • Access to information necessary to understand the nature of the possible effect of an accident and an opportunity to contribute effectively, as appropriate, to decisions concerning hazardous installations and the development of community emergency preparedness plans. APRIL 30, 2007 45 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP residual waste from industrial operations, such as boiler slag, 1.6 Waste Management clinker, and fly ash. Applicability and Approach .............................................46 General Waste Management..........................................47 Hazardous waste shares the properties of a hazardous Waste Management Planning .................................47 material (e.g. ignitability, corrosivity, reactivity, or toxicity), or Waste Prevention...................................................47 other physical, chemical, or biological characteristics that Recycling and Reuse..............................................48 Treatment and Disposal..........................................48 may pose a potential risk to human health or the environment Hazardous Waste Management......................................48 if improperly managed. Wastes may also be defined as Waste Storage .......................................................48 “hazardous” by local regulations or international conventions, Transportation........................................................49 Treatment and Disposal..........................................49 based on the origin of the waste and its inclusion on Commercial or Government Waste Contractors....49 hazardous waste lists, or based on its characteristics. Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste ..................50 Monitoring..............................................................50 Sludge from a waste treatment plant, water supply treatment plant, or air pollution control facility, and other discarded material, including solid, liquid, semisolid, or contained Applicability and Approach gaseous material resulting from industrial operations needs These guidelines apply to projects that generate, store, or to be evaluated on a case-by-case basis to establish whether handle any quantity of waste across a range of industry it constitutes a hazardous or a non-hazardous waste. sectors. It is not intended to apply to projects or facilities where the primary business is the collection, transportation, Facilities that generate and store wastes should practice the treatment, or disposal of wastes. Specific guidance for these following: types of facilities is presented in the Environmental Health • Establishing waste management priorities at the outset and Safety (EHS) Guidelines for Waste Management of activities based on an understanding of potential Facilities. Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) risks and A waste is any solid, liquid, or contained gaseous material impacts and considering waste generation and its that is being discarded by disposal, recycling, burning or consequences incineration. It can be byproduct of a manufacturing process • Establishing a waste management hierarchy that or an obsolete commercial product that can no longer be considers prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery, used for intended purpose and requires disposal. recycling, removal and finally disposal of wastes. • Avoiding or minimizing the generation waste materials, Solid (non-hazardous) wastes generally include any garbage, as far as practicable refuse. Examples of such waste include domestic trash and • Where waste generation cannot be avoided but has garbage; inert construction / demolition materials; refuse, been minimized, recovering and reusing waste such as metal scrap and empty containers (except those previously used to contain hazardous materials which should, in principle, be managed as a hazardous waste); and APRIL 30, 2007 46 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP • Where waste can not be recovered or reused, treating, • Definition of procedures and operational controls for on- destroying, and disposing of it in an environmentally site storage sound manner • Definition of options / procedures / operational controls for treatment and final disposal General Waste Management The following guidance applies to the management of non- Waste Prevention hazardous and hazardous waste. Additional guidance Processes should be designed and operated to prevent, or specifically applicable to hazardous wastes is presented minimize, the quantities of wastes generated and hazards below. Waste management should be addressed through a associated with the wastes generated in accordance with the Waste management system that addresses issues linked to following strategy: waste minimization, generation, transport, disposal, and • Substituting raw materials or inputs with less hazardous monitoring. or toxic materials, or with those where processing generates lower waste volumes Waste Management Planning • Applying manufacturing process that convert materials Facilities that generate waste should characterize their waste efficiently, providing higher product output yields, according to composition, source, types of wastes produced, including modification of design of the production generation rates, or according to local regulatory process, operating conditions, and process controls50 requirements. Effective planning and implementation of • Instituting good housekeeping and operating practices, waste management strategies should include: including inventory control to reduce the amount of • Review of new waste sources during planning, siting, waste resulting from materials that are out-of-date, off- and design activities, including during equipment specification, contaminated, damaged, or excess to modifications and process alterations, to identify plant needs expected waste generation, pollution prevention • Instituting procurement measures that recognize opportunities, and necessary treatment, storage, and opportunities to return usable materials such as disposal infrastructure containers and which prevents the over ordering of • Collection of data and information about the process materials and waste streams in existing facilities, including • Minimizing hazardous waste generation by characterization of waste streams by type, quantities, implementing stringent waste segregation to prevent the and potential use/disposition commingling of non-hazardous and hazardous waste to • Establishment of priorities based on a risk analysis that be managed takes into account the potential EHS risks during the waste cycle and the availability of infrastructure to manage the waste in an environmentally sound manner 50 Examples of waste prevention strategies include the concept of Lean • Definition of opportunities for source reduction, as well Manufacturing found at as reuse and recycling http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/minimize/lean.htm APRIL 30, 2007 47 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP Recycling and Reuse wastes; properly designed, permitted and operated In addition to the implementation of waste prevention landfills or incinerators designed for the respective type strategies, the total amount of waste may be significantly of waste; or other methods known to be effective in the reduced through the implementation of recycling plans, which safe, final disposal of waste materials such as should consider the following elements: bioremediation. • Evaluation of waste production processes and Hazardous Waste Management identification of potentially recyclable materials Hazardous wastes should always be segregated from non- • Identification and recycling of products that can be hazardous wastes. If generation of hazardous waste can not reintroduced into the manufacturing process or industry be prevented through the implementation of the above activity at the site general waste management practices, its management • Investigation of external markets for recycling by other should focus on the prevention of harm to health, safety, and industrial processing operations located in the the environment, according to the following additional neighborhood or region of the facility (e.g., waste principles: exchange) • Understanding potential impacts and risks associated • Establishing recycling objectives and formal tracking of with the management of any generated hazardous waste generation and recycling rates waste during its complete life cycle • Providing training and incentives to employees in order • Ensuring that contractors handling, treating, and to meet objectives disposing of hazardous waste are reputable and Treatment and Disposal legitimate enterprises, licensed by the relevant If waste materials are still generated after the implementation regulatory agencies and following good international of feasible waste prevention, reduction, reuse, recovery and industry practice for the waste being handled recycling measures, waste materials should be treated and • Ensuring compliance with applicable local and disposed of and all measures should be taken to avoid international regulations51 potential impacts to human health and the environment. Selected management approaches should be consistent with Waste Storage the characteristics of the waste and local regulations, and Hazardous waste should be stored so as to prevent or may include one or more of the following: control accidental releases to air, soil, and water resources in area location where: • On-site or off-site biological, chemical, or physical treatment of the waste material to render it non- hazardous prior to final disposal 51 International requirements may include host-country commitments under the Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of • Treatment or disposal at permitted facilities specially Hazardous Waste and their disposal (http://www.basel.int/) and Rotterdam Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for Certain Hazardous designed to receive the waste. Examples include: Chemicals and Pesticides in International Trade (http://www.pic.int/) composting operations for organic non-hazardous APRIL 30, 2007 48 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP • Waste is stored in a manner that prevents the • Preparing and implementing spill response and commingling or contact between incompatible wastes, emergency plans to address their accidental release and allows for inspection between containers to monitor (additional information on Emergency Plans in provided leaks or spills. Examples include sufficient space in Section 3 of this document) between incompatibles or physical separation such as • Avoiding underground storage tanks and underground walls or containment curbs piping of hazardous waste • Store in closed containers away from direct sunlight, wind and rain Transportation • Secondary containment systems should be constructed On-site and Off-site transportation of waste should be with materials appropriate for the wastes being conducted so as to prevent or minimize spills, releases, and contained and adequate to prevent loss to the exposures to employees and the public. All waste environment containers designated for off-site shipment should be • Secondary containment is included wherever liquid secured and labeled with the contents and associated wastes are stored in volumes greater than 220 liters. hazards, be properly loaded on the transport vehicles before The available volume of secondary containment should leaving the site, and be accompanied by a shipping paper be at least 110 percent of the largest storage container, (i.e., manifest) that describes the load and its associated or 25 percent of the total storage capacity (whichever is hazards, consistent with the guidance provided in Section 3.4 greater), in that specific location on the Transport of Hazardous Materials. • Provide adequate ventilation where volatile wastes are stored. Treatment and Disposal In addition to the recommendations for treatment and Hazardous waste storage activities should also be subject to disposal applicable to general wastes, the following issues special management actions, conducted by employees who specific to hazardous wastes should be considered: have received specific training in handling and storage of hazardous wastes: Commercial or Government Waste Contractors In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned • Provision of readily available information on chemical waste vendors (taking into consideration proximity and compatibility to employees, including labeling each transportation requirements), facilities generating waste container to identify its contents should consider using: • Limiting access to hazardous waste storage areas to employees who have received proper training • Have the technical capability to manage the waste in a • Clearly identifying (label) and demarcating the area, manner that reduces immediate and future impact to the including documentation of its location on a facility map environment or site plan • Have all required permits, certifications, and approvals, • Conducting periodic inspections of waste storage areas of applicable government authorities and documenting the findings APRIL 30, 2007 49 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP • Have been secured through the use of formal are generated and stored on site, monitoring activities procurement agreements should include: In the absence of qualified commercial or government-owned o Inspection of vessels for leaks, drips or other waste disposal operators (taking into consideration proximity indications of loss and transportation requirements), project sponsors should o Identification of cracks, corrosion, or damage to consider using: tanks, protective equipment, or floors o Verification of locks, emergency valves, and other • Installing on-site waste treatment or recycling safety devices for easy operation (lubricating if processes required and employing the practice of keeping • As a final option, constructing facilities that will provide locks and safety equipment in standby position for the environmental sound long-term storage of when the area is not occupied) wastes on-site (as described elsewhere in the General o Checking the operability of emergency systems EHS Guidelines) or at an alternative appropriate o Documenting results of testing for integrity, location up until external commercial options become emissions, or monitoring stations (air, soil vapor, or available groundwater) o Documenting any changes to the storage facility, Small Quantities of Hazardous Waste and any significant changes in the quantity of Hazardous waste materials are frequently generated in small materials in storage quantities by many projects through a variety of activities such as equipment and building maintenance activities. • Regular audits of waste segregation and collection Examples of these types of wastes include: spent solvents practices and oily rags, empty paint cans, chemical containers; used • Tracking of waste generation trends by type and amount lubricating oil; used batteries (such as nickel-cadmium or of waste generated, preferably by facility departments lead acid); and lighting equipment, such as lamps or lamp • Characterizing waste at the beginning of generation of a ballasts. These wastes should be managed following the new waste stream, and periodically documenting the guidance provided in the above sections. characteristics and proper management of the waste, especially hazardous wastes Monitoring • Keeping manifests or other records that document the Monitoring activities associated with the management of amount of waste generated and its destination hazardous and non-hazardous waste should include: • Periodic auditing of third party treatment, and disposal services including re-use and recycling facilities when • Regular visual inspection of all waste storage collection significant quantities of hazardous wastes are managed and storage areas for evidence of accidental releases by third parties. Whenever possible, audits should and to verify that wastes are properly labeled and include site visits to the treatment storage and disposal stored. When significant quantities of hazardous wastes location APRIL 30, 2007 50 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL WASTE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP • Regular monitoring of groundwater quality in cases of Hazardous Waste on site storage and/or pretreatment and disposal • Monitoring records for hazardous waste collected, stored, or shipped should include: o Name and identification number of the material(s) composing the hazardous waste o Physical state (i.e., solid, liquid, gaseous or a combination of one, or more, of these) o Quantity (e.g., kilograms or liters, number of containers) o Waste shipment tracking documentation to include, quantity and type, date dispatched, date transported and date received, record of the originator, the receiver and the transporter o Method and date of storing, repacking, treating, or disposing at the facility, cross-referenced to specific manifest document numbers applicable to the hazardous waste o Location of each hazardous waste within the facility, and the quantity at each location APRIL 30, 2007 51 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP 1.7 Noise barrier. Barriers should be located as close to the source or to the receptor location to be effective Applicability • Installing vibration isolation for mechanical equipment This section addresses impacts of noise beyond the property • Limiting the hours of operation for specific pieces of boundary of the facilities. Worker exposure to noise is equipment or operations, especially mobile sources covered in Section 2.0 on Occupational Health and Safety. operating through community areas • Re-locating noise sources to less sensitive areas to take Prevention and Control advantage of distance and shielding Noise prevention and mitigation measures should be applied • Siting permanent facilities away from community areas if where predicted or measured noise impacts from a project possible facility or operations exceed the applicable noise level • Taking advantage of the natural topography as a noise guideline at the most sensitive point of reception.52 The buffer during facility design preferred method for controlling noise from stationary • Reducing project traffic routing through community sources is to implement noise control measures at source.53 areas wherever possible Methods for prevention and control of sources of noise • Planning flight routes, timing and altitude for aircraft emissions depend on the source and proximity of receptors. (airplane and helicopter) flying over community areas Noise reduction options that should be considered include: • Developing a mechanism to record and respond to • Selecting equipment with lower sound power levels complaints • Installing silencers for fans • Installing suitable mufflers on engine exhausts and Noise Level Guidelines Noise impacts should not exceed the levels presented in compressor components Table 1.7.1, or result in a maximum increase in background • Installing acoustic enclosures for equipment casing levels of 3 dB at the nearest receptor location off-site. radiating noise • Improving the acoustic performance of constructed buildings, apply sound insulation • Installing acoustic barriers without gaps and with a continuous minimum surface density of 10 kg/m2 in order to minimize the transmission of sound through the 52 A point of reception or receptor may be defined as any point on the premises occupied by persons where extraneous noise and/or vibration are received. Examples of receptor locations may include: permanent or seasonal residences; hotels / motels; schools and daycares; hospitals and nursing homes; places of worship; and parks and campgrounds. 53 At the design stage of a project, equipment manufacturers should provide design or construction specifications in the form of “Insertion Loss Performance” for silencers and mufflers, and “Transmission Loss Performance” for acoustic enclosures and upgraded building construction. APRIL 30, 2007 52 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE MANAGEMENT WORLD BANK GROUP m to any reflecting surface (e.g., wall). In general, the noise Table 1.7.1- Noise Level Guidelines 54 level limit is represented by the background or ambient noise One Hour L Aeq (dBA) levels that would be present in the absence of the facility or Receptor Daytime Nighttime noise source(s) under investigation. 07:00 - 22:00 22:00 - 07:00 Residential; institutional; 55 45 educational55 Industrial; commercial 70 70 Highly intrusive noises, such as noise from aircraft flyovers and passing trains, should not be included when establishing background noise levels. Monitoring Noise monitoring56 may be carried out for the purposes of establishing the existing ambient noise levels in the area of the proposed or existing facility, or for verifying operational phase noise levels. Noise monitoring programs should be designed and conducted by trained specialists. Typical monitoring periods should be sufficient for statistical analysis and may last 48 hours with the use of noise monitors that should be capable of logging data continuously over this time period, or hourly, or more frequently, as appropriate (or else cover differing time periods within several days, including weekday and weekend workdays). The type of acoustic indices recorded depends on the type of noise being monitored, as established by a noise expert. Monitors should be located approximately 1.5 m above the ground and no closer than 3 54 Guidelines values are for noise levels measured out of doors. Source: Guidelines for Community Noise, World Health Organization (WHO), 1999. 55 For acceptable indoor noise levels for residential, institutional, and educational settings refer to WHO (1999). 56 Noise monitoring should be carried out using a Type 1 or 2 sound level meter meeting all appropriate IEC standards. APRIL 30, 2007 53 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP 1.8 Contaminated Land • The liability that it may pose to the polluter/business Applicability and Approach .............................................54 owners (e.g., cost of remediation, damage of business Risk Screening ..............................................................55 reputation and/or business-community relations) or Interim Risk Management ..............................................56 Detailed Risk Assessment..............................................56 affected parties (e.g. workers at the site, nearby property Permanent Risk Reduction Measures.............................57 owners). Occupational Health and Safety Considerations..............59 Contamination of land should be avoided by preventing or controlling the release of hazardous materials, hazardous Applicability and Approach wastes, or oil to the environment. When contamination of land is This section provides a summary of management suspected or confirmed during any project phase, the cause of approaches for land contamination due to anthropogenic the uncontrolled release should be identified and corrected to releases of hazardous materials, wastes, or oil, including avoid further releases and associated adverse impacts. naturally occurring substances. Releases of these materials may be the result of historic or current site activities, Contaminated lands should be managed to avoid the risk to including, but not limited to, accidents during their handling human health and ecological receptors. The preferred strategy and storage, or due to their poor management or disposal. for land decontamination is to reduce the level of contamination at the site while preventing the human exposure to Land is considered contaminated when it contains hazardous contamination. materials or oil concentrations above background or naturally occurring levels. To determine whether risk management actions are warranted, the following assessment approach should be applied to Contaminated lands may involve surficial soils or subsurface establish whether the three risk factors of ‘Contaminants’, soils that, through leaching and transport, may affect ‘Receptors’, and ‘Exposure Pathways’ co-exist, or are likely to groundwater, surface water, and adjacent sites. Where co-exist, at the project site under current or possible future land subsurface contaminant sources include volatile substances, use: soil vapor may also become a transport and exposure medium, and create potential for contaminant infiltration of • Contaminant(s): Presence of hazardous materials, waste, indoor air spaces of buildings. or oil in any environmental media at potentially hazardous concentrations Contaminated land is a concern because of: • Receptor(s) : Actual or likely contact of humans, wildlife, plants, and other living organisms with the contaminants of • The potential risks to human health and ecology (e.g. concern risk of cancer or other human health effects, loss of • Exposure pathway(s): A combination of the route of ecology); migration of the contaminant from its point of release (e.g., leaching into potable groundwater) and exposure routes APRIL 30, 2007 54 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP (e.g., ingestion, transdermal absorption), which would • Identification of the location of suspected highest level of allow receptor(s) to come into actual contact with contamination through a combination of visual and contaminants historical operational information; • Sampling and testing of the contaminated media (soils or water) according to established technical methods applicable to suspected type of contaminant57,58; • Evaluation of the analytical results against the local and national contaminated sites regulations. In the absence of such regulations or environmental standards, other sources of risk-based standards or guidelines should be consulted to obtain comprehensive criteria for screening soil concentrations of pollutants.59 • Verification of the potential human and/or ecological receptors and exposure pathways relevant to the site in question FIGURE 1.8.1: Inter-Relationship of Contaminant The outcome of risk-screening may reveal that there is no Risk Factors overlap between the three risk-factors as the contaminant levels identified are below those considered to pose a risk to human When the three risk factors are considered to be present (in health or the environment. Alternatively, interim or permanent spite of limited data) under current or foreseeable future conditions, the following steps should be followed (as described in the remaining parts of this section): 57 BC MOE. http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance 1) Risk screening; 58 Massachusetts Department of Environment. http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup 2) Interim risk management; 59 These may include the USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs). 3) Detailed quantitative risk assessment; and http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm. These RBCs are considered acceptable for specific land use and contaminant exposure 4) Permanent risk reduction measures. scenarios as they have been developed by governments using risk assessment techniques for use as general targets in the site remediation. Separate PRGs have been developed or adopted for soil, sediment or groundwater, and often a Risk Screening distinction is made between land uses (as noted earlier) because of the need for more stringent guidelines for residential and agricultural versus This step is also known as “problem formulation” for commercial/industrial landuse. The RBC Tables contains Reference Doses (RfDs) and Cancer Slope Factors (CSFs) for about 400 chemicals. These environmental risk assessment. Where there is potential toxicity factors have been combined with “standard” exposure scenarios to calculate RBCs--chemical concentrations corresponding to fixed levels of risk evidence of contamination at a site, the following steps are (i.e., a Hazard Quotient (HQ) of 1, or lifetime cancer risk of 1E-6, whichever occurs at a lower concentration) in water, air, fish tissue, and soil for individual recommended: chemical substances. The primary use of RBCs is for chemical screening during baseline risk assessment (see EPA Regional Guidance EPA/903/R-93-001, “Selecting Exposure Routes and Contaminants of Concern by Risk-Based Screening”). Additional useful soil quality guidelines can also be obtained from Lijzen et al. 2001. APRIL 30, 2007 55 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP risk reduction measures may need to be taken with, or strategies that yield acceptable health risks, while achieving low without, more detailed risk assessment activities, as level contamination on-site. An assessment of contaminant described below. risks needs to be considered in the context of current and future land use, and development scenarios (e.g., residential, commercial, industrial, and urban parkland or wilderness use). Interim Risk Management Interim risk management actions should be implemented at A detailed quantitative risk assessment builds on risk screening any phase of the project life cycle if the presence of land (problem formulation). It involves first, a detailed site contamination poses an “imminent hazard”, i.e., representing investigation to identify the scope of contamination.61 Site an immediate risk to human health and the environment if investigation programs should apply quality assurance/quality contamination were allowed to continue, even a short period control (QA/QC) measures to ensure that data quality is of time. Examples of situations considered to involve adequate for the intended data use (e.g., method detection imminent hazards include, but are not restricted to: limits are below levels of concern). The site investigation in turn • Presence of an explosive atmosphere caused by should be used to develop a conceptual site model of how and contaminated land where contaminants exist, how they are transported, and where • Accessible and excessive contamination for which short- routes of exposure occur to organisms and humans. The risk term exposure and potency of contaminants could result factors and conceptual site model provide a framework for in acute toxicity, irreversible long term effects, assessing contaminant risks. sensitization, or accumulation of persistent Human or ecological risk assessments facilitate risk biocumulative and toxic substances management decisions at contaminated sites. Specific risk • Concentrations of pollutants at concentrations above the assessment objectives include: Risk Based Concentrations (RBCs60) or drinking water standards in potable water at the point of abstraction • Identifying relevant human and ecological receptors (e.g., children, adults, fish, wildlife) Appropriate risk reduction should be implemented as soon as • Determining if contaminants are present at levels that pose practicable to remove the condition posing the imminent potential human health and/or ecological concerns (e.g., hazard. levels above applicable regulatory criteria based on health or environmental risk considerations) Detailed Risk Assessment • Determining how human or ecological receptors are As an alternative to complying with numerical standards or exposed to the contaminants (e.g., ingestions of soil, preliminary remediation goals, and depending on local dermal contact, inhalation of dust) regulatory requirements, a detailed site-specific, environmental risk assessment may be used to develop 61 Examples include processes defined by the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Phase II ESA Process; the British Columbia Ministry of Environment Canada (BC MOE) 60 For example, USEPA Region 3 Risk-Based Concentrations (RBCs). http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance); and the http://www.epa.gov/reg3hwmd/risk/human/index.htm. Massachusetts Department of Environment http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup. APRIL 30, 2007 56 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP • Identifying the types of adverse effects that might result • Identifying the preferred technologies (including from exposure to the contaminants (e.g., effect on target engineering controls) needed to implement the conceptual organ, cancer, impaired growth or reproduction) in the risk reduction measures absence of regulatory standards • Developing a monitoring plan to ascertain whether risk • Quantifying the magnitude of health risks to human and reduction measures are effective ecological receptors based on a quantitative analysis of • Considering the need and appropriateness for institutional contaminant exposure and toxicity (e.g. calculate controls (e.g. deed restriction, land use restrictions) as part lifetime cancer risk or ratios of estimated exposure rates of a comprehensive approach compared to safe exposure rates) • Determining how current and proposed future land use Permanent Risk Reduction Measures influence the predicted risks (e.g. change of land use The risk factors and conceptual site model within the from industrial to residential with more sensitive contaminant risk approach described also provide a basis to receptors such as children) manage and mitigate environmental contaminant health risks. • Quantifying the potential environmental and/or human The underlying principle is to reduce, eliminate, or control any or health risks from off-site contaminant migration (e.g., all of the three risk factors illustrated in Figure 1.8.1. A short list consider if leaching and groundwater transport, or of examples of risk mitigation strategies is provided below, surface water transport results in exposure at adjacent although actual strategies should be developed based on site- lands/receptors) specific conditions, and the practicality of prevailing factors and • Determining if the risk is likely to remain stable, site constraints. Regardless of the management options increase, or decrease with time in the absence of any selected, the action plan should include, whenever possible, remediation (e.g., consider if the contaminant is contaminant source reduction (i.e., net improvement of the site) reasonably degradable and likely to remain in place, or as part of the overall strategy towards managing health risks at be transported to other media)62 contaminated sites, as this alone provides for improved environmental quality. Addressing these objectives provides a basis to develop and implement risk reduction measures (e.g., clean-up, on-site Figure 1.8.2 presents a schematic of the inter-relationship of risk controls) at the site. If such a need exists, the following factors and example strategies to mitigate contaminant health additional objectives become relevant: risk by modifying the conditions of one or more risk factors to • Determining where, and in what conceptual manner, risk ultimately reduce contaminant exposure to the receptor. The reduction measures should be implemented selected approach should take into consideration the technical and financial feasibility (e.g. operability of a selected technology given the local availability of technical expertise and equipment and its associated costs). 62 An example of a simplified quantitative risk assessment method is the ASTM E1739-95(2002) Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Example risk mitigation strategies for contaminant source and Applied at Petroleum Release Sites and the ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1 Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at chemical release sites). exposure concentrations include: APRIL 30, 2007 57 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP • Soil, sediment, and sludge: o Installation (during building construction) of an o In situ biological treatment (aerobic or anaerobic) impermeable barrier below the building and/or an o In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., soil vapor alternative flow pathway for soil vapor beneath extraction with off-gas treatment, chemical building foundations (e.g., porous media and oxidation) ventilation to shunt vapors away from building) o In situ thermal treatment (e.g., steam injection, 6- Example risk mitigation strategies for receptors include: phase heating) • Limiting or preventing access to contaminant by receptors o Ex situ biological treatment (e.g., excavation and (actions targeted at the receptor may include signage with composting) instructions, fencing, or site security) o Ex situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., • Imposing health advisory or prohibiting certain practices excavation and stabilization) leading to exposure such as fishing, crab trapping, shellfish o Ex situ thermal treatment (e.g., excavation and collection thermal desorption or incineration) • Educating receptors (people) to modify behavior in order to o Containment (e.g. landfill) reduce exposure (e.g., improved work practices, and use of o Natural attenuation protective clothing and equipment) o Other treatment processes Example risk mitigation strategies for exposure pathways • Groundwater, surface water, and leachate: include: o In situ biological treatment (aerobic and/or aerobic) • Providing an alternative water supply to replace, for o In situ physical/chemical treatment (e.g., air example, a contaminated groundwater supply well sparging, zero-valent iron permeable reactive • Capping contaminated soil with at least 1m of clean soil to barrier) prevent human contact, as well as plant root or small o Ex situ biological, physical, and or chemical mammal penetration into contaminated soils treatment (i.e., groundwater extraction and • Paving over contaminated soil as an interim measure to treatment) negate the pathway of direct contact or dust generation o Containment (e.g., slurry wall or sheet pile barrier) and inhalation o Natural attenuation • Using an interception trench and pump, and treat o Other treatment processes technologies to prevent contaminated groundwater from • Soil vapor intrusion: discharging into fish streams o Soil vapor extraction to reduce VOC contaminant The above-reference containment measures should also be source in soil considered for immediate implementation in situations where o Installation of a sub-slab depressurization system source reduction measures are expected to take time. to prevent migration of soil vapor into the building o Creating a positive pressure condition in buildings APRIL 30, 2007 58 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: ENVIRONMENTAL CONTAMINATED LAND WORLD BANK GROUP Occupational Health and Safety Considerations Investigation and remediation of contaminated lands requires that workers be mindful of the occupational exposures that could arise from working in close contact with contaminated soil or other environmental media (e.g., groundwater, wastewater, sediments, and soil vapor). Occupational health and safety precautions should be exercised to minimize exposure, as described in Section 2 on Occupational Health and Safety. In addition, workers on contaminated sites should receive special health and safety training specific to contaminated site investigation and remediation activities.63 FIGURE 1.8.2: Inter-Relationship of Risk Factors and Management Options 63 For example, US Occupational Safety and Health Agency (OSHA) regulations found at 40 CFR 1910.120. http://www.osha.gov/pls/oshaweb/owadisp.show_document?p_table=STAN DARDS&p_id=9765 APRIL 30, 2007 59 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP 2.0 Occupational Health and Safety Applicability and Approach......................................60 2.1 General Facility Design and Operation......................61 Applicability and Approach Integrity of Workplace Structures..........................61 Employers and supervisors are obliged to implement all Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown ................61 Workspace and Exit.............................................61 reasonable precautions to protect the health and safety of Fire Precautions ..................................................62 workers. This section provides guidance and examples of Lavatories and Showers.......................................62 Potable Water Supply ..........................................62 reasonable precautions to implement in managing principal risks Clean Eating Area ...............................................62 to occupational health and safety. Although the focus is placed on Lighting...............................................................62 Safe Access........................................................62 the operational phase of projects, much of the guidance also First Aid...............................................................63 applies to construction and decommissioning activities. Air Supply............................................................63 Work Environment Temperature...........................63 Companies should hire contractors that have the technical 2.2 Communication and Training....................................63 capability to manage the occupational health and safety issues of OHS Training ......................................................63 Visitor Orientation................................................63 their employees, extending the application of the hazard New Task Employee and Contractor Training.......63 management activities through formal procurement agreements. Basic OHS Training .............................................64 Area Signage ......................................................64 Labeling of Equipment.........................................64 Preventive and protective measures should be introduced Communicate Hazard Codes ...............................64 according to the following order of priority: 2.3 Physical Hazards .....................................................64 Rotating and Moving Equipment...........................65 Noise ..................................................................65 • Eliminating the hazard by removing the activity from the work Vibration..............................................................65 process. Examples include substitution with less hazardous Electrical .............................................................66 Eye Hazards........................................................67 chemicals, using different manufacturing processes, etc; Welding / Hot Work..............................................67 Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic..............67 • Controlling the hazard at its source through use of Working Environment Temperature......................68 engineering controls. Examples include local exhaust Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling.68 Working at Heights ..............................................68 ventilation, isolation rooms, machine guarding, acoustic Illumination..........................................................69 2.4 Chemical Hazards....................................................69 insulating, etc; Air Quality ...........................................................70 Fire and Explosions .............................................70 • Minimizing the hazard through design of safe work systems Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals.........71 and administrative or institutional control measures. Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM)..................71 2.5 Biological Hazards....................................................71 Examples include job rotation, training safe work procedures, 2.6 Radiological Hazards................................................73 lock-out and tag-out, workplace monitoring, limiting exposure 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).......................73 2.8 Special Hazard Environments...................................74 or work duration, etc. Confined Space...................................................74 Lone and Isolated Workers ..................................75 • Providing appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) in 2.9 Monitoring................................................................75 conjunction with training, use, and maintenance of the PPE. Accidents and Diseases monitoring......................76 The application of prevention and control measures to occupational hazards should be based on comprehensive job APRIL 30, 2007 60 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP safety or job hazard analyses. The results of these analyses should be prioritized as part of an action plan based on the Table 2.1.1. Risk Ranking Table to Classify Worker likelihood and severity of the consequence of exposure to the Scenarios Based on Likelihood and Consequence identified hazards. An example of a qualitative risk ranking or Consequences analysis matrix to help identify priorities is described in Table 2.1.1. Catas- Insignificant Minor Moderate Major trophic Likelihood 2.1 General Facility Design and 1 2 3 4 5 Operation A. Almost certain L M E E E Integrity of Workplace Structures Permanent and recurrent places of work should be designed and B. Likely L M H E E equipped to protect OHS: C. L M H E E • Surfaces, structures and installations should be easy to clean Moderate and maintain, and not allow for accumulation of hazardous D. Unlikely L L M H E compounds. • Buildings should be structurally safe, provide appropriate E. Rare L L M H H protection against the climate, and have acceptable light and noise conditions. Legend • Fire resistant, noise-absorbing materials should, to the extent E: extreme risk; immediate action required feasible, be used for cladding on ceilings and walls. H: high risk; senior management attention needed • Floors should be level, even, and non-skid. M: moderate risk; management responsibility should be specified • Heavy oscillating, rotating or alternating equipment should be L: low risk; manage by routine procedures located in dedicated buildings or structurally isolated sections. Workspace and Exit • The space provided for each worker, and in total, should be Severe Weather and Facility Shutdown adequate for safe execution of all activities, including • Work place structures should be designed and constructed to transport and interim storage of materials and products. withstand the expected elements for the region and have an • Passages to emergency exits should be unobstructed at all area designated for safe refuge, if appropriate. times. Exits should be clearly marked to be visible in total • Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be developed darkness. The number and capacity of emergency exits for project or process shut-down, including an evacuation should be sufficient for safe and orderly evacuation of the plan. Drills to practice the procedure and plan should also be greatest number of people present at any time, and there undertaken annually. should be a minimum two exits from any work area. APRIL 30, 2007 61 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Facilities also should be designed and built taking into Potable Water Supply account the needs of disabled persons. • Adequate supplies of potable drinking water should be provided from a fountain with an upward jet or with a sanitary Fire Precautions means of collecting the water for the purposes of drinking The workplace should be designed to prevent the start of fires • Water supplied to areas of food preparation or for the through the implementation of fire codes applicable to industrial purpose of personal hygiene (washing or bathing) should settings. Other essential measures include: meet drinking water quality standards • Equipping facilities with fire detectors, alarm systems, and fire-fighting equipment. The equipment should be maintained Clean Eating Area in good working order and be readily accessible. It should be • Where there is potential for exposure to substances adequate for the dimensions and use of the premises, poisonous by ingestion, suitable arrangements are to be equipment installed, physical and chemical properties of made for provision of clean eating areas where workers are substances present, and the maximum number of people not exposed to the hazardous or noxious substances present. • Provision of manual firefighting equipment that is easily Lighting accessible and simple to use • Workplaces should, to the degree feasible, receive natural • Fire and emergency alarm systems that are both audible and light and be supplemented with sufficient artificial illumination visible to promote workers’ safety and health, and enable safe equipment operation. Supplemental ‘task lighting’ may be The IFC Life and Fire Safety Guideline should apply to buildings required where specific visual acuity requirements should be accessible to the public (See Section 3.3). met. • Emergency lighting of adequate intensity should be installed Lavatories and Showers and automatically activated upon failure of the principal • Adequate lavatory facilities (toilets and washing areas) artificial light source to ensure safe shut-down, evacuation, should be provided for the number of people expected to etc. work in the facility and allowances made for segregated facilities, or for indicating whether the toilet facility is “In Use” Safe Access or “Vacant”. Toilet facilities should also be provided with • Passageways for pedestrians and vehicles within and outside adequate supplies of hot and cold running water, soap, and buildings should be segregated and provide for easy, safe, hand drying devices. and appropriate access • Where workers may be exposed to substances poisonous by • Equipment and installations requiring servicing, inspection, ingestion and skin contamination may occur, facilities for and/or cleaning should have unobstructed, unrestricted, and showering and changing into and out of street and work ready access clothes should be provided. • Hand, knee and foot railings should be installed on stairs, fixed ladders, platforms, permanent and interim floor openings, loading bays, ramps, etc. APRIL 30, 2007 62 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Openings should be sealed by gates or removable chains microorganisms. Heating, ventilation and air conditioning • Covers should, if feasible, be installed to protect against (HVAC) and industrial evaporative cooling systems should be falling items equipped, maintained and operated so as to prevent growth • Measures to prevent unauthorized access to dangerous and spreading of disease agents (e.g. Legionnella areas should be in place pneumophilia) or breeding of vectors (e.g. mosquitoes and flies) of public health concern. First Aid • The employer should ensure that qualified first-aid can be Work Environment Temperature provided at all times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations • The temperature in work, rest room and other welfare should be easily accessible throughout the place of work facilities should, during service hours, be maintained at a • Eye-wash stations and/or emergency showers should be level appropriate for the purpose of the facility. provided close to all workstations where immediate flushing with water is the recommended first-aid response 2.2 Communication and Training • Where the scale of work or the type of activity being carried OHS Training out so requires, dedicated and appropriately equipped first- • Provisions should be made to provide OHS orientation aid room(s) should be provided. First aid stations and rooms training to all new employees to ensure they are apprised of should be equipped with gloves, gowns, and masks for the basic site rules of work at / on the site and of personal protection against direct contact with blood and other body protection and preventing injury to fellow employees. fluids • Training should consist of basic hazard awareness, site- • Remote sites should have written emergency procedures in specific hazards, safe work practices, and emergency place for dealing with cases of trauma or serious illness up to procedures for fire, evacuation, and natural disaster, as the point at which patient care can be transferred to an appropriate. Any site-specific hazard or color coding in use appropriate medical facility. should be thoroughly reviewed as part of orientation training. Air Supply Visitor Orientation • Sufficient fresh air should be supplied for indoor and confined • If visitors to the site can gain access to areas where work spaces. Factors to be considered in ventilation design hazardous conditions or substances may be present, a visitor include physical activity, substances in use, and process- orientation and control program should be established to related emissions. Air distribution systems should be ensure visitors do not enter hazard areas unescorted. designed so as not to expose workers to draughts • Mechanical ventilation systems should be maintained in good New Task Employee and Contractor Training working order. Point-source exhaust systems required for • The employer should ensure that workers and contractors, maintaining a safe ambient environment should have local prior to commencement of new assignments, have received indicators of correct functioning. adequate training and information enabling them to • Re-circulation of contaminated air is not acceptable. Air inlet filters should be kept clean and free of dust and APRIL 30, 2007 63 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP understand work hazards and to protect their health from • Signage should be in accordance with international hazardous ambient factors that may be present. standards and be well known to, and easily understood by The training should adequately cover: workers, visitors and the general public as appropriate. o Knowledge of materials, equipment, and tools Labeling of Equipment o Known hazards in the operations and how they are controlled • All vessels that may contain substances that are hazardous o Potential risks to health as a result of chemical or toxicological properties, or o Precautions to prevent exposure temperature or pressure, should be labeled as to the o Hygiene requirements contents and hazard, or appropriately color coded. o Wearing and use of protective equipment and clothing • Similarly, piping systems that contain hazardous substances o Appropriate response to operation extremes, incidents should be labeled with the direction of flow and contents of and accidents the pipe, or color coded whenever the pipe passing through a wall or floor is interrupted by a valve or junction device. Basic OHS Training • A basic occupational training program and specialty courses Communicate Hazard Codes should be provided, as needed, to ensure that workers are • Copies of the hazard coding system should be posted oriented to the specific hazards of individual work outside the facility at emergency entrance doors and fire assignments. Training should generally be provided to emergency connection systems where they are likely to management, supervisors, workers, and occasional visitors come to the attention of emergency services personnel. to areas of risks and hazards. • Information regarding the types of hazardous materials • Workers with rescue and first-aid duties should receive stored, handled or used at the facility, including typical dedicated training so as not to inadvertently aggravate maximum inventories and storage locations, should be exposures and health hazards to themselves or their co- shared proactively with emergency services and security workers. Training would include the risks of becoming personnel to expedite emergency response when needed. infected with blood–borne pathogens through contact with • Representatives of local emergency and security services bodily fluids and tissue. should be invited to participate in periodic (annual) • Through appropriate contract specifications and monitoring, orientation tours and site inspections to ensure familiarity the employer should ensure that service providers, as well as with potential hazards present. contracted and subcontracted labor, are trained adequately before assignments begin. 2.3 Physical Hazards Physical hazards represent potential for accident or injury or Area Signage illness due to repetitive exposure to mechanical action or work • Hazardous areas (electrical rooms, compressor rooms, etc), activity. Single exposure to physical hazards may result in a wide installations, materials, safety measures, and emergency range of injuries, from minor and medical aid only, to disabling, exits, etc. should be marked appropriately. catastrophic, and/or fatal. Multiple exposures over prolonged APRIL 30, 2007 64 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP periods can result in disabling injuries of comparable significance Noise and consequence. Noise limits for different working environments are provided in Table 2.3.1. Rotating and Moving Equipment Injury or death can occur from being trapped, entangled, or struck • No employee should be exposed to a noise level greater than 85 dB(A) for a duration of more than 8 hours per day without by machinery parts due to unexpected starting of equipment or hearing protection. In addition, no unprotected ear should be unobvious movement during operations. Recommended exposed to a peak sound pressure level (instantaneous) of protective measures include: more than 140 dB(C). • Designing machines to eliminate trap hazards and ensuring • The use of hearing protection should be enforced actively that extremities are kept out of harm’s way under normal when the equivalent sound level over 8 hours reaches 85 operating conditions. Examples of proper design dB(A), the peak sound levels reach 140 dB(C), or the considerations include two-hand operated machines to average maximum sound level reaches 110dB(A). Hearing prevent amputations or the availability of emergency stops protective devices provided should be capable of reducing dedicated to the machine and placed in strategic locations. sound levels at the ear to at least 85 dB(A). Where a machine or equipment has an exposed moving part • Although hearing protection is preferred for any period of or exposed pinch point that may endanger the safety of any noise exposure in excess of 85 dB(A), an equivalent level of worker, the machine or equipment should be equipped with, protection can be obtained, but less easily managed, by and protected by, a guard or other device that prevents limiting the duration of noise exposure. For every 3 dB(A) access to the moving part or pinch point. Guards should be increase in sound levels, the ‘allowed’ exposure period or designed and installed in conformance with appropriate duration should be reduced by 50 percent.65 machine safety standards.64 • Prior to the issuance of hearing protective devices as the • Turning off, disconnecting, isolating, and de-energizing final control mechanism, use of acoustic insulating materials, (Locked Out and Tagged Out) machinery with exposed or isolation of the noise source, and other engineering controls guarded moving parts, or in which energy can be stored (e.g. should be investigated and implemented, where feasible compressed air, electrical components) during servicing or • Periodic medical hearing checks should be performed on maintenance, in conformance with a standard such as CSA workers exposed to high noise levels Z460 Lockout or equivalent ISO or ANSI standard • Designing and installing equipment, where feasible, to enable Vibration routine service, such as lubrication, without removal of the Exposure to hand-arm vibration from equipment such as hand and guarding devices or mechanisms power tools, or whole-body vibrations from surfaces on which the worker stands or sits, should be controlled through choice of equipment, installation of vibration dampening pads or devices, and limiting the duration of exposure. Limits for vibration and 64 For example: CSA Z432.04 Safe Guarding of Machinery, CSA Z434 Robot Safety, ISO 11161 Safety of Machinery – Integrated Manufacturing Systems or ISO 14121 Safety of Machinery – Principals of Risk Management or equivalent ANSI standard. 65 The American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 2006 APRIL 30, 2007 65 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP action values, (i.e. the level of exposure at which remediation • Marking all energized electrical devices and lines with should be initiated) are provided by the ACGIH 66. Exposure levels warning signs should be checked on the basis of daily exposure time and data • Locking out (de-charging and leaving open with a controlled provided by equipment manufacturers. locking device) and tagging-out (warning sign placed on the lock) devices during service or maintenance Electrical • Checking all electrical cords, cables, and hand power tools Exposed or faulty electrical devices, such as circuit breakers, for frayed or exposed cords and following manufacturer recommendations for maximum permitted operating voltage Table 2.3.1. Noise Limits for Various Working of the portable hand tools Environments • Double insulating / grounding all electrical equipment used in environments that are, or may become, wet; using equipment Location Equivalent level Maximum with ground fault interrupter (GFI) protected circuits /activity LAeq,8h LAmax,fast • Protecting power cords and extension cords against damage Heavy Industry (no from traffic by shielding or suspending above traffic areas demand for oral 85 dB(A) 110 dB(A) communication) • Appropriate labeling of service rooms housing high voltage Light industry equipment (‘electrical hazard’) and where entry is controlled (decreasing demand for oral 50-65 dB(A) 110 dB(A) or prohibited (see also Section 3 on Planning, Siting, and communication) Design); Open offices, • Establishing “No Approach” zones around or under high control rooms, 45-50 dB(A) - service counters or voltage power lines in conformance with Table 2.3.2 similar • Rubber tired construction or other vehicles that come into Individual offices (no disturbing 40-45 dB(A) - direct contact with, or arcing between, high voltage wires noise) may need to be taken out of service for periods of 48 hours Classrooms, and have the tires replaced to prevent catastrophic tire and lecture halls 35-40 dB(A) - wheel assembly failure, potentially causing serious injury or Hospitals 30-35 dB(A) 40 dB(A) death; panels, cables, cords and hand tools, can pose a serious risk to • Conducting detailed identification and marking of all buried workers. Overhead wires can be struck by metal devices, such as electrical wiring prior to any excavation work poles or ladders, and by vehicles with metal booms. Vehicles or grounded metal objects brought into close proximity with overhead wires can result in arcing between the wires and the object, without actual contact. Recommended actions include: 66 ACGIH, 2005 APRIL 30, 2007 66 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Provisions should be made for persons who have to wear Table 2.3.2. No Approach Zones for prescription glasses either through the use overglasses or High Voltage Power Lines prescription hardened glasses. Minimum Nominal phase-to-phase voltage rating distance Welding / Hot Work 750 or more volts, but no more than 150,000 volts 3 meters Welding creates an extremely bright and intense light that may More than 150,000 volts, but no more than 250,000 4.5 meters seriously injur a worker’s eyesight. In extreme cases, blindness volts may result. Additionally, welding may produce noxious fumes to More than 250,000 volts 6 meters which prolonged exposure can cause serious chronic diseases. Recommended measures include: Eye Hazards • Provision of proper eye protection such as welder goggles Solid particles from a wide variety of industrial operations, and / or and/or a full-face eye shield for all personnel involved in, or a liquid chemical spray may strike a worker in the eye causing an assisting, welding operations. Additional methods may eye injury or permanent blindness. Recommended measures include the use of welding barrier screens around the specific include: work station (a solid piece of light metal, canvas, or plywood designed to block welding light from others). Devices to • Use of machine guards or splash shields and/or face and eye extract and remove noxious fumes at the source may also be protection devices, such as safety glasses with side shields, required. goggles, and/or a full face shield. Specific Safe Operating • Special hot work and fire prevention precautions and Procedures (SOPs) may be required for use of sanding and Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) should be grinding tools and/or when working around liquid chemicals. implemented if welding or hot cutting is undertaken outside Frequent checks of these types of equipment prior to use to established welding work stations, including ‘Hot Work ensure mechanical integrity is also good practice. Machine Permits, stand-by fire extinguishers, stand-by fire watch, and and equipment guarding should conform to standards maintaining the fire watch for up to one hour after welding or published by organizations such as CSA, ANSI and ISO (see hot cutting has terminated. Special procedures are required also Section 2.3 on Rotating and Moving Equipment and 2.7 for hotwork on tanks or vessels that have contained on Personal Protective Equipment). flammable materials. • Moving areas where the discharge of solid fragments, liquid, or gaseous emissions can reasonably be predicted (e.g. Industrial Vehicle Driving and Site Traffic discharge of sparks from a metal cutting station, pressure Poorly trained or inexperienced industrial vehicle drivers have relief valve discharge) away from places expected to be increased risk of accident with other vehicles, pedestrians, and occupied or transited by workers or visitors. Where machine equipment. Industrial vehicles and delivery vehicles, as well as or work fragments could present a hazard to transient private vehicles on-site, also represent potential collision workers or passers-by, extra area guarding or proximity scenarios. Industrial vehicle driving and site traffic safety restricting systems should be implemented, or PPE required practices include: for transients and visitors. APRIL 30, 2007 67 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Training and licensing industrial vehicle operators in the safe • Use of protective clothing operation of specialized vehicles such as forklifts, including • Providing easy access to adequate hydration such as safe loading/unloading, load limits drinking water or electrolyte drinks, and avoiding • Ensuring drivers undergo medical surveillance consumption of alcoholic beverages • Ensuring moving equipment with restricted rear visibility is outfitted with audible back-up alarms Ergonomics, Repetitive Motion, Manual Handling • Establishing rights-of-way, site speed limits, vehicle Injuries due to ergonomic factors, such as repetitive motion, over- inspection requirements, operating rules and procedures exertion, and manual handling, take prolonged and repeated (e.g. prohibiting operation of forklifts with forks in down exposures to develop, and typically require periods of weeks to position), and control of traffic patterns or direction months for recovery. These OHS problems should be minimized • Restricting the circulation of delivery and private vehicles to or eliminated to maintain a productive workplace. Controls may defined routes and areas, giving preference to ‘one-way’ include: circulation, where appropriate • Facility and workstation design with 5th to 95th percentile operational and maintenance workers in mind Working Environment Temperature • Use of mechanical assists to eliminate or reduce exertions Exposure to hot or cold working conditions in indoor or outdoor required to lift materials, hold tools and work objects, and environments can result temperature stress-related injury or requiring multi-person lifts if weights exceed thresholds death. Use of personal protective equipment (PPE) to protect • Selecting and designing tools that reduce force requirements against other occupational hazards can accentuate and aggravate and holding times, and improve postures heat-related illnesses. Extreme temperatures in permanent work • Providing user adjustable work stations environments should be avoided through implementation of • Incorporating rest and stretch breaks into work processes, engineering controls and ventilation. Where this is not possible, and conducting job rotation such as during short-term outdoor work, temperature-related • Implementing quality control and maintenance programs that stress management procedures should be implemented which reduce unnecessary forces and exertions include: • Taking into consideration additional special conditions such • Monitoring weather forecasts for outdoor work to provide as left handed persons advance warning of extreme weather and scheduling work accordingly Working at Heights • Adjustment of work and rest periods according to Fall prevention and protection measures should be implemented temperature stress management procedures provided by whenever a worker is exposed to the hazard of falling more than ACGIH 67, depending on the temperature and workloads two meters; into operating machinery; into water or other liquid; • Providing temporary shelters to protect against the elements into hazardous substances; or through an opening in a work during working activities or for use as rest areas surface. Fall prevention / protection measures may also be warranted on a case-specific basis when there are risks of falling from lesser heights. Fall prevention may include: 67 ACGIH, 2005 APRIL 30, 2007 68 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Installation of guardrails with mid-rails and toe boards at the supplemented with dedicated work station illumination, as needed. edge of any fall hazard area The minimum limits for illumination intensity for a range of • Proper use of ladders and scaffolds by trained employees locations/activities appear in Table 2.3.3. • Use of fall prevention devices, including safety belt and Controls should include: lanyard travel limiting devices to prevent access to fall hazard • Use of energy efficient light sources with minimum heat area, or fall protection devices such as full body harnesses emission used in conjunction with shock absorbing lanyards or self- • Undertaking measures to eliminate glare / reflections and retracting inertial fall arrest devices attached to fixed anchor flickering of lights point or horizontal life-lines • Taking precautions to minimize and control optical radiation • Appropriate training in use, serviceability, and integrity of the including direct sunlight. Exposure to high intensity UV and necessary PPE IR radiation and high intensity visible light should also be • Inclusion of rescue and/or recovery plans, and equipment to controlled respond to workers after an arrested fall • Controlling laser hazards in accordance with equipment Illumination specifications, certifications, and recognized safety Work area light intensity should be adequate for the general standards. The lowest feasible class Laser should be applied purpose of the location and type of activity, and should be to minimize risks. 2.4 Chemical Hazards Table 2.3.3. Minimum Limits For Workplace Chemical hazards represent potential for illness or injury due to Illumination Intensity single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure to toxic, Location / Activity Light Intensity corrosive, sensitizing or oxidative substances. They also Emergency light 10 lux represent a risk of uncontrolled reaction, including the risk of fire and explosion, if incompatible chemicals are inadvertently mixed. Outdoor non working areas 20 lux Chemical hazards can most effectively be prevented through a Simple orientation and temporary visits (machine 50 lux hierarchical approach that includes: storage, garage, warehouse) • Replacement of the hazardous substance with a less Workspace with occasional visual tasks only 100 lux (corridors, stairways, lobby, elevator, auditorium, etc.) hazardous substitute • Implementation of engineering and administrative control Medium precision work (simple assembly, rough 200 lux machine works, welding, packing, etc.) measures to avoid or minimize the release of hazardous substances into the work environment keeping the level of Precision work (reading, moderately difficult 500 lux assembly, sorting, checking, medium bench and exposure below internationally established or recognized machine works, etc.), offices. limits High precision work (difficult assembly, sewing, color 1,000 – 3,000 • Keeping the number of employees exposed, or likely to inspection, fine sorting etc.) lux become exposed, to a minimum APRIL 30, 2007 69 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Communicating chemical hazards to workers through • Where ambient air contains several materials that have labeling and marking according to national and internationally similar effects on the same body organs (additive effects), recognized requirements and standards, including the taking into account combined exposures using calculations International Chemical Safety Cards (ICSC), Materials Safety recommended by the ACGIH 69 Data Sheets (MSDS), or equivalent. Any means of written • Where work shifts extend beyond eight (8) hours, calculating communication should be in an easily understood language adjusted workplace exposure criteria recommended by the and be readily available to exposed workers and first-aid ACGIH 70 personnel • Training workers in the use of the available information (such Fire and Explosions as MSDSs), safe work practices, and appropriate use of PPE Fires and or explosions resulting from ignition of flammable materials or gases can lead to loss of property as well as possible Air Quality injury or fatalities to project workers. Prevention and control Poor air quality due to the release of contaminants into the work strategies include: place can result in possible respiratory irritation, discomfort, or • Storing flammables away from ignition sources and oxidizing illness to workers. Employers should take appropriate measures materials. Further, flammables storage area should be: to maintain air quality in the work area. These include: o Remote from entry and exit points into buildings • Maintaining levels of contaminant dusts, vapors and gases in o Away from facility ventilation intakes or vents the work environment at concentrations below those o Have natural or passive floor and ceiling level ventilation recommended by the ACGIH 68 as TWA-TLV’s (threshold limit and explosion venting value)—concentrations to which most workers can be o Use spark-proof fixtures exposed repeatedly (8 hours/day, 40 hrs/week, week-after- o Be equipped with fire extinguishing devices and self- week), without sustaining adverse health effects. closing doors, and constructed of materials made to • Developing and implementing work practices to minimize withstand flame impingement for a moderate period of release of contaminants into the work environment including: time o Direct piping of liquid and gaseous materials • Providing bonding and grounding of, and between, o Minimized handling of dry powdered materials; containers and additional mechanical floor level ventilation if o Enclosed operations materials are being, or could be, dispensed in the storage o Local exhaust ventilation at emission / release points area o Vacuum transfer of dry material rather than mechanical • Where the flammable material is mainly comprised of dust, or pneumatic conveyance providing electrical grounding, spark detection, and, if o Indoor secure storage, and sealed containers rather needed, quenching systems than loose storage 69 ACGIH, 2005. 68 ACGIH, 2005 70 ACGIH, 2005. APRIL 30, 2007 70 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Defining and labeling fire hazards areas to warn of special Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) rules (e.g. prohibition in use of smoking materials, cellular The use of asbestos containing materials (ACM) should be phones, or other potential spark generating equipment) avoided in new buildings or as a new material in remodeling or • Providing specific worker training in handling of flammable renovation activities. Existing facilities with ACM should develop materials, and in fire prevention or suppression an asbestos management plan which clearly identifies the locations where the ACM is present, its condition (e.g. whether it Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals is in friable form with the potential to release fibers), procedures Corrosive, oxidizing, and reactive chemicals present similar for monitoring its condition, procedures to access the locations hazards and require similar control measures as flammable where ACM is present to avoid damage, and training of staff who materials. However, the added hazard of these chemicals is that can potentially come into contact with the material to avoid inadvertent mixing or intermixing may cause serious adverse damage and prevent exposure. The plan should be made reactions. This can lead to the release of flammable or toxic available to all persons involved in operations and maintenance materials and gases, and may lead directly to fires and activities. Repair or removal and disposal of existing ACM in explosions. These types of substances have the additional hazard buildings should only be performed by specially trained of causing significant personal injury upon direct contact, personnel71 following host country requirements, or in their regardless of any intermixing issues. The following controls absence, internationally recognized procedures.72 should be observed in the work environment when handling such chemicals: 2.5 Biological Hazards • Corrosive, oxidizing and reactive chemicals should be Biological agents represent potential for illness or injury due to segregated from flammable materials and from other single acute exposure or chronic repetitive exposure. Biological chemicals of incompatible class (acids vs. bases, oxidizers hazards can be prevented most effectively by implementing the vs. reducers, water sensitive vs. water based, etc.), stored in following measures: ventilated areas and in containers with appropriate • If the nature of the activity permits, use of any harmful secondary containment to minimize intermixing during spills biological agents should be avoided and replaced with an • Workers who are required to handle corrosive, oxidizing, or agent that, under normal conditions of use, is not dangerous reactive chemicals should be provided with specialized or less dangerous to workers. If use of harmful agents can training and provided with, and wear, appropriate PPE not be avoided, precautions should be taken to keep the risk (gloves, apron, splash suits, face shield or goggles, etc). of exposure as low as possible and maintained below • Where corrosive, oxidizing, or reactive chemicals are used, internationally established and recognized exposure limits. handled, or stored, qualified first-aid should be ensured at all times. Appropriately equipped first-aid stations should be 71 Training of specialized personnel and the maintenance and removal methods easily accessible throughout the place of work, and eye-wash applied should be equivalent to those required under applicable regulations in the stations and/or emergency showers should be provided close United States and Europe (examples of North American training standards are available at: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/asbestos/training.html) 72 Examples include the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E to all workstations where the recommended first-aid 1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement Projects; E response is immediate flushing with water 2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys; and E 2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of Installed Asbestos Cement Products. APRIL 30, 2007 71 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Work processes, engineering, and administrative controls The employer should at all times encourage and enforce the should be designed, maintained, and operated to avoid or highest level of hygiene and personal protection, especially for minimize release of biological agents into the working activities employing biological agents of Groups 3 and 4 above. environment. The number of employees exposed or likely to Work involving agents in Groups 3 and 4 should be restricted only become exposed should be kept at a minimum. to those persons who have received specific verifiable training in • The employer should review and assess known and working with and controlling such materials. suspected presence of biological agents at the place of work and implement appropriate safety measures, monitoring, Areas used for the handling of Groups 3 and 4 biological agents training, and training verification programs. should be designed to enable their full segregation and isolation in • Measures to eliminate and control hazards from known and emergency circumstances, include independent ventilation suspected biological agents at the place of work should be systems, and be subject to SOPs requiring routine disinfection designed, implemented and maintained in close co-operation and sterilization of the work surfaces. with the local health authorities and according to recognized international standards. HVAC systems serving areas handling Groups 3 and 4 biological agents should be equipped with High Efficiency Particulate Air Biological agents should be classified into four groups73: (HEPA) filtration systems. Equipment should readily enable their • Group 1: Biological agents unlikely to cause human disease, disinfection and sterilization, and maintained and operated so as and consequently only require controls similar to those to prevent growth and spreading of disease agents, amplification required for hazardous or reactive chemical substances; of the biological agents, or breeding of vectors e.g. mosquitoes and flies of public health concern. • Group 2: Biological agents that can cause human disease and are thereby likely to require additional controls, but are unlikely to spread to the community; • Group 3: Biological agents that can cause severe human disease, present a serious hazard to workers, and may present a risk of spreading to the community, for which there usually is effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are thereby likely to require extensive additional controls; • Group 4: Biological agents that can cause severe human disease, are a serious hazard to workers, and present a high risk of spreading to the community, for which there is usually no effective prophylaxis or treatment available and are thereby likely to require very extensive additional controls. 73 World Health Organization (WHO) Classification of Infective Microorganisms by Risk Group (2004). APRIL 30, 2007 72 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP 2.6 Radiological Hazards • In the case of both ionizing and non-ionizing radiation, the preferred method for controlling exposure is shielding and Radiation exposure can lead to potential discomfort, injury or limiting the radiation source. Personal protective equipment serious illness to workers. Prevention and control strategies is supplemental only or for emergency use. Personal include: protective equipment for near-infrared, visible and ultraviolet • Places of work involving occupational and/or natural range radiation can include appropriate sun block creams, exposure to ionizing radiation should be established and with or without appropriate screening clothing. operated in accordance with recognized international safety standards and guidelines.74 The acceptable effective dose 2.7 Personal Protective Equipment limits appear Table 2.6.1. (PPE) • Exposure to non-ionizing radiation (including static magnetic Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) provides additional fields; sub-radio frequency magnetic fields; static electric protection to workers exposed to workplace hazards in fields; radio frequency and microwave radiation; light and conjunction with other facility controls and safety systems. near-infrared radiation; and ultraviolet radiation) should be controlled to internationally recommended limits75. PPE is considered to be a last resort that is above and beyond the other facility controls and provides the worker with an extra level of personal protection. Table 2.7.1 presents general examples of Table 2.6.1. Acceptable Effective Dose Limits for occupational hazards and types of PPE available for different Workplace Radiological Hazards purposes. Recommended measures for use of PPE in the workplace include: Apprentices and Workers students • Active use of PPE if alternative technologies, work plans or (min.19 years of (16-18 years procedures cannot eliminate, or sufficiently reduce, a hazard Exposure age) of age) or exposure Five consecutive year average – effective dose 20 mSv/year • Identification and provision of appropriate PPE that offers adequate protection to the worker, co-workers, and Single year exposure 50 mSv/year 6 mSv/year occasional visitors, without incurring unnecessary – effective dose inconvenience to the individual Equivalent dose to the lens of 150 mSv/year 50 mSv/year the eye • Proper maintenance of PPE, including cleaning when dirty and replacement when damaged or worn out. Proper use of Equivalent dose to the 150 extremities (hands, feet) or the 500 mSv/year PPE should be part of the recurrent training programs for mSv/year skin employees 74 International Basic Safety Standard for protection against Ionizing Radiation and for the Safety of Radiation Sources and its three interrelated Safety Guides. IAEA. http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160 75 For example ACGIH (2005) and International Commission for Non-Ionizing Radiation (ICNIRP). APRIL 30, 2007 73 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Selection of PPE should be based on the hazard and risk by recognized organizations76. ranking described earlier in this section, and selected according to criteria on performance and testing established 2.8 Special Hazard Environments Special hazard environments are work situations where all of the previously described hazards may exist under unique or especially Table 2.7.1. Summary of Recommended Personal hazardous circumstances. Accordingly, extra precautions or rigor Protective Equipment According to Hazard in application of precautions is required. Objective Workplace Hazards Suggested PPE Confined Space A confined space is defined as a wholly or partially enclosed Eye and Flying particles, molten Safety Glasses with side-shields, face metal, liquid chemicals, protective shades, etc. space not designed or intended for human occupancy and in protection gases or vapors, light radiation. which a hazardous atmosphere could develop as a result of the contents, location or construction of the confined space or due to Head Falling objects, inadequate Plastic Helmets with top and side protection height clearance, and impact protection. work done in or around the confined space. A “permit-required” overhead power cords. confined space is one that also contains physical or atmospheric Hearing Noise, ultra-sound. Hearing protectors (ear plugs or hazards that could trap or engulf the person.77 protection ear muffs). Foot Falling or rolling objects, Safety shoes and boots for Confined spaces can occur in enclosed or open structures or protection pointed objects. Corrosive protection against moving & or hot liquids. falling objects, liquids and locations. Serious injury or fatality can result from inadequate chemicals. preparation to enter a confined space or in attempting a rescue Hand Hazardous materials, cuts Gloves made of rubber or from a confined space. Recommended management approaches protection or lacerations, vibrations, synthetic materials (Neoprene), extreme temperatures. leather, steel, insulating include: materials, etc. Respiratory Dust, fogs, fumes, mists, Facemasks with appropriate • Engineering measures should be implemented to eliminate, protection gases, smokes, vapors. filters for dust removal and air to the degree feasible, the existence and adverse character purification (chemicals, mists, vapors and gases). Single or of confined spaces. multi-gas personal monitors, if available. • Permit-required confined spaces should be provided with Oxygen deficiency Portable or supplied air (fixed permanent safety measures for venting, monitoring, and lines). rescue operations, to the extent possible. The area adjoining On-site rescue equipment. an access to a confined space should provide ample room Body/leg Extreme temperatures, Insulating clothing, body suits, for emergency and rescue operations. protection hazardous materials, aprons etc. of appropriate biological agents, cutting materials. and laceration. 76 Examples include the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), http://www.ansi.org/; National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health76 (NIOSH), http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html; Canadian Standards Association76 (CSA), http://www.csa.ca/Default.asp?language=english; Mine Safety and Health Administration76 (MSHA), http://www.msha.gov. 77 US OSHA CFR 1910.146 APRIL 30, 2007 74 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Access hatches should accommodate 90% of the worker persons capable of providing aid and assistance, for continuous population with adjustments for tools and protective clothing. periods exceeding one hour. The worker is therefore at increased The most current ISO and EN standards should be consulted risk should an accident or injury occur. for design specifications; • Where workers may be required to perform work under lone • Prior to entry into a permit-required confined space: or isolated circumstances, Standard Operating Procedures o Process or feed lines into the space should be (SOPs) should be developed and implemented to ensure all disconnected or drained, and blanked and locked-out. PPE and safety measures are in place before the worker o Mechanical equipment in the space should be starts work. SOPs should establish, at a minimum, verbal disconnected, de-energized, locked-out, and braced, as contact with the worker at least once every hour, and ensure appropriate. the worker has a capability for summoning emergency aid. o The atmosphere within the confined space should be • If the worker is potentially exposed to highly toxic or corrosive tested to assure the oxygen content is between 19.5 chemicals, emergency eye-wash and shower facilities should percent and 23 percent, and that the presence of any be equipped with audible and visible alarms to summon aid flammable gas or vapor does not exceed 25 percent of whenever the eye-wash or shower is activated by the worker its respective Lower Explosive Limit (LEL). and without intervention by the worker. o If the atmospheric conditions are not met, the confined space should be ventilated until the target safe 2.9 Monitoring atmosphere is achieved, or entry is only to be Occupational health and safety monitoring programs should verify undertaken with appropriate and additional PPE. the effectiveness of prevention and control strategies. The selected indicators should be representative of the most • Safety precautions should include Self Contained Breathing significant occupational, health, and safety hazards, and the Apparatus (SCBA), life lines, and safety watch workers implementation of prevention and control strategies. The stationed outside the confined space, with rescue and first occupational health and safety monitoring program should include: aid equipment readily available. • Safety inspection, testing and calibration: This should include • Before workers are required to enter a permit-required confined space, adequate and appropriate training in regular inspection and testing of all safety features and hazard control measures focusing on engineering and confined space hazard control, atmospheric testing, use of personal protective features, work procedures, places of the necessary PPE, as well as the serviceability and integrity work, installations, equipment, and tools used. The of the PPE should be verified. Further, adequate and inspection should verify that issued PPE continues to provide appropriate rescue and / or recovery plans and equipment should be in place before the worker enters the confined adequate protection and is being worn as required. All space. instruments installed or used for monitoring and recording of working environment parameters should be regularly tested Lone and Isolated Workers and calibrated, and the respective records maintained. A lone and isolated worker is a worker out of verbal and line of • Surveillance of the working environment: Employers should sight communication with a supervisor, other workers, or other document compliance using an appropriate combination of APRIL 30, 2007 75 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP portable and stationary sampling and monitoring instruments. • The systems and the employer should further enable and Monitoring and analyses should be conducted according to encourage workers to report to management all: internationally recognized methods and standards. o Occupational injuries and near misses Monitoring methodology, locations, frequencies, and o Suspected cases of occupational disease parameters should be established individually for each o Dangerous occurrences and incidents project following a review of the hazards. Generally, • All reported occupational accidents, occupational diseases, monitoring should be performed during commissioning of dangerous occurrences, and incidents together with near facilities or equipment and at the end of the defect and misses should be investigated with the assistance of a liability period, and otherwise repeated according to the person knowledgeable/competent in occupational safety. The monitoring plan. investigation should: • Surveillance of workers health: When extraordinary o Establish what happened protective measures are required (for example, against o Determine the cause of what happened biological agents Groups 3 and 4, and/or hazardous o Identify measures necessary to prevent a recurrence compounds), workers should be provided appropriate and relevant health surveillance prior to first exposure, and at • Occupational accidents and diseases should, at a minimum, regular intervals thereafter. The surveillance should, if be classified according to Table 2.10.1. Distinction is made deemed necessary, be continued after termination of the between fatal and non-fatal injuries. The two main categories employment. are divided into three sub-categories according to time of • Training: Training activities for employees and visitors should death or duration of the incapacity to work. The total work be adequately monitored and documented (curriculum, hours during the specified reporting period should be duration, and participants). Emergency exercises, including reported to the appropriate regulatory agency. fire drills, should be documented adequately. Service Table 2.9.1. Occupational Accident Reporting providers and contractors should be contractually required to submit to the employer adequate training documentation a. Fatalities b. Non-fatal c. Total time lost before start of their assignment. (number) injuries non-fatal injuries (number) 78 (days) b.1 Less than one a.1 Immediate Accidents and Diseases monitoring day • The employer should establish procedures and systems for a.2 Within a month b.2 Up to 3 days c.1 Category b.2 reporting and recording: b.3 More than 3 a.3 Within a year c.2 Category b.3 days o Occupational accidents and diseases o Dangerous occurrences and incidents These systems should enable workers to report immediately to their immediate supervisor any situation they believe presents a serious danger to life or health. 78 The day on which an incident occurs is not included in b.2 and b.3. APRIL 30, 2007 76 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP 3.0 Community Health and Safety 3.1 Water Quality and Availability ...................................77 impoundment should prevent adverse impacts to the quality and Water Quality.........................................................77 availability of groundwater and surface water resources. Water Availability....................................................77 3.2 Structural Safety of Project Infrastructure ..................78 3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) ......................................79 Water Quality Applicability and Approach......................................79 Drinking water sources, whether public or private, should at all Specific Requirements for New Buildings................79 times be protected so that they meet or exceed applicable national L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval.................80 Specific Requirements for Existing Buildings ...........81 acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of Other Hazards........................................................81 WHO Guidelines for Drinking-Water Quality. Air emissions, 3.4 Traffic Safety............................................................81 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials .............................82 wastewater effluents, oil and hazardous materials, and wastes General Hazardous Materials Transport..................82 should be managed according to the guidance provided in the Major Transportation Hazards.................................83 respective sections of the General EHS Guidelines with the 3.6 Disease Prevention..................................................85 Communicable Diseases........................................85 objective of protecting soil and water resources. Vector-Borne Diseases...........................................85 Where the project includes the delivery of water to the community 3.7 Emergency Preparedness and Response .................86 Communication Systems ........................................86 or to users of facility infrastructure (such as hotel hosts and Emergency Resources ...........................................87 hospital patients), where water may be used for drinking, cooking, Training and Updating ............................................87 washing, and bathing, water quality should comply with national Business Continuity and Contingency .....................88 Applicability and Approach......................................89 acceptability standards or in their absence the current edition of with WHO Drinking Water Guidelines. Water quality for more sensitive well-being-related demands such as water used in health This section complements the guidance provided in the preceding care facilities or food production may require more stringent, environmental and occupational health and safety sections, industry-specific guidelines or standards, as applicable. Any specifically addressing some aspects of project activities taking dependency factors associated with the deliver of water to the place outside of the traditional project boundaries, but nonetheless local community should be planned for and managed to ensure related to the project operations, as may be applicable on a the sustainability of the water supply by involving the community in project basis. These issues may arise at any stage of a project life its management to minimize the dependency in the long-term. cycle and can have an impact beyond the life of the project. Water Availability 3.1 Water Quality and Availability The potential effect of groundwater or surface water abstraction Groundwater and surface water represent essential sources of for project activities should be properly assessed through a drinking and irrigation water in developing countries, particularly in combination of field testing and modeling techniques, accounting rural areas where piped water supply may be limited or for seasonal variability and projected changes in demand in the unavailable and where available resources are collected by the project area. consumer with little or no treatment. Project activities involving wastewater discharges, water extraction, diversion or APRIL 30, 2007 77 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP Project activities should not compromise the availability of water project structures should be designed in accordance with for personal hygiene needs and should take account of potential engineering and design criteria mandated by site-specific future increases in demand. The overall target should be the risks, including but not limited to seismic activity, slope availability of 100 liters per person per day although lower levels stability, wind loading, and other dynamic loads may be used to meet basic health requirements.79 Water volume • Application of locally regulated or internationally recognized requirements for well-being-related demands such as water use in building codes80 to ensure structures are designed and health care facilities may need to be higher. constructed in accordance with sound architectural and engineering practice, including aspects of fire prevention and 3.2 Structural Safety of Project response Infrastructure • Engineers and architects responsible for designing and Hazards posed to the public while accessing project facilities may constructing facilities, building, plants and other structures include: should certify the applicability and appropriateness of the • Physical trauma associated with failure of building structures structural criteria employed. • Burns and smoke inhalation from fires International codes, such as those compiled by the International • Injuries suffered as a consequence of falls or contact with Code Council (ICC) 81, are intended to regulate the design, heavy equipment construction, and maintenance of a built environment and contain • Respiratory distress from dust, fumes, or noxious odors detailed guidance on all aspects of building safety, encompassing • Exposure to hazardous materials methodology, best practices, and documenting compliance. Reduction of potential hazards is best accomplished during the Depending on the nature of a project, guidance provided in the design phase when the structural design, layout and site ICC or comparable codes should be followed, as appropriate, with modifications can be adapted more easily. The following issues respect to: should be considered and incorporated as appropriate into the • Existing structures planning, siting, and design phases of a project: • Soils and foundations • Inclusion of buffer strips or other methods of physical • Site grading separation around project sites to protect the public from • Structural design major hazards associated with hazardous materials incidents • Specific requirements based on intended use and occupancy or process failure, as well as nuisance issues related to • Accessibility and means of egress noise, odors, or other emissions • Types of construction • Incorporation of siting and safety engineering criteria to • Roof design and construction prevent failures due to natural risks posed by earthquakes, • Fire-resistant construction tsunamis, wind, flooding, landslides and fire. To this end, all • Flood-resistant construction 79 World Health Organization (WHO) defines 100 liters/capita/day as the amount 80 ILO-OSH, 2001. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/ required to meet all consumption and hygiene needs. Additional information on lower service levels and potential impacts on health are described in “Domestic safework/cops/english/download/e000013.pdf Water Quantity, Service Level and Health” 2003. 81 ICC, 2006. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/diseases/wsh0302/en/index.html APRIL 30, 2007 78 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Construction materials codes, local fire department regulations, local legal/insurance • Interior environment requirements, and in accordance with an internationally accepted • Mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems life and fire safety (L&FS) standard. The Life Safety Code82, which • Elevators and conveying systems provides extensive documentation on life and fire safety • Fire safety systems provisions, is one example of an internationally accepted standard • Safeguards during construction and may be used to document compliance with the Life and Fire • Encroachments into public right-of-way Safety objectives outlined in these guidelines. With regard to these objectives: Although major design changes may not be feasible during the operation phase of a project, hazard analysis can be undertaken • Project sponsors’ architects and professional consulting to identify opportunities to reduce the consequences of a failure or engineers should demonstrate that affected buildings meet accident. Illustrative management actions, applicable to these life and fire safety objectives. hazardous materials storage and use, include: • Life and fire safety systems and equipment should be • Reducing inventories of hazardous materials through designed and installed using appropriate prescriptive inventory management and process changes to greatly standards and/or performance based design, and sound reduce or eliminate the potential off-site consequences of a engineering practices. release • Life and fire safety design criteria for all existing buildings • Modifying process or storage conditions to reduce the should incorporate all local building codes and fire potential consequences of an accidental off-site release department regulations. • Improving shut-down and secondary containment to reduce These guidelines apply to buildings that are accessible to the the amount of material escaping from containment and to public. Examples of such buildings include: reduce the release duration • Reducing the probability that releases will occur through • Health and education facilities improved site operations and control, and through • Hotels, convention centers, and leisure facilities improvements in maintenance and inspection • Retail and commercial facilities • Reducing off-site impacts of releases through measures • Airports, other public transport terminals, transfer facilities intended to contain explosions and fires, alert the public, provide for evacuation of surrounding areas, establish safety Specific Requirements for New Buildings zones around a site, and ensure the provision of emergency The nature and extent of life and fire safety systems required will medical services to the public depend on the building type, structure, construction, occupancy, and exposures. Sponsors should prepare a Life and Fire Safety 3.3 Life and Fire Safety (L&FS) Master Plan identifying major fire risks, applicable codes, standards and regulations, and mitigation measures. The Master Applicability and Approach 82 US NFPA. All new buildings accessible to the public should be designed, http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target% constructed, and operated in full compliance with local building 5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search APRIL 30, 2007 79 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP Plan should be prepared by a suitably qualified professional, and Compartmentation adequately cover, but not be limited to, the issues addressed Compartmentation involves all measures to prevent or slow the briefly in the following points. The suitably qualified professional spread of fire and smoke, including: selected to prepare the Master Plan is responsible for a detailed • Separations treatment of the following illustrative, and all other required, • Fire walls issues. • Floors Fire Prevention • Doors Fire prevention addresses the identification of fire risks and • Dampers ignition sources, and measures needed to limit fast fire and smoke • Smoke control systems development. These issues include: Fire Suppression and Control • Fuel load and control of combustibles Fire suppression and control includes all automatic and manual • Ignition sources fire protection installations, such as: • Interior finish flame spread characteristics • Automatic sprinkler systems • Interior finish smoke production characteristics • Manual portable extinguishers • Human acts, and housekeeping and maintenance • Fire hose reels Means of Egress Means of Egress includes all design measures that facilitate a Emergency Response Plan safe evacuation by residents and/or occupants in case of fire or An Emergency Response Plan is a set of scenario–based other emergency, such as: procedures to assist staff and emergency response teams during real life emergency and training exercises. This chapter of the Fire • Clear, unimpeded escape routes and Life Safety Master Plan should include an assessment of local • Accessibility to the impaired/handicapped fire prevention and suppression capabilities. • Marking and signing • Emergency lighting Operation and Maintenance Operation and Maintenance involves preparing schedules for Detection and Alarm Systems mandatory regular maintenance and testing of life and fire safety These systems encompass all measures, including features to ensure that mechanical, electrical, and civil structures communication and public address systems needed to detect a and systems are at all times in conformance with life and fire fire and alert: safety design criteria and required operational readiness. • Building staff • Emergency response teams L&FS Master Plan Review and Approval • Occupants • A suitably qualified professional prepares and submits a Life • Civil defense and Fire Safety (L&FS) Master Plan, including preliminary drawings and specifications, and certifies that the design APRIL 30, 2007 80 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP meets the requirements of these L&FS guidelines. The earthquakes, tsunamis, floods, windstorms, and fires from findings and recommendations of the review are then used to surrounding areas). establish the conditions of a Corrective Action Plan and a • All such structures should be designed in accordance with time frame for implementing the changes. the criteria mandated by situation-, climatic-, and geology- • The suitably qualified professional conducts a review as part specific location risks (e.g. seismic activity, wind loading, and of the project completion test at the time of life and fire safety other dynamic loads). systems testing and commissioning, and certifies that • Structural engineers and architects responsible for facilities, construction of these systems has been carried out in buildings, plants and structures should certify the applicability accordance with the accepted design. The findings and and appropriateness of the design criteria employed. recommendations of the review are used as the basis for • National or regional building regulations typically contain fire establishing project completion or to establish the conditions safety codes and standards83 or these standards are found in of a Pre-Completion Corrective Action Plan and a time frame separate Fire Codes.84,85 Generally, such codes and for implementing the changes. regulations incorporate further compliance requirements with respect to methodology, practice, testing, and other codes Specific Requirements for Existing and standards86. Such nationally referenced material Buildings constitutes the acceptable fire life safety code. • All life and fire safety guideline requirements for new buildings apply to existing buildings programmed for 3.4 Traffic Safety renovation. A suitably qualified professional conducts a Traffic accidents have become one of the most significant causes complete life and fire safety review of existing buildings of injuries and fatalities among members of the public worldwide. slated for renovation. The findings and recommendations of Traffic safety should be promoted by all project personnel during the review are used as the basis to establish the scope of displacement to and from the workplace, and during operation of work of a Corrective Action Plan and a time frame for project equipment on private or public roads. Prevention and implementing the changes. control of traffic related injuries and fatalities should include the • If it becomes apparent that life and fire safety conditions are adoption of safety measures that are protective of project workers deficient in an existing building that is not part of the project and of road users, including those who are most vulnerable to or that has not been programmed for renovation, a life and road traffic accidents87. Road safety initiatives proportional to the fire safety review of the building may be conducted by a scope and nature of project activities should include: suitably qualified professional. The findings and recommendations of the review are used as the basis to establish the scope of work of a Corrective Action Plan and a 83 For example, Australia, Canada, South Africa, United Kingdom 84 Réglementation Incendie [des ERP] time frame for implementing the changes. 85 USA NFPA, 2006. 86 Prepared by National Institutes and Authorities such as American Society for Other Hazards Testing and Materials (ASTM), British Standards (BS), German Institute of Standardization (DIN), and French Standards (NF) • Facilities, buildings, plants, and structures should be situated 87 Additional information on vulnerable users of public roads in developing countries is provided by Peden et al., 2004. to minimize potential risks from forces of nature (e.g. APRIL 30, 2007 81 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Adoption of best transport safety practices across all aspects • Employing safe traffic control measures, including road signs of project operations with the goal of preventing traffic and flag persons to warn of dangerous conditions accidents and minimizing injuries suffered by project personnel and the public. Measures should include: 3.5 Transport of Hazardous Materials o Emphasizing safety aspects among drivers General Hazardous Materials Transport o Improving driving skills and requiring licensing of drivers • Projects should have procedures in place that ensure o Adopting limits for trip duration and arranging driver compliance with local laws and international requirements rosters to avoid overtiredness applicable to the transport of hazardous materials, including: o Avoiding dangerous routes and times of day to reduce the risk of accidents o IATA requirements89 for air transport o Use of speed control devices (governors) on trucks, and o IMDG Code90 sea transport remote monitoring of driver actions o UN Model Regulations91 of other international standards as well as local requirements for land transport • Regular maintenance of vehicles and use of manufacturer o Host-country commitments under the Basel Convention approved parts to minimize potentially serious accidents on the Control of Transboundary Movements of caused by equipment malfunction or premature failure. Hazardous Waste and their disposal and Rotterdam Where the project may contribute to a significant increase in traffic Convention on the prior Inform Consent Procedure for along existing roads, or where road transport is a significant Certain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in component of a project, recommended measures include: International Trade, if applicable to the project activities • Minimizing pedestrian interaction with construction vehicles • The procedures for transportation of hazardous materials • Collaboration with local communities and responsible (Hazmats) should include: authorities to improve signage, visibility and overall safety of o Proper labeling of containers, including the identify and roads, particularly along stretches located near schools or quantity of the contents, hazards, and shipper contact other locations where children may be present. Collaborating information with local communities on education about traffic and o Providing a shipping document (e.g. shipping manifest) pedestrian safety (e.g. school education campaigns)88 that describes the contents of the load and its • Coordination with emergency responders to ensure that associated hazards in addition to the labeling of the appropriate first aid is provided in the event of accidents containers. The shipping document should establish a • Using locally sourced materials, whenever possible, to chain-of-custody using multiple signed copies to show minimize transport distances. Locating associated facilities that the waste was properly shipped, transported and such as worker camps close to project sites and arranging received by the recycling or treatment/disposal facility worker bus transport to minimizing external traffic 89 IATA, 2005. www.iata.org 90 IMO. www.imo.org/safety 88Additional sources of information for implementation of road safety measures is 91 United Nations. Transport of Dangerous Goods - Model Regulations. 14th available at WHO, 1989, Ross et al., 1991, Tsunokawa and Hoban, 1997, and Revised Edition. Geneva 2005. OECD, 1999 http://www.unece.org/trans/danger/publi/unrec/rev14/14files_e.html APRIL 30, 2007 82 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP o Ensuring that the volume, nature, integrity and • The existing criteria for the safe transportation of hazardous protection of packaging and containers used for materials, including environmental management systems transport are appropriate for the type and quantity of used by the company and its contractors hazardous material and modes of transport involved This review should cover the management actions, preventive o Ensuring adequate transport vehicle specifications measures and emergency response procedures described below. o Training employees involved in the transportation of The hazard assessment helps to determine what additional hazardous materials regarding proper shipping measures may be required to complete the plan. procedures and emergency procedures o Using labeling and placarding (external signs on Management Actions transport vehicles), as required • Management of Change: These procedures should address: o Providing the necessary means for emergency response o The technical basis for changes in hazardous materials on call 24 hours/day offered for transportation, routes and/or procedures Major Transportation Hazards o The potential impact of changes on health and safety Guidance related to major transportation hazards should be o Modification required to operating procedures implemented in addition to measures presented in the preceding o Authorization requirements section for preventing or minimizing the consequences of o Employees affected catastrophic releases of hazardous materials, which may result in o Training needs toxic, fire, explosion, or other hazards during transportation. • Compliance Audit: A compliance audit evaluates compliance with prevention requirements for each transportation route or In addition to these aforementioned procedures, projects which for each hazardous material, as appropriate. A compliance transport hazardous materials at or above the threshold audit covering each element of the prevention measures (see quantities92 should prepare a Hazardous Materials Transportation below) should be conducted at least every three years. The Plan containing all of the elements presented below93. audit program should include: o Preparation of a report of the findings Hazard Assessment o Determination and documentation of the appropriate The hazard assessment should identify the potential hazard response to each finding involved in the transportation of hazardous materials by reviewing: o Documentation that any deficiency has been corrected. • The hazard characteristics of the substances identified during • Incident Investigation: Incidents can provide valuable the screening stage information about transportation hazards and the steps • The history of accidents, both by the company and its needed to prevent accidental releases. The implementation contractors, involving hazardous materials transportation of incident investigation procedures should ensure that: 92 Threshold quantities for the transport of hazardous materials are found in the UN – Transport of Dangerous Goods – Model Regulations cited above. o Investigations are initiated promptly 93 For further information and guidance, please refer to International Finance o Summaries of investigations are included in a report Corporation (IFC) Hazardous Materials Transportation Manual. Washington, D.C. December 2000. o Report findings and recommendations are addressed APRIL 30, 2007 83 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP o Reports are reviewed with staff and contractors Preventive Measures • Employee Participation: There should be a written plan of The plan should include procedures to implement preventive action regarding the implementation of active employee measures specific to each hazardous material offered for participation in the prevention of accidents. transportation, including: • Classification and segregation of hazardous materials in • Contractors: The plan should include procedures to ensure warehouses and transport units that: • Packaging and packaging testing o The contractor is provided with safety performance • Marking and labeling of packages containing hazardous procedures and safety and hazard information materials o Contractors observe safety practices • Handling and securing packages containing hazardous o Verify that the contractor acts responsibly materials in transport units The plan should also include additional procedures to ensure • Marking and placarding of transport units the contractors will: • Documentation (e.g. bills of lading) o Ensure appropriate training for their employees • Application of special provisions, as appropriate o Ensure their employees know process hazards and applicable emergency actions Emergency Preparedness and Response o Prepare and submit training records It is important to develop procedures and practices for the o Inform employees about the hazards presented by their handling of hazardous materials that allow for quick and efficient work responses to accidents that may result in injury or environmental damage. The sponsor should prepare an Emergency • Training: Good training programs on operating procedures Preparedness and Response Plan that should cover: will provide the employees with the necessary information to understand how to operate safely and why safe operations • Planning Coordination: This should include procedures for: are needed. The training program should include: o Informing the public and emergency response agencies o The list of employees to be trained o Documenting first aid and emergency medical treatment o Specific training objectives o Taking emergency response actions o Mechanisms to achieve objectives (i.e. hands-on o Reviewing and updating the emergency response plan workshops, videos, etc.) to reflect changes and ensuring that the employees are o Means to determine the effectiveness of the training informed of such changes program • Emergency Equipment: The plan should include procedures o Training procedures for new hires and refresher for using, inspecting, testing, and maintaining emergency programs response equipment. • Training: Employees should be trained in any relevant procedures APRIL 30, 2007 84 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP 3.6 Disease Prevention access to medical treatment, confidentiality and appropriate care, particularly with respect to migrant workers Communicable Diseases • Promoting collaboration with local authorities to enhance Communicable diseases pose a significant public health threat access of workers families and the community to public worldwide. Health hazards typically associated with large health services and promote immunization development projects are those relating to poor sanitation and living conditions, sexual transmission and vector-borne infections. Vector-Borne Diseases Communicable diseases of most concern during the construction Reducing the impact of vector-borne disease on the long-term phase due to labor mobility are sexually-transmitted diseases health of workers is best accomplished through implementation of (STDs), such as HIV/AIDS. Recognizing that no single measure diverse interventions aimed at eliminating the factors that lead to is likely to be effective in the long term, successful initiatives disease. Project sponsors, in close collaboration with community typically involve a combination of behavioral and environmental health authorities, can implement an integrated control strategy for modifications. mosquito and other arthropod-borne diseases that might involve: • Prevention of larval and adult propagation through sanitary Recommended interventions at the project level include94: improvements and elimination of breeding habitats close to • Providing surveillance and active screening and treatment of human settlements workers • Elimination of unusable impounded water • Preventing illness among workers in local communities by: • Increase in water velocity in natural and artificial channels o Undertaking health awareness and education initiatives, • Considering the application of residual insecticide to for example, by implementing an information strategy to dormitory walls reinforce person-to-person counseling addressing • Implementation of integrated vector control programs systemic factors that can influence individual behavior • Promoting use of repellents, clothing, netting, and other as well as promoting individual protection, and barriers to prevent insect bites protecting others from infection, by encouraging condom • Use of chemoprophylaxis drugs by non-immune workers and use collaborating with public health officials to help eradicate o Training health workers in disease treatment disease reservoirs o Conducting immunization programs for workers in local • Monitoring and treatment of circulating and migrating communities to improve health and guard against populations to prevent disease reservoir spread infection • Collaboration and exchange of in-kind services with other o Providing health services control programs in the project area to maximize beneficial • Providing treatment through standard case management in effects on-site or community health care facilities. Ensuring ready • Educating project personnel and area residents on risks, prevention, and available treatment • Monitoring communities during high-risk seasons to detect Additional sources of information on disease prevention include IFC, 2006; 94 UNDP, 2000, 2003; Walley et al., 2000; Kindhauser, 2003; Heymann, 2004. and treat cases APRIL 30, 2007 85 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Distributing appropriate education materials Alarm bells, visual alarms, or other forms of communication • Following safety guidelines for the storage, transport, and should be used to reliably alert workers to an emergency. Related distribution of pesticides to minimize the potential for misuse, measures include: spills, and accidental human exposure • Testing warning systems at least annually (fire alarms monthly), and more frequently if required by local regulations, 3.7 Emergency Preparedness and equipment, or other considerations Response • Installing a back-up system for communications on-site with An emergency is an unplanned event when a project operation off-site resources, such as fire departments, in the event that loses control, or could lose control, of a situation that may result in normal communication methods may be inoperable during an risks to human health, property, or the environment, either within emergency the facility or in the local community. Emergencies do not normally include safe work practices for frequent upsets or events Community Notification that are covered by occupational health and safety. If a local community may be at risk from a potential emergency arising at the facility, the company should implement All projects should have an Emergency Preparedness and communication measures to alert the community, such as: Response Plan that is commensurate with the risks of the facility and that includes the following basic elements: • Audible alarms, such as fire bells or sirens • Administration (policy, purpose, distribution, definitions, etc) • Fan out telephone call lists • Organization of emergency areas (command centers, • Vehicle mounted speakers medical stations, etc) • Communicating details of the nature of the emergency • Roles and responsibilities • Communicating protection options (evacuation, quarantine) • Communication systems • Providing advise on selecting an appropriate protection • Emergency response procedures option • Emergency resources Media and Agency Relations • Training and updating Emergency information should be communicated to the media • Checklists (role and action list and equipment checklist) through: • Business Continuity and Contingency • A trained, local spokesperson able to interact with relevant Additional information is provided for key components of the stakeholders, and offer guidance to the company for emergency plan, as follows below. speaking to the media, government, and other agencies • Written press releases with accurate information, appropriate Communication Systems level of detail for the emergency, and for which accuracy can Worker notification and communication be guaranteed APRIL 30, 2007 86 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP Emergency Resources • Considering the quantity, response time, capability, limitations, and cost of these resources, for both site-specific Finance and Emergency Funds emergencies, and community or regional emergencies • A mechanism should be provided for funding emergency • Considering if external resources are unable to provide activities. sufficient capacity during a regional emergency and whether additional resources may need to be maintained on-site Fire Services • The company should consider the level of local fire fighting Mutual Aid capacity and whether equipment is available for use at the Mutual aid agreements decrease administrative confusion and facility in the event of a major emergency or natural disaster. provide a clear basis for response by mutual aid providers. If insufficient capacity is available, fire fighting capacity • Where appropriate, mutual aid agreements should be should be acquired that may include pumps, water supplies, maintained with other organizations to allow for sharing of trucks, and training for personnel. personnel and specialized equipment. Medical Services Contact List • The company should provide first aid attendants for the • The company should develop a list of contact information for facility as well as medical equipment suitable for the all internal and external resources and personnel. The list personnel, type of operation, and the degree of treatment should include the name, description, location, and contact likely to be required prior to transportation to hospital. details (telephone, email) for each of the resources, and be maintained annually. Availability of Resources Appropriate measures for managing the availability of resources in Training and Updating case of an emergency include: The emergency preparedness facilities and emergency response • Maintaining a list of external equipment, personnel, facilities, plans require maintenance, review, and updating to account for funding, expert knowledge, and materials that may be changes in equipment, personnel, and facilities. Training required to respond to emergencies. The list should include programs and practice exercises provide for testing systems to personnel with specialized expertise for spill clean-up, flood ensure an adequate level of emergency preparedness. Programs control, engineering, water treatment, environmental science, should: etc., or any of the functions required to adequately respond • Identify training needs based on the roles and to the identified emergency responsibilities, capabilities and requirements of personnel • Providing personnel who can readily call up resources, as in an emergency required • Develop a training plan to address needs, particularly for fire • Tracking and managing the costs associated with emergency fighting, spill response, and evacuation resources APRIL 30, 2007 87 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: COMMUNITY HEALTH AND SAFETY WORLD BANK GROUP • Conduct annual training, at least, and perhaps more frequent training when the response includes specialized equipment, procedures, or hazards, or when otherwise mandated • Provide training exercises to allow personnel the opportunity to test emergency preparedness, including: o Desk top exercises with only a few personnel, where the contact lists are tested and the facilities and communication assessed o Response exercises, typically involving drills that allow for testing of equipment and logistics o Debrief upon completion of a training exercise to assess what worked well and what aspects require improvement o Update the plan, as required, after each exercise. Elements of the plan subject to significant change (such as contact lists) should be replaced o Record training activities and the outcomes of the training Business Continuity and Contingency Measures to address business continuity and contingency include: • Identifying replacement supplies or facilities to allow business continuity following an emergency. For example, alternate sources of water, electricity, and fuel are commonly sought. • Using redundant or duplicate supply systems as part of facility operations to increase the likelihood of business continuity. • Maintaining back-ups of critical information in a secure location to expedite the return to normal operations following an emergency. APRIL 30, 2007 88 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP 4.0 Construction and Decommissioning planned during periods of the day that will result in least 4.1 Environment.............................................................89 disturbance Noise and Vibration ................................................89 Soil Erosion............................................................89 • Using noise control devices, such as temporary noise Air Quality..............................................................90 barriers and deflectors for impact and blasting activities, and Solid Waste............................................................90 exhaust muffling devices for combustion engines. Hazardous Materials...............................................91 Wastewater Discharges..........................................91 • Avoiding or minimizing project transportation through Contaminated Land ................................................91 community areas 4.2 Occupational Health and Safety................................92 4.3 Community Health and Safety ..................................94 General Site Hazards .............................................94 Soil Erosion Disease Prevention ................................................94 Soil erosion may be caused by exposure of soil surfaces to rain Traffic Safety..........................................................95 and wind during site clearing, earth moving, and excavation activities. The mobilization and transport of soil particles may, in turn, result in sedimentation of surface drainage networks, which Applicability and Approach may result in impacts to the quality of natural water systems and This section provides additional, specific guidance on prevention ultimately the biological systems that use these waters. and control of community health and safety impacts that may Recommended soil erosion and water system management occur during new project development, at the end of the project approaches include: life-cycle, or due to expansion or modification of existing project facilities. Cross referencing is made to various other sections of Sediment mobilization and transport the General EHS Guidelines. • Reducing or preventing erosion by: Scheduling to avoid heavy rainfall periods (i.e., during 4.1 Environment { TC "4.1 o the dry season) to the extent practical Environment" \f C \l "2" } o Contouring and minimizing length and steepness of Noise and Vibration slopes During construction and decommissioning activities, noise and o Mulching to stabilize exposed areas vibration may be caused by the operation of pile drivers, earth o Re-vegetating areas promptly moving and excavation equipment, concrete mixers, cranes and o Designing channels and ditches for post-construction the transportation of equipment, materials and people. Some flows recommended noise reduction and control strategies to consider o Lining steep channel and slopes (e.g. use jute matting) in areas close to community areas include: • Reducing or preventing off-site sediment transport through • Planning activities in consultation with local communities so use of settlement ponds, silt fences, and water treatment, that activities with the greatest potential to generate noise are and modifying or suspending activities during extreme rainfall and high winds to the extent practical. APRIL 30, 2007 89 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP Clean runoff management Air Quality • Segregating or diverting clean water runoff to prevent it Construction and decommissioning activities may generate mixing with water containing a high solids content, to emission of fugitive dust caused by a combination of on-site minimize the volume of water to be treated prior to release excavation and movement of earth materials, contact of construction machinery with bare soil, and exposure of bare soil Road design and soil piles to wind. A secondary source of emissions may • Limiting access road gradients to reduce runoff-induced include exhaust from diesel engines of earth moving equipment, erosion as well as from open burning of solid waste on-site. Techniques to • Providing adequate road drainage based on road width, consider for the reduction and control of air emissions from surface material, compaction, and maintenance construction and decommissioning sites include: • Minimizing dust from material handling sources, such as Disturbance to water bodies conveyors and bins, by using covers and/or control • Depending on the potential for adverse impacts, installing equipment (water suppression, bag house, or cyclone) free-spanning structures (e.g., single span bridges) for road • Minimizing dust from open area sources, including storage watercourse crossings piles, by using control measures such as installing • Restricting the duration and timing of in-stream activities to enclosures and covers, and increasing the moisture content lower low periods, and avoiding periods critical to biological • Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such cycles of valued flora and fauna (e.g., migration, spawning, as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust etc.) from vehicle movements • For in-stream works, using isolation techniques such as • Selectively removing potential hazardous air pollutants, such berming or diversion during construction to limit the exposure as asbestos, from existing infrastructure prior to demolition of disturbed sediments to moving water • Managing emissions from mobile sources according to • Consider using trenchless technology for pipeline crossings Section 1.1 (e.g., suspended crossings) or installation by directional • Avoiding open burning of solid (refer to solid waste drilling management guidance in Section 1.6) Structural (slope) stability Solid Waste • Providing effective short term measures for slope Non-hazardous solid waste generated at construction and stabilization, sediment control and subsidence control until decommissioning sites includes excess fill materials from grading long term measures for the operational phase can be and excavation activities, scrap wood and metals, and small implemented concrete spills. Other non-hazardous solid wastes include office, • Providing adequate drainage systems to minimize and kitchen, and dormitory wastes when these types of operations are control infiltration part of construction project activities. Hazardous solid waste includes contaminated soils, which could potentially be encountered on-site due to previous land use activities, or small APRIL 30, 2007 90 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP amounts of machinery maintenance materials, such as oily rags, Wastewater Discharges used oil filters, and used oil, as well as spill cleanup materials from Construction and decommissioning activities may include the oil and fuel spills. Techniques for preventing and controlling non- generation of sanitary wastewater discharges in varying quantities hazardous and hazardous construction site solid waste include depending on the number of workers involved. Adequate portable those already discussed in Section 1.6. or permanent sanitation facilities serving all workers should be provided at all construction sites. Sanitary wastewater in Hazardous Materials construction and other sites should be managed as described in Construction and decommissioning activities may pose the Section 1.3. potential for release of petroleum based products, such as lubricants, hydraulic fluids, or fuels during their storage, transfer, Contaminated Land or use in equipment. These materials may also be encountered Land contamination may be encountered in sites under during decommissioning activities in building components or construction or decommissioning due to known or unknown industrial process equipment. Techniques for prevention, historical releases of hazardous materials or oil, or due to the minimization, and control of these impacts include: presence of abandoned infrastructure formerly used to store or • Providing adequate secondary containment for fuel storage handle these materials, including underground storage tanks. tanks and for the temporary storage of other fluids such as Actions necessary to manage the risk from contaminated land will lubricating oils and hydraulic fluids, depend on factors such as the level and location of contamination, • Using impervious surfaces for refueling areas and other fluid the type and risks of the contaminated media, and the intended transfer areas land use. However, a basic management strategy should include: • Training workers on the correct transfer and handling of fuels • Managing contaminated media with the objective of and chemicals and the response to spills protecting the safety and health of occupants of the site, the • Providing portable spill containment and cleanup equipment surrounding community, and the environment post on site and training in the equipment deployment construction or post decommissioning • Assessing the contents of hazardous materials and • Understanding the historical use of the land with regard to petroleum-based products in building systems (e.g. PCB the potential presence of hazardous materials or oil prior to containing electrical equipment, asbestos-containing building initiation of construction or decommissioning activities materials) and process equipment and removing them prior • Preparing plans and procedures to respond to the discovery to initiation of decommissioning activities, and managing their of contaminated media to minimize or reduce the risk to treatment and disposal according to Sections 1.5 and 1.6 on health, safety, and the environment consistent with the Hazardous Materials and Hazardous Waste Management, approach for Contaminated Land in Section 1.6 respectively • Preparation of a management plan to manage obsolete, • Assessing the presence of hazardous substances in or on abandoned, hazardous materials or oil consistent with the building materials (e.g., polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos- approach to hazardous waste management described in containing flooring or insulation) and decontaminating or Section 1.6. properly managing contaminated building materials APRIL 30, 2007 91 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP Successful implementation of any management strategy may • Implementing good house-keeping practices, such as the require identification and cooperation with whoever is responsible sorting and placing loose construction materials or demolition and liable for the contamination. debris in established areas away from foot paths • Cleaning up excessive waste debris and liquid spills regularly 4.2 Occupational Health and Safety{ • Locating electrical cords and ropes in common areas and TC "4.2 Occupational Health and marked corridors Safety" \f C \l "2" } • Use of slip retardant footwear Over-exertion Work in Heights Over-exertion, and ergonomic injuries and illnesses, such as Falls from elevation associated with working with ladders, repetitive motion, over-exertion, and manual handling, are among scaffolding, and partially built or demolished structures are among the most common causes of injuries in construction and the most common cause of fatal or permanent disabling injury at decommissioning sites. Recommendations for their prevention construction or decommissioning sites. If fall hazards exist, a fall and control include: protection plan should be in place which includes one or more of • Training of workers in lifting and materials handling the following aspects, depending on the nature of the fall hazard95: techniques in construction and decommissioning projects, • Training and use of temporary fall prevention devices, such including the placement of weight limits above which as rails or other barriers able to support a weight of 200 mechanical assists or two-person lifts are necessary pounds, when working at heights equal or greater than two • Planning work site layout to minimize the need for manual meters or at any height if the risk includes falling into transfer of heavy loads operating machinery, into water or other liquid, into • Selecting tools and designing work stations that reduce force hazardous substances, or through an opening in a work requirements and holding times, and which promote surface improved postures, including, where applicable, user • Training and use of personal fall arrest systems, such as full adjustable work stations body harnesses and energy absorbing lanyards able to • Implementing administrative controls into work processes, support 5000 pounds (also described in this section in such as job rotations and rest or stretch breaks Working at Heights above), as well as fall rescue procedures to deal with workers whose fall has been successfully Slips and Falls arrested. The tie in point of the fall arresting system should Slips and falls on the same elevation associated with poor also be able to support 5000 pounds housekeeping, such as excessive waste debris, loose construction • Use of control zones and safety monitoring systems to warn materials, liquid spills, and uncontrolled use of electrical cords and workers of their proximity to fall hazard zones, as well as ropes on the ground, are also among the most frequent cause of lost time accidents at construction and decommissioning sites. Recommended methods for the prevention of slips and falls from, 95 Additional information on identification of fall hazards and design of protection systems can be found in the United States Occupational Health and Safety or on, the same elevation include: Administration’s (US OSHA) web site: http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/fallprotection/index.html APRIL 30, 2007 92 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP securing, marking, and labeling covers for openings in floors, a turn while moving. Techniques for the prevention and control of roofs, or walking surfaces these impacts include: • Planning and segregating the location of vehicle traffic, Struck By Objects machine operation, and walking areas, and controlling Construction and demolition activities may pose significant vehicle traffic through the use of one-way traffic routes, hazards related to the potential fall of materials or tools, as well as establishment of speed limits, and on-site trained flag-people ejection of solid particles from abrasive or other types of power wearing high-visibility vests or outer clothing covering to tools which can result in injury to the head, eyes, and extremities. direct traffic Techniques for the prevention and control of these hazards • Ensuring the visibility of personnel through their use of high include: visibility vests when working in or walking through heavy • Using a designated and restricted waste drop or discharge equipment operating areas, and training of workers to verify zones, and/or a chute for safe movement of wastes from eye contact with equipment operators before approaching the upper to lower levels operating vehicle • Conducting sawing, cutting, grinding, sanding, chipping or • Ensuring moving equipment is outfitted with audible back-up chiseling with proper guards and anchoring as applicable alarms • Maintaining clear traffic ways to avoid driving of heavy • Using inspected and well-maintained lifting devices that are equipment over loose scrap appropriate for the load, such as cranes, and securing loads • Use of temporary fall protection measures in scaffolds and when lifting them to higher job-site elevations. out edges of elevated work surfaces, such as hand rails and toe boards to prevent materials from being dislodged Dust • Evacuating work areas during blasting operations, and using • Dust suppression techniques should be implemented, such blast mats or other means of deflection to minimize fly rock or as applying water or non-toxic chemicals to minimize dust ejection of demolition debris if work is conducted in proximity from vehicle movements to people or structures • PPE, such as dusk masks, should be used where dust levels • Wearing appropriate PPE, such as safety glasses with side are excessive shields, face shields, hard hats, and safety shoes Confined Spaces and Excavations Moving Machinery Examples of confined spaces that may be present in construction Vehicle traffic and use of lifting equipment in the movement of or demolition sites include: silos, vats, hoppers, utility vaults, machinery and materials on a construction site may pose tanks, sewers, pipes, and access shafts. Ditches and trenches temporary hazards, such as physical contact, spills, dust, may also be considered a confined space when access or egress emissions, and noise. Heavy equipment operators have limited is limited. In addition to the guidance provided in Section 2.8 the fields of view close to their equipment and may not see occupational hazards associated with confined spaces and pedestrians close to the vehicle. Center-articulated vehicles create excavations in construction and decommissioning sites should be a significant impact or crush hazard zone on the outboard side of prevented according to the following recommendations: APRIL 30, 2007 93 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP • Controlling site-specific factors which may contribute to respirators, clothing/protective suits, gloves and eye excavation slope instability including, for example, the use of protection excavation dewatering, side-walls support, and slope gradient adjustments that eliminate or minimize the risk of 4.3 Community Health and Safety{ TC collapse, entrapment, or drowning "4.3 Community Health and Safety" \f • Providing safe means of access and egress from C \l "2" } excavations, such as graded slopes, graded access route, or General Site Hazards stairs and ladders Projects should implement risk management strategies to protect • Avoiding the operation of combustion equipment for the community from physical, chemical, or other hazards prolonged periods inside excavations areas where other associated with sites under construction and decommissioning. workers are required to enter unless the area is actively Risks may arise from inadvertent or intentional trespassing, ventilated including potential contact with hazardous materials, contaminated soils and other environmental media, buildings that are vacant or Other Site Hazards under construction, or excavations and structures which may pose Construction and decommissioning sites may pose a risk of falling and entrapment hazards. Risk management strategies may exposure to dust, chemicals, hazardous or flammable materials, include: and wastes in a combination of liquid, solid, or gaseous forms, which should be prevented through the implementation of project- • Restricting access to the site, through a combination of specific plans and other applicable management practices, institutional and administrative controls, with a focus on high including: risk structures or areas depending on site-specific situations, including fencing, signage, and communication of risks to the • Use of specially trained personnel to identify and remove local community waste materials from tanks, vessels, processing equipment • Removing hazardous conditions on construction sites that or contaminated land as a first step in decommissioning cannot be controlled affectively with site access restrictions, activities to allow for safe excavation, construction, such as covering openings to small confined spaces, dismantling or demolition ensuring means of escape for larger openings such as • Use of specially trained personnel to identify and selectively trenches or excavations, or locked storage of hazardous remove potentially hazardous materials in building elements materials prior to dismantling or demolition including, for example, insulation or structural elements containing asbestos and Disease Prevention Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs), electrical components Increased incidence of communicable and vector-borne diseases containing mercury96 attributable to construction activities represents a potentially • Use of waste-specific PPE based on the results of an serious health threat to project personnel and residents of local occupational health and safety assessment, including communities. Recommendations for the prevention and control of communicable and vector-borne diseases also applicable to 96 Additional information on the management and removal of asbestos containing building materials can be found in ASTM Standard E2356 and E1368 APRIL 30, 2007 94 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: CONSTRUCTION AND DECOMMISSIONING WORLD BANK GROUP construction phase activities are provided in Section 3.6 (Disease Prevention). Traffic Safety Construction activities may result in a significant increase in movement of heavy vehicles for the transport of construction materials and equipment increasing the risk of traffic-related accidents and injuries to workers and local communities. The incidence of road accidents involving project vehicles during construction should be minimized through a combination of education and awareness-raising, and the adoption of procedures described in Section 3.4 (Traffic Safety). APRIL 30, 2007 95 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES WORLD BANK GROUP References and Additional Sources ATSDR (Agency for Toxic Substance and Disease Registry). Quick Reference Chavasse, D.C. and H.H. Yap, eds. 1997. Chemical Methods for the Control of Pocket Guide for Toxicological Profiles. http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/toxguides/ Vectors and Pests of Public Health Importance. Geneva, Switzerland: World (accessed May 19, 2006). Health Organization. ATSDR. 2005. Top 20 Hazardous Substances 2005. Dockrill, Paul and Frank Friedrich. 2001. “Boilers and Heaters: Improving Energy http://www.atsdr.cdc.gov/cxcx3.html (accessed May 19, 2006). Efficiency.” NRCAN. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/boilersheaters.pdf Air and Waste Management Association (AWMA). 2000. Air Pollution Engineering Manual, Second Edition. John Wiley & Sons, Inc.. New York, NY. Environment Canada, 2005. Hazardous Waste. http://www.atl.ec.gc.ca/pollution/hazardouswaste.html (accessed May 19, 2006). ACGIH (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists). 2005. Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances in the Work Environment. European Commission. 2000. “Guidance Document for EPER implementation.” Cincinnati:ACGIH. Directorate-General for Environment. http://ec.europa.eu/environment/ippc/eper/index.htm ANSI (American National Standards Institute). Homepage. http://www.ansi.org/ (accessed May 19, 2006). European Council Directive 91/271 of 21 May 1991 concerning urban wastewater treatment (http://ec.europa.eu/environment/water/water- ADB. 2003. Road Safety Audit for Road Projects: An Operational Tool. Asian urbanwaste/info/docs_en.htm) Development Bank, Manila. EPER (European Pollutant Emission Register). Homepage. American Petroleum Institute, Management of Process Hazards (R.P. 750). http://www.eper.cec.eu.int/eper/default.asp (accessed May 19, 2006). Assum, T. 1998. Road Safety in Africa: Appraisal of Road Safety Initiatives in EREC (European Renewable Energy Council). 2006. Renewable Energy Sources. Five African Countries. Working Paper No. 33. The World Bank and United http://www.erec-renewables.org/sources/default.htm (accessed April 24, 2006). Nations Economic Commission for Africa. EUROPA. Summaries of Legislation: Air Pollution. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E1739-95(2002) Standard http://europa.eu.int/scadplus/leg/en/s15004.htm (accessed March 25, 2006) Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action Applied at Petroleum Release Sites Fairman, Robyn, Carl D.Mead, and W. Peter Williams. 1999. “Environmental Risk ASTM E2081-00(2004)e1 Standard Guide for Risk-Based Corrective Action (at Assessment - Approaches, Experiences and Information Sources”. London: chemical release sites). Monitoring and Assessment Research Centre, King's College,. ASTM E 1368 - Standard Practice for Visual Inspection of Asbestos Abatement http://reports.eea.eu.int/GH-07-97-595-EN-C2/en Projects FAO (Food and Agriculture Organization). 1995. “Guidelines on Good Labeling ASTM E 2356 - Standard Practice for Comprehensive Building Asbestos Surveys Practices for Pesticides.” Rome: FAO. http://ecoport.org/Resources/Refs/Pesticid/Guides/guides.htm ASTM E 2394 - Standard Practice for Maintenance, Renovation and Repair of Installed Asbestos Cement Products. FAO. 1985. “Guidelines for the Packaging and Storage of Pesticides.” Rome: FAO http://www.fao.org/ag/AGP/AGPP/Pesticid/Code/Download/pacstor.doc Australian Government. NPI Industry Reporting. Department of the Environment and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/ Francey, R., J. Pickford and R. Reed. 1992. “A Guide to the Development of On- site Sanitation.” Geneva: World Health Organization. Australian Government. 2004. “National Pollutant Inventory Guide.” Department http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/hygiene/envsan/onsitesan/en/print.html Of Environment and Heritage. http://www.npi.gov.au/handbooks/pubs/npiguide.pdf GVRD (Greater Vancouver Regional District). 1999. Caring for our Waterways: Awareness and Preparedness for Emergencies at Local Level (APELL) Guidelines Liquid Waste Management Plan Stage 2, Discussion Document. 136 pp. available at: http://www.uneptie.org/pc/apell/publications/handbooks.html GVRD. 2001. “Liquid Waste Management Plan.” Greater Vancouver: Stormwater Bringezu, Stefan and Helmut Schutz. 2001. “Material use indicators for the Management Technical Advisory Task Group. European Union, 1980-1997 – Economy-side material flow accounts and balances http://www.gvrd.bc.ca/sewerage/lwmp_feb2001/lwmp_plan_feb2001.pdf and derived indicators of resource use.” European Commission. http://www.belspo.be/platformisd/Library/Material%20use%20Bringezu.PDF IESNA (Illuminating Engineering Society of North America). Homepage. http://www.iesna.org/ (accessed May 18, 2006) BC MOE (BC Ministry of Environment). Guidance on Contaminated Sites. http://www.env.gov.bc.ca/epd/epdpa/contam_sites/guidance/ (accessed May 18, Industry Canada. Eco-efficiency. http://strategis.ic.gc.ca/epic/internet/inee- 2006) ee.nsf/en/Home (accessed May 18, 2006) CIWMB (California Integrated Waste Management Board). “Sustainable Materials”. IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change). National Greenhouse Gas State Training Manual. Inventories Program. http://www.ipcc-nggip.iges.or.jp/ (accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.ciwmb.ca.gov/GreenBuilding/Training/StateManual/Materials.doc ILO-OSH (International Labour Organization – Occupational Safety and Health). (accessed May 18, 2006) 2001. “Guidelines on Occupational Safety & Health Management Systems”. CCPS (Center for Chemical Process Safety). Homepage. American Institute of Geneva: International Labour Chemical Engineers. www.aiche.org/ccps (accessed May 18, 2006) Office. http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/safework/cops/english/download /e000013.pdf CCPS. 1992. Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures. American Institute of Chemical Engineers. ICC (International Code Council). 2006. “International Building Code”. Falls Church, Virginia: ICC. APRIL 30, 2007 96 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES WORLD BANK GROUP IATA (International Air Transport Association). 2005. “Dangerous Goods NRCAN. 2004. “EnerGuide for Industry: Your guide to selecting energy-efficient Regulations Manual.” Geneva: IATA. http://www.iata.org/ps/publications/9065.htm industrial equipment”. Office of Energy Efficiency. (accessed May 18, 2006) http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/Energuide-industry/EGI- brochure-e.cfm IAEA (International Atomic Energy Agency). International Basic Safety Standard for protection against Ionizing Radiation and for the Safety of Radiation Sources NRCAN. Energy Star® - Heating, Cooling and Ventilation. Office of Energy http://www-ns.iaea.org/standards/documents/default.asp?sub=160 (accessed May Efficiency. 19, 2006). http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/energystar/english/consumers/heating.cfm?text=N&printvie w=N#AC (accessed April 9, 2006) IHS 1996. ISO 9613 – Acoustics – Attenuation of sound during propagation outdoors – Part 2: General method of calculation. NRCAN. Technical Factsheet CanMOST – Canadian Motor Selection Tool. Office http://engineers.ihs.com/document/abstract/XVNLCAAAAAAAAAAA (accessed of Energy Efficiency. May 19, 2006). http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/pub/cipec/canadian-motor/index.cfm (accessed May 18, 2006) IMO (International Maritime Organization). International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code. http://www.imo.org/Safety/mainframe.asp?topic_id=158 (accessed NRCAN. 2005a. “Team up for Energy Savings - Compressed Air.” Office of Energy May 18, 2006) Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/compressed-air.pdf ISO (International Organization for Standardization). Quality and Environmental NRCAN. 2005b. Team up for Energy Savings – Lighting.” Office of Energy Management. http://www.iso.org/iso/en/iso9000-14000/index.html (accessed May Efficiency. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/industrial/cipec/light.pdf 18, 2006) NRCAN. 2006a. Model National Energy Code for Buildings (MNECB) for the IOMC (Inter-Organization Programme for the Sound Management of Chemicals. Commercial Building Incentive Program. 2001. “The WHO Recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard and http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/commercial/financial-assistance/new- Guidelines to Classification 2000-2002.” International Program on Chemical buildings/mnecb.cfm?attr=20 (accessed March 24, 2006) Safety. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2002/a76526.pdf NRCAN. 2006b. Office of Energy Efficiency General Database. Kates, R., Hohenemser, C., and J. Kasperson, Editors. 1985. Perilous Progress: http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/infosource/PDFs (accessed March 24, 2006) Management the Hazards of Technology. Westview Press, London. NRCAN. 2006c. Office of Energy Efficiency – Industry Projects Database. Knowlton, R. Ellis. 1992. A Manual of Hazard & Operability Studies. Chemetics http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/publications/infosource/home/index.cfm?act=category&cate International. gory=07&PrintView=N&Text=N (accessed March 24, 2006) LDAR (Leak Detection and Repair Professionals). http://www.ldar.net/ (accessed NRCAN. 2006d. Energy Efficiency Regulations and Standards for Industry – May 18, 2006). Canada’s Energy Efficiency Regulations. http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/industrial/regulations-standards/index.cfm?attr=24 Lijzen, J.P.A., A.J. Baars, P.F. Otte, M.G.J. Rikken, F.A. Swartjes, E.M.J. (accessed April 24, 2006) Verbruggen and A.P. van Wezel. 2001. Technical evaluation of the Intervention Values for Soil/sediment and Groundwater - Human and ecotoxicological risk New Zealand Ministry of the Environment. 2004. “Contaminated Land assessment and derivation of risk limits for soil, aquatic sediment and Management Guidelines No.5: Site Investigation and Analysis of Soils.” Federal groundwater. RIVM report 711701 023. Netherlands National Institute of Public Government of New Zealand. Health and the Environment. http://www.mfe.govt.nz/publications/hazardous/contaminated-land-mgmt- http://www.rivm.nl/bibliotheek/rapporten/711701023.pdf guidelines-no5/index.html Massachusetts Department of Environment. Cleanup Sites and Spills. North American Energy Working Group. “North American Energy Efficiency http://www.mass.gov/dep/cleanup (accessed May 19, 2006). Standards and Labeling.” MSHA (Mine Safety and Health Administration). Homepage. http://www.msha.gov/ Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD). Database on (accessed May 19, 2006). Use and Release of Industrial Chemicals. http://appli1.oecd.org/ehs/urchem.nsf NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health). Center for Disease OECD. 1999. Safety Strategies for Rural Roads. Organization for Economic Control and Prevention – Department of Health and Human Services. Cooperation and Development, Paris. www.oecd.org/dataoecd/59/2/2351720.pdf http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/homepage.html (accessed May 18, 2006) OHSAS. 2000. OHSAS 18002:2000. Occupational Health and Safety National Research Council of Canada, 2005. Building Codes. http://www.nrc- Management Systems - Guidelines for the Implementation of OHSAS 18001. cnrc.gc.ca/doingbusiness/codes_e.html (accessed May 18, 2006). OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration). Emergency Standards. NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). Electric Motors – Factsheet 6. Office of http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/etools/evacuation/standards_card.html (accessed May Energy Efficiency. 18, 2006) http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/regulations/html/Factsheet6.cfm?text=N&printview=N (accessed May 18, 2006) OSHA. Safety and Health Topics - Toxic Metals. http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/metalsheavy/ (accessed May 19, 2006) NRCAN. Energy-Efficient Motor Systems Assessment Guide. Office of Energy Efficiency. Peden, Margie, David Sleet, Adnan Hyder and Colin Mathers, eds. 2004. “World http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/cipec/ieep/newscentre/motor_system/introduction.cfm?text= Report on Road Traffic Injury Prevention.” Geneva: World Health Organization. N&printview=N (accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.who.int/world-health-day/2004/infomaterials/world_report/en/ NRCAN (Natural Resources Canada). EnerGuide Program. Office of Energy PDEP (Pennsylvania Department of Environment Protection). Official Recycled Efficiency. Product Guide. http://www.dep.state.pa.us/wm_apps/recycledproducts/ (accessed http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/equipment/english/index.cfm?PrintView=N&Text=N May 18, 2006) (accessed March 24, 2006) APRIL 30, 2007 97 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES WORLD BANK GROUP PTCL (Physical and Theoretical Chemistry Lab). Safety (MSDS) data for (US DOE). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers – Combustion. benzo(a)pyrene. http://www.physchem.ox.ac.uk/MSDS/BE/benzo(a)pyrene.html http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/combustion.html#opp1 (accessed (accessed May 18, 2006) April 30, 2006). Prokop, Gundula. 2002. “Second Technical Workshop on Contaminated Sites - US DOE (US Department of Energy). Industry Plant Managers and Engineers – Workshop Proceedings and Follow-up.” European Environment Agency. Process Heating Systems. http://reports.eea.europa.eu/technical_report_2002_76/en/Tech76.pdf http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/process.html (accessed April 30, 2006). Ritter, L., K.R. Solomon, J. Forget, M. Stemeroff and C.O’Leary. “An Assessment Report on: DDT-Aldrin-Dieldrin-Endrin-Chlordane, Heptachlor-Hexachlorobenzene, US DOE. Industry Plant Managers and Engineers – Steam Boilers. Mirex-Toxaphene, Polychlorinated Biphenyls, Dioxins and Furans.” International http://www.eere.energy.gov/consumer/industry/steam.html (accessed April 30, Programme on Chemical Safety. 2006). http://www.pops.int/documents/background/assessreport/en/ritteren.pdf (accessed May 18, 2006) US DOE. Industrial Technologies Program – Best Practices. http://www1.eere.energy.gov/industry/bestpractices/ (accessed April 30, 2006) Ross A, Baguley C, Hills B, McDonald M, Solcock D.1991. “Towards Safer Roads in Developing Countries: A Guide for Planners and Engineers.” Berkshire: US DOE. “The Big Picture on Process Heating”. Industrial Technologies Program – Transport and Road Research Laboratory. Best Practices. http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/em_proheat_bigpict.pdf Rushbrook, P. and M. Pugh. 1998. “Solid Waste Landfills in Middle- and Lower- (accessed April 30, 2006). Income Countries: A Technical Guide to Planning, Design, and Operation.” World Bank. http://www- US DOE. 2005 . “Improve Motor System Efficiency for a Broader Range of Motors wds.worldbank.org/external/default/WDSContentServer/IW3P/IB/2002/12/06/0000 with MotorMaster+ International.” Industrial Technologies Program. 94946_02112104104987/Rendered/PDF/multi0page.pdf http://eereweb.ee.doe.gov/industry/bestpractices/pdfs/mmplus_international.pdf SCPOP (Stockholm Convention on POPs). Guidance Documents. US DOT (US Department of Transportation). HAZMATS Regulations. http://www.pops.int/documents/guidance/ (accessed May 19, 2006) http://hazmat.dot.gov/ (accessed May 18, 2006) Tsunokawa, Koji and Christopher Hoban, eds. 1997. “Roads and the US Energy Star Program. Guidelines for Energy Management. Environment: A Handbook.” Washington, D.C.: World Bank. http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=guidelines.download_guidelines (accessed http://www.worldbank.org/transport/publicat/reh/toc.htm April 24, 2006) UK Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs. http://www.defra.gov.uk/ US Energy Star Program. Tools and Resources. (accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=tools_resources.bus_energy_management _tools_resources (accessed April 9, 2006) UK Environment Agency. Contaminated Land Exposure Assessment (CLEA). http://www.environment- US EPA (US Environmental Protection Agency). Air Compliance Advisor. agency.gov.uk/subjects/landquality/113813/672771/?version=1&lang=_e http://www.epa.gov/ttn/ecas/ACA.htm (accessed May 18, 2006) (accessed May 18, 2006) US EPA. Ambient Air Monitoring QA Program. UN/ECE (United Nations/Economic Commission for Europe). United Nations http://www.epa.gov/airprogm/oar/oaqps/qa/index.html#guidance (accessed May Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods Model Regulations. 19, 2006). http://www.unece.org/trans/ (accessed May 18, 2006) US EPA. Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines – Product Fact Sheets. UN/ECE. The Atmospheric Emission Inventory Guidebook. http://www.epa.gov/cpg/factshts.htm (accessed May 18, 2006) http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual/TFEI/unece.htm (accessed May 18, 2006). US EPA. EPA Guidance. Environmentally Preferable Purchasing. UNEP (United Nation Environment Program). Secretariat of the Basel Convention http://www.epa.gov/oppt/epp/pubs/guidance/guidancepage.htm (accessed May on Hazardous Waste Management. http://www.basel.int/index.html (accessed 18, 2006) May 18, 2006) US EPA. Hazardous Waste. http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/osw/hazwaste.htm UNEP. Persistant Organic Pollutants. http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/ (accessed (accessed May 19, 2006). May 18, 2006) US EPA. Hazardous Waste Identification. UNEP. Country contributions: Information on the regulatory status of POPs; bans, http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/id/id.htm#id (accessed May 19, 2006). restrictions, and/or other legal permitted uses. US EPA. Major Environmental Laws. Laws and Regulations. http://www.chem.unep.ch/pops/POPs_Inc/INC_3/inf-english/inf3-9/sect5.pdf http://www.epa.gov/epahome/laws.htm (accessed May 18, 2006) (accessed May 18, 2006). US EPA. Performance Track Assistance. National Environmental Performance UNEP. 1993. Cleaner Production Worldwide Volume 1. Track. http://www.epa.gov/performancetrack/ptrackassist.htm (accessed May 18, http://www.uneptie.org/PC/cp/library/catalogue/regional_reports.htm . 2006) UNEP. 1997. The Environmental Management of Industrial Estates. Industry and US EPA 40 CFR Part 133, Secondary Treatment Regulation Environment, United Nations Environment Programme. (http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_02/40cfr133_02.html) US DOE. Building Toolbox – Boilers. Building Technologies Program. US EPA. Persistant Organic Pollutants (POPs). http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/components/hvac/boilers.html http://www.epa.gov/oppfead1/international/pops.htm (accessed May 19, 2006) (accessed April 30, 2006) US EPA. Pollution Prevention Highlights. http://www.epa.gov/p2/ (accessed May US DOE. 2002. Heating and Cooling Equipment Selection. Office of Building 18, 2006) Technology, State and Community Programs – Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy. http://www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/info/documents/pdfs/26459.pdf APRIL 30, 2007 98 Environmental, Health, and Safety (EHS) Guidelines GENERAL EHS GUIDELINES: REFERENCES AND ADDITIONAL SOURCES WORLD BANK GROUP US EPA. Region 9 Preliminary Remediation Goals. WHO. 2000a. Guidelines for the Purchase of Public Health Pesticides. http://www.epa.gov/region9/waste/sfund/prg/ (accessed May 19, 2006). WHO/CDS/WHOPES/2000.1. Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and Eradication, World Health Organization. US EPA. Technology Transfer Network Clearinghouse for Inventories and Emissions Factors. http://www.epa.gov/ttn/chief/ WHO. 2000b. Air Quality Guidelines for Europe. Geneva:WHO. http://www.euro.who.int/document/e71922.pdf US EPA. Waste Minimization. http://www.epa.gov/wastemin/ (accessed May 19, 2006). WHO. 2000. Towards an Assessment of the Socioeconomic Impact of Arsenic Poisoning in Bangladesh. WHO/SDE/WSH/00.4. World Health Organization. US EPA. 1991. Technical support document for water quality-based toxic control. Washington, DC.: Office of Water Enforcement and Permits, Office of Water WHO. 2001. Chemistry and Specifications of Pesticides. Technical Report Series Regulations and Standards. 899. Geneva: WHO. US EPA. 2004. National Recommended Water Quality Criteria. Washington. DC: WHO. 2003. “Draft Guidelines for the Management of Public Health Pesticides.” United States Office of Water. Environmental Protection Agency Office of Science Communicable Disease Control, Prevention and Eradication, World Health and Technology (4304T). Organization. http://whqlibdoc.who.int/hq/2003/WHO_CDS_WHOPES_2003.7.pdf US EPA. 2005. Chromated Copper Arsenate (CCA). Pesticides Re-registration. WHO. 2004. Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality - Volume 1 Recommendations. http://www.epa.gov/oppad001/reregistration/cca/ (accessed May 18, 2006) Geneva: WHO. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/GDWQ2004web.pdf US EPA. 2006. 40CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, section 302.4, Designation of Hazardous Substances. http://ecfr.gpoaccess.gov/cgi/t/text/text- WHO Guidelines for the Safe Use of Wastewater, Excreta and Greywater. Volume idx?c=ecfr&sid=a1d39cb9632558b450b2d09e45b5ca78&rgn=div8&view=text&nod 2: Wastewater Use in Agriculture e=40:27.0.1.1.2.0.1.4&idno=40 http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/wastewater/gsuweg2/en/index.html WHO. 2005. Guidelines for drinking-water quality. USGS (US Geological Survey). 2000. Recycled Aggregates—Profitable Resource http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq3/en/ (accessed May 18, Conservation. USGS Fact Sheet FS–181–99. http://pubs.usgs.gov/fs/fs-0181- 2006) 99/fs-0181-99so.pdf Woolliams, J. 2002. “Planning, Design and Construction Strategies for Green US NFPA (US National Fire Protection Association). 2006. 101- Life Safety Code Buildings.” Eco-City Planning Company. Handbook. http://www.greenbuildingsbc.com/new_buildings/pdf_files/greenbuild_strategies_g http://www.nfpa.org/catalog/product.asp?category%5Fname=&pid=10106&target% uide.pdf 5Fpid=10106&src%5Fpid=&link%5Ftype=search (accessed May 19, 2006). Yassi, A. et al. 1998. Basic Environmental Health. WHO/EHG/98.19. Office of US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR 1910.119 App Global and Integrated Environmental Health, World Health Organization, Geneva. A, Threshold Quantities. Zaim, M. 2002. Global Insecticide Use for Vector-Borne Disease Control. US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29CFR Part 1910.120, WHO/CDS/WHOPES/GCDPP/2002.2. Communicable Disease Control, Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Standard. Prevention and Eradication, World Health Organization. US Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 29 CFR Part 1910.119. WHO. 1987. Technology for Water Supply and Sanitation in Developing Countries. Technical Report Series No. 742. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1989. New Approaches to Improve Road Safety. Technical Report 781b. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1993. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 1: Recommendations. 2nd Edition. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1994. Operation and Maintenance of Urban Water Supply and Sanitation Systems: A Guide for Managers. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1996. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 2: Health Criteria and Other Supporting Information. World Health Organization, Geneva. WHO. 1997. Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality. Volume 3: Surveillance and Control of Community Supplies. World Health Organization, Geneva. http://www.who.int/water_sanitation_health/dwq/gdwq2v1/en/index2.html (accessed May 18, 2006) WHO. 1999. Draft Specifications for Bacterial Larvicides for Public Health Use. WHO/CDS/CPC/WHOPES/99.2. Communicable Diseases Prevention and Control, WHO Pesticide Evaluation Scheme, World Health Organization. WHO. 1999. Prevention and Control of Dengue and Dengue Haemorrhagic Fever: Comprehensive Guidelines. WHO Regional Publication, SEARO No. 29. Regional Office for South-East Asia, World Health Organization, New Delhi. WHO. 1999. Safety of Pyrethroid-Treated Mosquito Nets. WHO/CDS/CPE/WHOPES/99.5. World Health Organization, Geneva. APRIL 30, 2007 99